Sony PDW 700 Professional Disc Camcorder Operation manual

PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER
PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER
PDW-700
PDW-700
The supplied CD-ROM includes operation manuals for the PDW-700
Professional Disc Camcorder (English, Japanese, French, German,
Italian, Spanish and Chinese versions) in PDF format.
For more details, see “Using the CD-ROM manual” on page 12.
Sony Corporation
PDW-700
(SYL)
3-297-517-03 (1)
Printed on recycled paper.
Printed in Japan
2008.06.13
© 2008
OPERATION MANUAL
1st Edition (Revised 1)
[English]
This label is located
inside the outside
panel of the unit.
WARNING
Denna etikett finns på
apparatens ovansida.
Denne mærkat sidder
på apparatets øverste
panel.
This Professional Disc Camcorder is
classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
Tämä kyltti sijaitsee
laitteen yläpinnalla.
Laser diode properties
Dette merket er
plassert på oversiden
av produktet.
Wavelength: 400 to 410 nm
Emission duration: Continuous
Laser output power: 135 mW (max. of
pulse peak), 65 mW (max. of CW)
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)
Egenskaber for laserdiode
Bølgelængde: 400 til 410 nm
Strålingsvarighed: Kontinuerlig
Afgivet lasereffekt: 135 mW (maks
stråletoppunkt), 65 mW (maks ved
kontinuerlig stråling)
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)
Tekniska data för laserdiod
Våglängd: 400 till 410 nm
Emissionslängd: Kontinuerlig
Laseruteffekt: 135 mW (max. för
pulstopp), 65 mW (max. för kontinuerlig
våg)
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)
Egenskaper for laserdiode
Bølgelengde: 400 til 410 nm
Strålingsvarighet: Uavbrutt
Utgangseffekt for laser: 135 mW (maks av
pulshøyde), 65 mW (maks av CW)
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)
CAUTION
The use of optical instruments with this
product will increase eye hazard.
Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
VAROITUS!
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN
TÄSSÄ KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA
TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA
KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1
YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE
LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
VARNING
OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT
SÄTT ÄN I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING
SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN
UTSÄTTAS FÖR OSYNLIG
LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM ÖVERSKRIDER
GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.
For the customers in the U.S.A.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
2
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
— Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
All interface cables used to connect
peripherals must be shielded in order to
comply with the limits for a digital device
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC
Rules.
If you have any questions about this product,
you may call;
Sony Customer Information Service Center
1-800-222-7669 or http://www.sony.com/
Declaration of Conformity
Trade Name: SONY
Model:
PDW-700
Responsible party:
Sony Electronics Inc.
Address:
16530 Via Esprillo,
San Diego, CA 92127
U.S.A.
Telephone Number:
858-942-2230
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
For the State of California, USA only
Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery
contains perchlorate.
For the customers in Europe
This product with the CE marking complies
with the EMC Directive issued by the
Commission of the European Community.
Compliance with this directive implies
conformity to the following European
standards:
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference
(Emission)
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility
(Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the
following Electromagnetic Environments: E1
(residential), E2 (commercial and light
industrial), E3 (urban outdoors), E4
(controlled EMC environment, ex. TV studio).
The manufacturer of this product is Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Japan.
The Authorized Representative for EMC and
product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH,
Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart,
Germany. For any service or guarantee
matters please refer to the addresses given
in separate service or guarantee documents.
3
For the customers in Taiwan only
AVERTISSEMENT
Cette étiquette est
placée à l'intérieur du
panneau extérieur de
l'appareil.
• EN55103-1 : Interférences
électromagnétiques (émission)
• EN55103-2 : Sensibilité électromagnétique
(immunité)
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les
environnements électromagnétiques
suivants : E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et
industrie légère), E3 (urbain extérieur) et E4
(environnement EMC contrôlé, ex. studio de
télévision).
Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Japon.
Le représentant autorisé pour EMC et la
sécurité des produits est Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Allemagne. Pour toute question
concernant le service ou la garantie, veuillez
consulter les adresses indiquées dans les
documents de service ou de garantie
séparés.
WARNUNG
ATTENTION
L’emploi d’instruments optiques avec ce
produit augmentera les risques pour les
yeux.
L’emploi de commandes ou ajustements ou
l’exécution de procédures autres que celles
spécifiées ici peut provoquer une exposition
dangereuse au rayonnement.
Pour les clients en Europe
Ce produit portant la marque CE est
conforme à la Directive sur la compatibilité
électromagnétique (EMC) émise par la
Commission de la Communauté
européenne.
La conformité à cette directive implique la
conformité aux normes européennes
suivantes :
4
Dieses Gerät ist als CLASS 1 LASER
PRODUCT eingestuft.
Daten der Laserdiode
Wellenlänge: 400 bis 410 nm
Emissionsdauer: Ununterbrochen
Laser-Ausgangsleistung: 135 mW (max.
Impulsspitze), 65 mW (max. Dauerstrich)
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)
Dieser Aufkleber
befindet sich hinter
der Außenabdeckung
des Geräts.
Der autorisierte Repräsentant für EMV und
Produktsicherheit ist Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Deutschland. Bei jeglichen
Angelegenheiten in Bezug auf Kundendienst
oder Garantie wenden Sie sich bitte an die in
den separaten Kundendienst- oder
Garantiedokumenten aufgeführten
Anschriften.
VORSICHT
Der Einsatz von optischen Hilfen verstärkt
die Gefahr von Augenschäden.
Bei Betätigung von Bedien- und Einstellteilen
oder Ausführung von Bedienvorgängen, die
nicht ausdrücklich in dieser
Bedienungsanleitung aufgeführt sind, droht
u.U. die Einwirkung gefährlicher
Laserstrahlung.
Für Kunden in Europa
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CEKennzeichnung und erfüllt die EMVRichtlinie der EG-Kommission.
Angewandte Normen:
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit (Störaussendung)
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit (Störfestigkeit)
Für die folgenden elektromagnetischen
Umgebungen: E1 (Wohnbereich), E2
(kommerzieller und in beschränktem Maße
industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im
Freien) und E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich,
z.B. Fernsehstudio).
Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Japan.
5
Table of Contents
Foreword .................................................................................................... 12
Before use........................................................................................ 12
Using the CD-ROM manual............................................................ 12
Chapter 1 : Overview
Features ...................................................................................................... 13
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls......................................
Power supply...................................................................................
Accessory attachments ....................................................................
Operating and connectors section ...................................................
HDVF-20A viewfinder (optional)...................................................
Status display on the viewfinder screen ..........................................
14
14
15
16
29
30
Chapter 2 : Preparations
Preparing a Power Supply ........................................................................ 33
Using a battery pack........................................................................ 33
Using AC power.............................................................................. 34
Attaching the Viewfinder ..........................................................................
Attaching the HDVF-20A/C35W ...................................................
Adjusting the viewfinder position...................................................
Moving the viewfinder shoe up.......................................................
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket ........................
Detaching the eyepiece ...................................................................
Adjusting the viewfinder focus and screen .....................................
34
34
35
35
36
37
37
Setting the Area of Use .............................................................................. 38
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock ........................................... 39
Mounting the Lens ..................................................................................... 40
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length .......................................................... 41
Preparing the Audio Input System ..........................................................
Connecting a microphone to the MIC IN connector.......................
Connecting microphones to the AUDIO IN connectors .................
Attaching a UHF portable tuner (for a UHF wireless microphone
system) ......................................................................................
Connecting line input audio equipment ..........................................
6
Table of Contents
42
42
43
44
46
Tripod Mounting ....................................................................................... 47
Connecting a Video Light ......................................................................... 48
Using the Shoulder Strap .......................................................................... 48
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position ....................................................... 49
Connecting the Remote Control Unit ...................................................... 50
Chapter 3 : Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Recording Format...................................................................................... 52
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance ............................. 52
Adjusting the black balance ............................................................ 53
Adjusting the white balance ............................................................ 54
Setting the Electronic Shutter................................................................... 56
Shutter modes.................................................................................. 56
Selecting the shutter mode and shutter speed ................................. 57
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment ............ 59
Adjusting the Audio Level ........................................................................
Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio inputs from the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.............................................
Manually adjusting the audio level of the MIC IN connector ........
Recording audio on channels 3 and 4 .............................................
61
61
62
62
Setting the Time Data................................................................................
Setting the timecode........................................................................
Setting the user bits .........................................................................
Synchronizing the timecode............................................................
64
64
64
65
Chapter 4 : Shooting
Handling Discs ...........................................................................................
Discs used for recording and playback ...........................................
Notes on handling ...........................................................................
Write-protecting discs .....................................................................
Loading and unloading a disc .........................................................
Formatting a disc.............................................................................
Handling of discs when recording does not end normally (salvage
function)....................................................................................
68
68
68
68
69
70
70
Basic Procedure for Shooting ................................................................... 72
Playing back the recorded clip ........................................................ 74
Deleting the recorded clip ............................................................... 75
Advanced Operations for Shooting .......................................................... 76
Table of Contents
7
Recording essence marks ................................................................ 76
Setting the thumbnail image at recording time ............................... 76
Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre-stored picture data (Picture
Cache function)......................................................................... 77
Retaking the most recent clip.......................................................... 78
Assigning user-defined clip titles automatically ............................. 78
Assigning user-defined names to clips and clip lists ...................... 81
Chapter 5 : Operations in GUI Screens
Overview .....................................................................................................
Switching between GUI screens .....................................................
Information and controls in thumbnail screens...............................
Displaying menus............................................................................
GUI screen operations.....................................................................
84
84
85
89
91
Thumbnail Operations ..............................................................................
Selecting thumbnails .......................................................................
Searching with thumbnails..............................................................
Playing the scene you have found...................................................
Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails ........................
Changing clip index pictures...........................................................
Checking clip properties .................................................................
Locking (write-protecting) clips .....................................................
Deleting clips ..................................................................................
92
92
92
94
94
95
96
96
97
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) ........................................................... 98
What is scene selection?.................................................................. 98
Creating and editing clip lists.......................................................... 99
Managing clip lists ........................................................................ 104
Disc Operations ........................................................................................ 105
Checking disc properties ............................................................... 105
Formatting discs ............................................................................ 105
Shortcut List............................................................................................. 107
Chapter 6 : Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu Organization.................................................................................. 108
TOP menu and top-level menus.................................................... 109
Menu List..................................................................................................
OPERATION menu ......................................................................
PAINT menu .................................................................................
MAINTENANCE menu................................................................
FILE menu ....................................................................................
8
Table of Contents
111
111
117
123
134
DIAGNOSIS menu ....................................................................... 138
Menu Operations .....................................................................................
Displaying menus..........................................................................
Basic menu operations ..................................................................
Using the USER menu (example menu operation) .......................
Editing the USER menu ................................................................
Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings................
140
140
140
143
144
147
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD
Monitor...............................................................................................
Selecting the display items............................................................
Change confirmation/adjustment progress messages....................
Setting the marker display.............................................................
Setting the viewfinder ...................................................................
Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars....................
Setting the shot ID.........................................................................
Displaying the status confirmation screens...................................
148
148
149
149
150
151
152
153
Adjustments and Settings From Menus ................................................
Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions.....................
Selecting the output signals...........................................................
Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches ....................................
Setting power saving functions .....................................................
Setting the color temperature manually ........................................
Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting ................
Selecting the lens file ....................................................................
Setting the UMID data ..................................................................
154
154
155
155
157
158
158
159
159
Chapter 7 : Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Handling the “Memory Stick”................................................................ 161
Saving and Recalling User Files .............................................................
Saving user menu data to the “Memory Stick”.............................
Loading saved data from a “Memory Stick”.................................
Returning the user file settings to the standard settings................
162
162
164
165
Saving and Loading Scene Files .............................................................
Saving a scene file.........................................................................
Loading scene files........................................................................
Returning the scene file settings to the standard settings..............
165
165
167
168
Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”
............................................................................................................. 168
Table of Contents
9
Chapter 8 : File Operations
Overview ................................................................................................... 170
Directory structure ........................................................................ 170
File operation restrictions.............................................................. 170
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows) ............................
Making FAM connections.............................................................
Operating on files..........................................................................
Exiting file operations ...................................................................
174
174
175
175
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh) ..........................
Making FAM connections.............................................................
Operating on files..........................................................................
Exiting file operations ...................................................................
176
176
177
177
FTP File Operations ................................................................................ 178
Making FTP connections .............................................................. 178
Command list ................................................................................ 179
Recording Continuous Timecode With FAM and FTP Connections . 183
Chapter 9 : Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting ...............................................
Preparations for testing .................................................................
Testing the camera ........................................................................
Testing the VDR ...........................................................................
184
184
184
186
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 188
Cleaning the viewfinder ................................................................ 188
Note about the battery terminal..................................................... 189
Operation Warnings ................................................................................ 190
Appendix
Important Notes on Operation ............................................................... 196
Specifications............................................................................................
General ..........................................................................................
Video camera section ....................................................................
Optical disc drive section ..............................................................
Supplied accessories......................................................................
Recommended additional equipment............................................
198
198
198
199
200
200
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories .................................. 202
Using PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software ................................................ 203
10
Table of Contents
Trademarks and Licenses .......................................................................
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License .....................................
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License......................................
About IJG (Independent JPEG Group) .........................................
Character display software “iType” ..............................................
203
203
203
204
204
About a “Memory Stick” ........................................................................ 204
Index.......................................................................................................... 207
Table of Contents
11
Foreword
2
Select and click on the Operation
Manual that you want to read.
This opens the PDF file of the Operation
Manual.
Memo
Before use
After purchasing this unit, before operating, it is
necessary to set the region of use and the frame
frequency.
(Unless this setting is made, the unit will not
operate.)
For details of these settings, see “Setting the Area of
Use” on page 38.
Using the CD-ROM manual
The supplied CD-ROM includes versions of the
Operation Manual for the PDW-700 in English,
Japanese, French, German, Italian, Spanish, and
Chinese in PDF format.
Preparations
The following program must be installed on your
computer in order to read the Operation Manual
contained on the CD-ROM.
• Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher
Memo
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it
from the following URL:
http://www.adobe.com/
Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated the United States and/or other
countries.
To read the CD-ROM manual
To read the Operation Manual contained on the
CD-ROM, do the following.
1
Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM
drive.
A cover page appears automatically in your
browser.
If it does not appear automatically in the
browser, double-click on the index.htm file
on the CD-ROM.
12
Foreword
The files may not be displayed properly, depending on
the version of Adobe Reader. In such a case, install the
latest version you can download from the URL
mentioned in “Preparations” above.
Note
If you have lost or damaged the CD-ROM, you can
purchase a new one to replace it. Contact a Sony service
representative.
1 Overview
Features
1) The MPEG-2 422P@HL codec performs 4:2:2
sampling and records at a video bit rate of 50 Mbps.
2) Image compression uses the MPEG-2 Long GOP
system.
3) The PDW-HD1500 supports recording of up to eight
channels in MPEG HD422 format.
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter
Rich selection of interfaces
New 2/3-inch full-HD “PowerHAD FX”
CCDs
• IT (Interline Transfer) 2/3-inch progressive
image sensors with 2.2 million pixels, for full
HD resolution (1920 × 1080)
• Newly developed “PowerHAD FX” CCDs,
featuring a signal processing ASIC with 14-bit
A/D converters
These new image sensor technologies enable the
capture of very high-quality images, with F11
(59.94i) and F12 (50i) sensitivity and an SN ratio
of 59 dB. 1)
1) With noise suppression on (off value is 54 dB)
Noise suppression uses proprietary Sony signal
processing technology to suppress noise in highfrequency regions.
Multi-format support
The unit supports three system frequencies (1080/
59.94i, 1080/50i, and 1080/25p), offering the
flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording.
Recording of more than 90 minutes of
high-quality video and audio data
• Signals captured by the full-HD (1920 × 1080)
image sensors are recorded in MPEG HD422
format 1) for consistently high image quality. 2)
• The unit supports recording of four audio
channels 3) sampled at 24 bits for high quality.
• Dual-layer Professional discs can record about
95 minutes of high-quality video and audio
data.
The generous recording times and the highquality of the recorded video and audio allow this
unit to meet the most stringent requirements of
production teams in a wide range of genres, from
news gathering through digital cinema and
program production.
• HDSDI and SDSDI output connectors: Allow
free combination of HDSDI and SDSDI signals.
Timecode and other text data can be
superimposed on signals from one of the two
interfaces.
• Composite signal output connector
• Gen-lock input connector: Enables
synchronized operation of multiple units, with
synchronization possible to either VBS or HDY signals.
• Audio input connectors: Supports AES/EBU
signal input, in addition to microphone input,
+48 V microphone input, and line input.
• Timecode input and output connectors
• Network connector and i.LINK connector:
Enable transfer of MXF-format files. Material
recorded in the field can be transferred to a
computer for immediate cut editing with the
supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software.
Features for improved performance
under various shooting conditions
• The popular Picture Cache function introduced
by the HDCAM and XDCAM HD series is
offered as a standard feature.
• Color temperature filters are composed of
electronic circuits, allowing smooth and
instantaneous switching – an important
advantage in ENG 1) – and linked operation
with ND filters. Further, absolute color
temperature settings can be obtained without
being effected by white balance settings.
• New noise suppression circuits offer improved
performance under difficult evening or
nighttime shooting conditions.
1) ENG: Electronic News Gathering
Features
13
Chapter 1 Overview
Supports new digital wireless
microphone system
The new digital wireless microphone system
offers high-quality, superior resistance to noise,
and simultaneous multi-channel operation.
Installation of the DWR-S01D Digital Wireless
Receiver 1) enables simultaneous reception of two
channels.
Locations and Functions
of Parts and Controls
Power supply
1) These products are not available in countries where
they are prohibited by radio frequency regulations.
Note
When you use the DWR-S01D Digital Wireless
Receiver in combination with this camcorder, you need
to check both of their versions.
Consult a Sony representative for information about
these versions.
3.5-inch color LCD monitor
The 3.5-inch color LCD monitor displays audio
meters, menu, and thumbnails of clips stored on
disc.
Inherits unique features of XDCAM series
The unit inherits the workflow features of the
XDCAM series, including thumbnail display and
metadata management, and improves them by
introducing an improved man-machine interface.
1
2
3
4 5
a LIGHT switch
Determines how a video light connected to the
LIGHT connector (see page 15) is turned on and
off.
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video
light is in the on position, the video light is
turned on automatically while the camcorder
is recording.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off
manually, using its own switch.
Notes
• When this switch is set to AUTO, at the beginning of
the recording, the picture is recorded even though the
lighting may fluctuate until the video light comes on.
If the beginning of the recording is important, you
should set this switch to MANUAL.
• To ensure proper operation of the video light, Sony
recommends the use of the BP-GL95/L80S Battery
Pack with the camcorder.
b POWER switch
Turns the main power supply on and off.
14
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
To operate the camcorder from an AC power
supply, connect an optional DC power cord to this
terminal and then connect the cord to the DC
output terminal of the BC-L70, BC-M150, or
another battery charger.
d DC OUT 12V (DC power output)
connector (4-pin, female)
Supplies power for a WRR-860A/861/862 UHF
Synthesized Diversity Tuner (not supplied)
(maximum 0.5 A).
Do not connect any equipment other than the
UHF synthesized diversity tuner.
e Battery attachment shoe
Attach a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Battery
Pack. Alternatively, you can attach an ACDN2B/DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the
camcorder on AC power supply.
For details about how to attach the battery or AC
adaptor, see “Preparing a Power Supply” on page
33. For information about attaching a synthesized
tuner, see “Attaching a UHF portable tuner (for a
UHF wireless microphone system)” on page 44.
Note
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the following
battery packs: BP-GL95, BP-GL65, BP-L60S, and BPL80S.
Accessory attachments
a Shoulder strap fitting
Attach the supplied shoulder strap (see page 48).
b Light fitting shoe
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light
(see page 48).
c Viewfinder front-to-back positioning
lever
Chapter 1 Overview
c DC IN (DC power input) connector
(XLR type, 4-pin, male)
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-toback direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK
knob. After adjustment, retighten this lever and
the LOCK knob.
d Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Loosen this ring to adjust the left-to-right position
of the viewfinder (see page 35).
e Viewfinder fitting shoe
Attach an optional viewfinder.
f VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin)
Connect an optional viewfinder.
Consult a Sony representative for information about
available viewfinders.
g Lens mount securing rubber
After locking the lens in position using the lens
locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of the
two projections. This fixes the lens mount,
preventing it from coming loose.
h Viewfinder front-to-back positioning
knob (LOCK knob)
Loosen this knob to adjust the front-to-back
position of the viewfinder (see page 35).
1
23 4567
i Fitting for optional microphone holder
Fit an optional CAC-12 Microphone Holder (see
page 43).
j Shoulder pad
Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the
position in the front-to-rear direction. Adjust the
position for maximum convenience when
operating the unit on your shoulder.
For details of the adjustment, see “Adjusting the
Shoulder Pad Position” on page 49.
8 9 0 qa qs qd qf qgqh qj qk
k LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin,
female)
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
15
Chapter 1 Overview
A video light with a maximum power
consumption of 50 W, such as the Anton Bauer
Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected (see
page 48).
Operating and connectors section
Front
l Lens cable clamp
Clamp a lens cable.
m MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V)
connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female)
Connect a stereo microphone to this connector.
The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.
n LENS connector (12-pin)
Connect a lens cable to this connector.
3
Note
When connecting the lens cable to this connector,
power off this unit first.
4
o Tripod mount
When using the unit on a tripod, attach the tripod
adaptor (optional).
1
2
p Lens mount (special bayonet mount)
5
6
7
Attach the lens.
Consult a Sony representative for information about
available lenses.
q Lens locking lever
After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate
the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens
in position.
After locking the lens, be sure to use the lens
mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from
becoming detached.
r Lens mount cap
Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever.
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for
protection from dust.
a REC START (recording start) button
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop
recording. The effect is the same as that of the
REC button on the lens.
b SHUTTER selector
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Flick to
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter
mode setting within the range previously set with
the menu. When this switch is operated, the new
setting appears on the setting change/adjustment
progress message display area for about three
seconds.
For details about the shutter speed and shutter mode
settings, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter” on
page 56.
c FILTER selector
Selects from the four neutral density (ND) filters
built into this unit.
16
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
ND filter
CLEAR
1/
4
ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/4)
3
4
1/ ND (attenuates light to
16
approximately 1/16)
1/ ND (attenuates light to
64
approximately 1/64)
When this selector is used with the menu item for
filter selection display set to ON (see page 149),
the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen
for about three seconds.
You can change a MAINTENANCE menu
setting so that different white balance settings can
be stored for different FILTER selector positions.
This allows you to automatically obtain optimum
white balance for the current shooting conditions
in linkage with the filter selection.
stored in the corresponding memory. If the
WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the
automatic white balance adjustment function
does not operate.
BLK: Adjusts the black set and black balance
automatically.
g MIC (microphone) LEVEL control
Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1, 2, 3
and 4.
Chapter 1 Overview
Position number
1
2
For details, see “Adjusting the Audio Level” on page
61.
Right side (near the front)
1
2 3 4
5
For details, see “Adjusting the white balance” on
page 54.
d MENU knob
Changes the page selection or a setting within the
menu.
For details about how to use the MENU knob, see
“Menu Operations” on page 140.
6 78 9
e EARPHONE jack (monaural,
minijack)
You can monitor the E-E 1) sound during
recording and playback sound during playback.
When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the
alarm sound through the earphone. You can use
this with the EARPHONE jack on the rear of the
unit at the same time. Plugging an earphone into
the jack automatically cuts off the built-in
speaker.
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric”. In E-E
mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder
are output after passing through internal electric
circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.
f AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/
black balance adjustment) switch
Activates the automatic white/black balance
adjustment functions.
WHT: Adjusts the white balance automatically.
If the WHITE BAL switch (see page 19) is
set to A or B, the white balance setting is
0
qa
qs
MENU
STATUS
ON/
SEL
OFF
CANCEL/PRST
ON
ESCAPE
OFF
qd
qf
a ASSIGN (assignable) 1/2 switches
You can assign the desired functions to these
switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the
OPERATION menu.
Nothing is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent
to a selection of OFF in the menu).
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” on page 155.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
17
Chapter 1 Overview
b COLOR TEMP. (color temperature)
button
Press to light the button and change the color
temperature for shooting. You can use this as an
ASSIGN (assignable) switch (see page 155).
c ALARM (alarm tone volume
adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the warning tone that is
output via the built-in speaker or optional
earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
However, if in the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu the MIN ALARM VOL
item is set to “SET”, the alarm tone is audible
even when this volume control is at the minimum
position.
a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE
jack on the rear of the unit, you can hear the audio in
stereo. (On the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, HEADPHONE OUT must
be set to “STEREO”.)
f VDR SAVE/STBY (VDR save/standby)
switch
Switches the status of the power supply to the
VDR while recording is stopped (STOP) or
paused (REC PAUSE).
SAVE: The disc stops rotating and some
functions are disabled. Power consumption is
lower than when the camcorder is in STBY
mode. Battery life is extended.
STBY: Recording to the disc starts immediately
when the REC START button is pressed.
Note
ALARM
Minimum
Maximum
d MONITOR (monitor volume
adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the sound other than the
warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker
or optional earphones. When the knob is turned to
the minimum position, no sound can be heard.
e MONITOR (audio monitor selection)
switches
By means of combinations of the two switches,
you can select audio that you want to hear through
the built-in speaker or optional earphones.
Position of down-side switch: CH-1/2
Position of up-side
switch
CH-1/CH-3
MIX
Audio output
Channel 1 audio
Channels 1 and 2 mixed
CH-2/CH-4
audio (stereo) a)
Channel 2 audio
Position of down-side switch: CH-3/4
18
Position of up-side
switch
CH-1/CH-3
MIX
Audio output
Channel 3 audio
Channels 3 and 4 mixed
CH-2/CH-4
audio (stereo) a)
Channel 4 audio
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
An internal operating sound may be recorded at the start
of recording when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is set to
SAVE.
g GAIN selector
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match
the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains
corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be
selected in the menu. (The factory settings are
L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB.)
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the setting change/adjustment
progress message display area of the viewfinder
screen for about three seconds.
For details, see “Setting gain values for the GAIN
selector positions” on page 154.
h OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic
contrast control) switch
Switches the video signal, which is output to the
video disc drive (referred to as “VDR”),
viewfinder, and video monitor from the camera
section, between the following two.
BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.
CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera.
When this is selected, you can switch DCC 1)
on and off.
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very
bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the
subject, objects in the background will be lost in the
glare. The DCC function will suppress the high
intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is
particularly effective in the following cases.
• Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
i WHITE BAL (white balance memory)
switch
Controls adjustment of the white balance.
PRST: Adjusts the color temperature to the preset
value (the factory default setting: 3200K).
Use this setting when you have no time to
adjust the white balance.
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment
settings already stored in A or B. Flick the
AUTO W/B BAL switch (see page 17) on the
WHT side, to automatically adjust the white
balance, and save the adjustment settings in
memory A or memory B.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch
even when ATW 1) is in use.
B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and
WHITE SWITCH <B> is set to ATW on the
WHITE SETTING page of the
OPERATION menu, ATW is activated.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the setting change/adjustment
progress message display area of the viewfinder
screen for about three seconds.
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white
balance of the picture being shot is adjusted
automatically for varying lighting conditions.
j STATUS ON/SEL/OFF (menu display
on/page selection/display off) switch
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU
ON/OFF switch to OFF.
ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed
upward, a window to confirm the menu
settings and status of the camcorder appears
on the viewfinder screen. The window
consists of four pages, which are switched
each time the switch is pushed upward. Each
page is displayed for about 10 seconds.
OFF: To clear the page immediately after
display, push this switch down to the OFF
position.
You can select the pages to be displayed on the
menu.
For details, see “Displaying the status confirmation
screens” on page 153.
To use this switch, open the cover.
This switch is used to display the menu on the
viewfinder screen or the test signal screen.
Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to
OFF.
ON: Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen
or the test signal screen.
OFF: Removes the menu from the viewfinder
screen or the test signal screen.
Chapter 1 Overview
• Shooting a subject indoors, against a background
through a window
• Any high contrast scene
l CANCEL/PRST (preset)/ESCAPE
switch
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to ON.
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU
ON/OFF switch to OFF.
CANCEL/PRST: Flicking this switch up to this
position displays the message to confirm
whether the previous settings are cancelled or
settings are reset to their initial values,
depending on the menu operating condition.
Flicking this switch up to this position again
cancels the previous settings or resets the
settings to their initial values.
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page,
which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.
Each time the switch is flicked to this
position, the page returns to one stage higher
in the hierarchy.
m “Memory Stick” compartment
Label
“Memory Stick” Access indicator
Open the lid of the menu operating section, and
insert a “Memory Stick”, with the notch facing
downward, in the direction shown by the arrow,
so that it clicks into place.
To remove a “Memory Stick”, first press it in to
release the lock, then withdraw.
The “Memory Stick” access indicator lights in
green when a “Memory Stick” is loaded, and
lights in red when the “Memory Stick” is being
accessed for reading or writing.
k MENU ON/OFF switch
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
19
For details about “Memory Stick”, see “Handling
the “Memory Stick”” on page 161.
Chapter 1 Overview
n Cover
Displays camera video, VDR-related warnings,
remaining battery capacity, remaining disc
capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on.
For details, see “Status Display on the LCD monitor
and monochrome LCD” on page 22.
Right side (near the rear)
c WARNING indicator
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs
in the VDR section.
For details about the meaning of the states of the
WARNING indicator, see ““Operation Warnings”
on page 190.
8
9
q;
qa
EJECT
F REV
PLAY/PAUSE
F FWD
m
NX
M
PREV
STOP
NEXT
.
x
>
qs
qd
qf
Z
d ACCESS indicator
This lights when data is written to or read from
the disc.
e Protection cover of the audio control
section
1
2
3
4
Open to access the audio control section (see page
25).
f Protection cover of the GUI screen
operations section
Open to access the GUI screen operations section
(see page 25).
5
g Monochrome LCD
6
This shows the remaining battery capacity,
remaining disc capacity, time data, and so on.
7
qg
qh
DISP SEL HOLD
EXPAND
qj
qk
ql
RESET
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER TC U-BIT
a Built-in speaker
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E sound
during recording, and playback sound during
playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to
reinforce visual warnings.
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE
jack, the speaker output is suppressed
automatically.
For details about alarms, see “Operation Warnings”
on page 190.
b LCD monitor
20
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
For details, see “Status Display on the LCD monitor
and monochrome LCD” on page 22.
h EJECT button and indicator
Press this button to insert a disc or eject the disc.
The indicator flashes while the disc is being
ejected.
i F REV (fast reverse) button and
indicator
This plays back at high speed in the reverse
direction. The indicator lights during high-speed
playback in the reverse direction.
j PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
Press this button to view play back video images
using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor.
The indicator lights during playback.
Press this button again during playback to pause,
outputting a still image. At this time the indicator
flashes.
display (expand function). Each time you press
this button, the division is repeated (to a
maximum of three times, with 1,728 divisions).
Hold down the SHIFT button and press this
button to step back through the division process.
For details of the expand function, see page 93.
p HOLD (display hold)/CHAPTER
(chapter function) button
This plays back at high speed in the forward
direction. The indicator lights during high-speed
playback in the forward direction.
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data
displayed in the counter display section. (The
timecode generator continues running.) Pressing
this button again releases the hold.
You can use this button, for example, to
determine the exact time of a particular shot.
l PREV button
For details of the counter display, see page 23.
k F FWD (fast forward) button and
indicator
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.
During the jump, the F REV indicator flashes.
If you press this together with the F REV button,
the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded
clip on the disc.
m STOP button
Press this button to stop disc playback.
n NEXT button
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.
During the jump, the F FWD indicator flashes.
If you press this together with the F FWD button,
the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded
clip on the disc.
o DISP SEL (display selection) /EXPAND
(expand function) button
With each press of this button, the display in the
LCD monitor changes as follows.
Display indication
Video with
superimposed
information (CHAR)
Video without
superimposed
information (MONI)
Status display
(STATUS)
Chapter 1 Overview
This unit is equipped with an image search
function at approximately four times normal
playback speed, for easy checking of recorded
material. To use the image search function at
approximately four times normal playback speed,
press the F REV button or F FWD button during
playback.
At this time the PLAY indicator and F REV or F
FWD indicator light.
If you press this button when the clip thumbnail
screen is displayed, those frames on which shot
marks are recorded appear in a list (chapter
function). Press the button once more to return to
the normal thumbnail display.
By displaying thumbnails with shot marks
attached in place of index frames, you can check
the contents of clips more easily and more
quickly. This is also useful for cueing up long
clips.
For details of the chapter function, see page 93
q RESET/RETURN button
Resets the value shown in the time counter
display. According to the settings of the PRESET/
REGEN/CLOCK switch (see page 25) and the FRUN/SET/R-RUN switch (see page 25), this
button resets the display as follows.
Meaning
The LCD monitor displays
the same text information
as the viewfinder.
The video only appears.
Counter indications,
warnings, audio levels, and
similar information appear.
No video image appears.
If you press this button when the thumbnail
screen is displayed, the duration of the selected
clip is divided into 12, and the first frame of each
of the divisions is shown in a further thumbnail
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
21
Chapter 1 Overview
Settings of switches
DISPLAY switch:
COUNTER
DISPLAY switch:
TC
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch: SET
DISPLAY switch:
U-BIT
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch: SET
To reset
Counter to 0:00:00:00
Timecode to 00:00:00:00
User bits data a) to 00 00 00
00
a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the
disc, those bits which can be used to record useful
information for the user such as scene number,
shooting place, etc.
Setting LCD monitor
backlight
H
High (select this to view
the LCD monitor
outdoors in the
daytime)
M
Brightness between H
and L
L
Low (select this to view
the LCD monitor
indoors or outdoors at
night)
OFF
Off (the display is also
off)
Monochrome
LCD backlight
Lit
Lit
Lit
Off
Status Display on the LCD monitor and
monochrome LCD
The following display appears on the LCD
monitor display which is set to STATUS with the
DISP SEL/EXPAND button, and on the
monochrome LCD.
For details, see “Setting the Time Data” on page 64.
This button returns to the previous screen when
pressed during thumbnail display.
For details, see “GUI screen operations” on page
91.
6
r DISPLAY switch
7
This cycles the data displayed in the counter
display through the sequence COUNTER, TC,
and U-BIT.
COUNTER: Display the elapsed recording/
playback time (hours, minutes, seconds,
frames).
TC: Display timecode.
U-BIT: Display user bit data.
8
9
H D422 50
1080
PB
4
59.9i
NDF
5
OVER
0
24bit
EXT-LK
HOLD
01 .. 23 .. 45 .. 15
MIN
SEC
10
20
FRM
WARNING:HUMID
30
40
DISC E
BATT E
B
F
1
ST
2
dB
PEAK
3
4
0
LCD monitor
7
9
s BRIGHT (brightness) button
0
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
3
H
For details, see “Status Display on the LCD monitor
and monochrome LCD” on page 22.
Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight, and turns the backlight of the
monochrome LCD on and off.
Each press of the button selects the next setting in
the order shown in the following table.
22
1 2
Monochrome LCD
a Resolution
Indicates the resolution of video being currently
played back or recorded.
1080: 1080 lines (horizontal × vertical: 1920 ×
1080)
b Video format
Lights when the HOLD/CHAPTER button
is pressed.
c Frame frequency
h Warning indicator area
Indicates the frame frequency of video being
currently played back or recorded.
• If NTSC AREA is selected 1)
59.9i: 59.94 fields per second, interlace scan
mode
• If PAL AREA is selected 1)
50i: 50 fields per second, interlace scan mode
25P: 25 frames per second, progressive scan
mode
Displays warnings when trouble with recording
or moisture condensation occurs.
Chapter 1 Overview
Indicates the format of video being currently
played back or recorded.
HD422 50: MPEG HD422 format (video bit rate:
50 Mbps)
For details, see “Operation Warnings” on page 190.
1) Selected by COUNTRY setting on the FORMAT page
of the OPERATION menu (see page 116).
Note
There may be no indication displayed when this unit
cannot identify the frame frequency, for example, when
playing back a disc recorded with other equipment.
d Audio format
Indicates the format of audio being currently
played back or recorded.
24bit: 24 bits/48 kHz
e Audio level indicators
Indicates the audio recording or playback levels
of channels 1 to 4.
f Status display
PB: Appears during playback.
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is
selected.
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode
generator is locked to an external signal input
to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.
HOLD: Appears when the internal timecode
generator is stopped.
g Time counter display
Switches displays of time counter, timecode, and
user bits, depending on the position of the
DISPLAY switch.
When the HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed to
hold the timecode value, the timecode is
displayed in the format shown below. When the
HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed again to
release the hold, the timecode is displayed in the
normal format.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
23
i Remaining disc capacity indicator
Chapter 1 Overview
Indication
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B (flashing)
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B (flashing)
Remaining recording time
More than 30 minutes
25 to 30 minutes
20 to 25 minutes
15 to 20 minutes
10 to 15 minutes
5 to 10 minutes
2 to 5 minutes
0 to 2 minutes
0 minutes
j Remaining battery capacity indicator
Indication
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
Battery voltage
BP-L90A/L60S/L80S
15.5 V or more
15.1 to 15.5 V
14.6 to 15.1 V
13.8 to 14.6 V
12.9 to 13.8 V
12.0 to 12.9 V
10.8 to 12.0 V
10.8 V or less
Other batteries a)
17.0 V or more
16.0 to 17.0 V
15.0 to 16.0 V
14.0 to 15.0 V
13.0 to 14.0 V
12.0 to 13.0 V
11.0 to 12.0 V
11.0 V or less
a) You can change the threshold voltages on the
BATTERY 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu
(see page 126).
Indication
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x ]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
24
Battery voltage
BP-GL95/GL65/IL75/M100, Anton Bauer Battery
System
80 to 100%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
GUI screen operations section and audio control
section
2 3 4 5
6
LEVEL
THUMBNAIL
MENU
0
10
0
10
CH-3
ESSENCE
MARK
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
DISC MENU
7
8
SHIFT
REGEN
CLOCK
9 0 qa
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
qs
a THUMBNAIL indicator
This lights when thumbnails are displayed.
b THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK
button
Press this button to carry out a thumbnail search
or create a clip list (see page 92).
When pressed, the whole-screen display changes
to a thumbnail display. Press once more to return
to the whole-screen display.
For a thumbnail search using essence marks, hold
down the SHIFT button and press this button (see
page 94).
c SET/S.SEL (set/scene selection) button
and arrow buttons
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit
settings, and for GUI screen operations.
The arrow buttons select items and change values,
and the SET/S.SEL button confirms settings.
Pressing this button with thumbnails displayed
and the SHIFT button held down adds a sub clip
to the current clip list (scene selection).
See page 91 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
See page 98 for more information about scene
selection.
d MENU button
Displays a special menu for operations in GUI
screens (see page 89).
When the whole-screen is displayed, pressing this
button has no effect, and the operation is invalid.
Chapter 1 Overview
1
Selects the operating mode of the internal
timecode generator. The operating mode is set as
explained below, depending on the position of the
switch.
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless
of the operating state of the VDR. Use this
setting when synchronizing the timecode
with an external timecode.
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during
recording. Use this setting to have a
consecutive timecode on the disc.
For details, see “Setting the timecode” on page 64
and “Setting the user bits” on page 64.
f AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 (audio
channel 1/2 recording level) knobs
Adjusts the audio levels to be recorded on
channels 1 and 2 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH-2 switches are set to MANUAL.
g SUB CLIP indicator
This lights when using a clip list for playback.
h SUB CLIP button
Press this to play back according to a clip list.
You can play back a particular clip or sequential
clips, or carry out a search of the selected clip list.
To display the Disc Menu which allows you to
carry out operations such as saving, recalling, or
deleting a clip list, hold down the SHIFT button
and press this button.
i SHIFT button
Use this in combination with other buttons.
j PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/
CLOCK switch
Selects whether to set a new timecode or to utilize
the existing timecode.
PRESET: Records a new timecode.
REGEN: Records timecode continuous with the
existing timecode recorded on the disc.
Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in RRUN mode.
CLOCK: Records timecode synchronized to the
internal clock. Regardless of the setting of
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the
camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.
e F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/
recording run) switch
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
25
Chapter 1 Overview
k AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 (audio
channel 1/2 adjustment method
selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for each
of audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
l AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4
(audio channel 1/2/3/4 input selection)
switches
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on
audio channels 1 and 2.
FRONT: Audio input signals from the
microphone connected to the MIC IN
connector
REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device
connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors
WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF
portable tuner (not supplied) if it is installed
AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on
audio channels 3 and 4.
F (FRONT): Audio input signals from a
microphone connected to the MIC IN
connector
R (REAR): Audio input signals from an audio
device connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/
CH-2 connectors
W (WIRELESS): Audio input signals from the
UHF portable tuner (not supplied) if it is
installed
Left side and upper section
1
2
3
4
5
SDI IN
(OPTION)
GENLOCK
IN
TEST
OUT
TC
OUT
6
TC IN
7
a ASSIGNABLE 3/4 switches
You can assign the desired functions to these
switches on the ASSIGNABLE page of the
OPERATION menu.
Nothing is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent
to a selection of OFF in the menu).
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” on page 155.
b Lid of the disc compartment
This opens when the EJECT button on the top
panel is pressed. Press the side of the lid to close.
c SDI IN (OPTION) connector (BNC
type)
d GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)
connector (BNC type)
• This connector inputs a reference signal when
the camera is to be genlocked or when timecode
is to be synchronized with external equipment.
Use the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock
H-phase (phase of horizontal sync signal).
26
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Rear
1
2
e TC IN (timecode input) connector
(BNC type)
3
To apply an external lock to the timecode of this
unit, input the reference timecode.
Chapter 1 Overview
• This connector also inputs a return video signal.
You can display the HD-Y signal in the
viewfinder screen while holding the RET button
down with RETURN VIDEO set to ON on the
ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION
menu.
4
For details of timecode, see “Setting the timecode”
on page 64.
f TEST OUT connector (BNC type)
This connector outputs the video signal for a
video monitor. The output signal can be selected
from composite video, HD-Y, R, G, B, and a
composite video signal like that displayed in the
LCD monitor. To switch output signals, use the
TEST OUT SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1
page of the OPERATION menu.
If the output signal is set to one of R, G, or B, then
this setting changes to HD-Y when the camcorder
is powered off and on again.
Depending on menu settings, menus, timecode,
and shot data can be superimposed on the image
on the monitor. This connector can also be used to
synchronize the timecode of an external VTR
with the timecode of the camcorder.
g TC OUT (timecode output) connector
(BNC type)
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the
timecode of this unit, connect this connector to
the external VTR’s timecode input connector.
5
6
LINE
AES/EBU
DC OUT
12V
0.5A
DC
IN
7
AUDIO IN
MIC
48V
OFF
LINE
AES/EBU
MIC
48V
OFF
AUDIO OUT
SUPER
CH1
1/2
SDI OUT
CH2
3/4
SDI OUT
8 9 0
qa
qs
qd
a TALLY (back tally) indicator (red)
Lights up during recording. It will not light if the
TALLY switch is set to OFF. This indicator also
flashes to indicate warnings (see page 20) in the
same manner as the REC/TALLY indicator in the
viewfinder.
For details, see “Operation Warnings” on page 190.
b TALLY switch
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator
function.
c USB connector
This is a USB 2.0 connector for maintenance.
Note
Do not connect USB devices to this unit for any purpose
other than maintenance.
d
(network) connector (RJ-45 type)
This is a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector for
network connection.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
27
CAUTION
Chapter 1 Overview
When you connect the network cable of the unit to
peripheral device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent
malfunction due to radiation noise.
ATTENTION
Lors de la connexion du câble réseau de l’appareil
au périphérique, utilisez un câble blindé afin
d’empêcher tout dysfonctionnement dû au bruit
de rayonnement.
VORSICHT
Verwenden Sie beim Anschließen des
Netzwerkkabels des Geräts an ein Peripheriegerät
ein abgeschirmtes Kabel, um Fehlfunktionen
aufgrund von Störungen zu vermeiden.
e EARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack)
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording
and playback sound during playback. When an
alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound
through the earphone. You can use this with the
EARPHONE jack on the front of the unit at the
same time. Plugging an earphone into the jack
automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.
You can select monaural or stereo on the AUDIO1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
f LINE /AES/EBU / MIC selectors
These select the audio source of the audio input
signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2
connectors.
LINE: Line input audio equipment
AES/EBU: AES/EBU format audio signal
MIC: Microphone input
Note
When these switches are in the MIC position, and the
+48V/OFF switch is set to +48V, if you inadvertently
connect any audio device other than a microphone to the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, the device may be
damaged.
g +48V/OFF switches
Select either of the following positions for the
microphones to be connected.
+48V: For a microphone to use an external power
supply
OFF: For a microphone to use an internal power
supply
h REMOTE connector (8-pin)
28
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Connect an RM-B150/B750 Remote Control
Unit, which makes it possible to control the
camcorder remotely.
Note
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control
Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the
camcorder POWER switch.
i SDI OUT 1 connector (BNC type)
Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with
embedded audio). To switch between HDSDI and
SDSDI output, use the SDI OUT 1 SELECT item
on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION
menu.
j SDI OUT 2 connector (BNC type)
Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with
embedded audio). To switch between HDSDI and
SDSDI output, use the SDI OUT 2 SELECT item
on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION
menu.
Setting menus, timecode, or shot data can be
superimposed on the camera output video
depending on the menu settings, and you can
view them on the monitor screen.
k AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel-1
and channel-2 input) connectors (XLR
type, 3-pin, female)
These are audio input connectors for channels 1
and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment
or a microphone.
When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set
to AES/EBU, the CH1 connector is used for
channel-1 and -2 inputs, and the CH2 connector,
for channel-3 and -4 inputs.
l AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5pin, male)
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The
audio signals are selected by the MONITOR
switch.
m
(i.LINK) S400 connector (6-pin,
IEEE1394 compliant)
Use an i.LINK cable (DV cable) to connect the
camcorder to a computer for File Access Mode
file operations.
For details, see “File Operations in File Access
Mode (for Windows)” on page 174).
d Eyecup
Note
HDVF-20A viewfinder (optional)
1
qf
2
qg
3
4
CONTRAST
ASPECT
ON
OFF
MOMENT
f Diopter adjustment ring
Allows for optimal focus adjustment.
g Tally indicator
Lights up while camcorder is recording. Set the
TALLY switch to OFF when not in use. The
brightness can also be adjusted with the TALLY
switch.
This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in
the same manner as the camera operator tally
indicator and the REC indicator in the viewfinder.
h PEAKING control
Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture
sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This
control has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
i CONTRAST control
6
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
BRIGHT
0
ZEBRA
DISPLAY
For details, see “Status display on the viewfinder
screen” on page 30.
5
7
8
9
PEAKING
e Indicators and status display
Chapter 1 Overview
When you connect the camcorder and other equipment,
such as a hard disk drive, with an i.LINK interface to a
computer with i.LINK connectors, turn off the power of
the computer, the other equipment, and the camcorder
before connecting them using the i.LINK cable (DV
cable). If a bus-powered type 1) hard disk drive or similar
equipment is connected while the computer is powered
on, electric current flows into the camcorder because of
the high voltage caused by the load shift of the computer
power, and this may cause a malfunction.
1) Equipment that can be powered through i.LINK cable
(DV cable)
j BRIGHT control
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
TALLY
HIGH
OFF
LOW
qa
qs
qd
a Plug
Connect to the VF connector on the camcorder.
b Stopper
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the
camcorder when it is slid from side to side.
c Camera operator tally indicator
Lights up while camcorder is recording. This
indicator can be covered when not in use.
This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in
the same manner as the tally indicator and the
REC indicator in the viewfinder.
k TALLY switch
Controls the tally indicator located on the front of
the viewfinder.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to
high.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.
l ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
Controls the zebra pattern display on the
viewfinder screen as follows.
ON: A zebra pattern appears and stays.
OFF: The zebra pattern disappears.
MOMENT: A zebra pattern appears and stays for
about five seconds.
m DISPLAY/ASPECT switch
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
29
Chapter 1 Overview
Turns the marker indication on and off, and
switches between 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios for
viewfinder screen display.
DISPLAY: When the marker indication is
enabled with the camcorder, the marker
indication on the viewfinder screen turns on
and off every time you push the switch up to
this position.
ASPECT: Each push of the switch down to this
position toggles the mask display on and off.
(Make mask display settings on the
MARKER 1 page of the OPERATION menu
(see page 114).)
and stays lit when the battery is completely
exhausted.
To prevent interruption during operation, replace
the battery as soon as this indicator starts flashing.
The battery power level at which the indicator starts
flashing can be set on the BATTERY 1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu. For details, see page 125.
c REC (recording, red tally) indicator
Lights up while camcorder is recording.
This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in
the same manner as the tally indicator and the
camera operator tally indicator.
n Viewfinder cable
d Viewfinder screen
o Microphone holder
e VTR SAVE indicator
Status display on the viewfinder
screen
This indicator lights when the VDR SAVE/STBY
switch is set to SAVE, putting the VDR into
power save mode.
f ! (warning) indicator
Indicators
The following indicators are arranged above and
below the viewfinder screen to show the current
state and adjustments of the camcorder.
TALLY/REC
BATT
1
2
3
4
This indicator lights when any of the following
conditions occurs with the corresponding item set
to ON on the ‘!’ LED page of the OPERATION
menu.
• The gain is set to other than 0 dB.
• The SHUTTER selector is set to ON.
• The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.
• ATW is enabled.
• The lens extender is used.
• The FILTER selector is set to other than ND:1.
• The reference value of auto iris adjustment is
not the standard value.
Layout of the status display on the
viewfinder screen
5
VTR
SAVE
6
a TALLY (green tally) indicator
Lights when the camcorder is recording in Picture
Cache mode, and when it is recording with
HDSDI REMOTE I/F on the CAM CONFIG 1
page of the MAINTENANCE menu set to GTLY.
b BATT (battery) indicator
This indicator starts flashing when the battery
connected to the camcorder is nearly exhausted,
30
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video
picture but also characters and messages
indicating the camcorder settings and operating
status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc.
When the menu screen is not displayed and the
DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch is
set to ON, the items for which an ON setting was
made on the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, or VF DISP
3 page of the OPERATION menu or with related
switches are displayed at the top and bottom of
the screen.
The messages that give details of the settings and
adjustment progress and results can also be made
to appear for about three seconds while settings
For details about the display item selection, see
“Selecting the display items” on page 148.
For details about setting change and adjustment
progress messages, see “Change confirmation/
adjustment progress messages” on page 149.
For details about marker display, see “Setting the
marker display” on page 149.
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder
screen are shown below.
123
4
5
6
7 8
EX
Z 99
W1 2
13 .4 V
HD422 50 E0001:004/004 DC IN
13.9 K +
WHITE:NG
LEVEL TOO HIGH
REC2
TCG
01:23:45:15
5600
LOW LIGHT
35 - 30 125C F1.7
1 W:A 18 dB 1/ 2000 12
90qaqsqdqfqgqh qj
qk ql w; wa
a Color temperature
Displays a color temperature calculated from the
gain of R and B, in the range 0.0 K to 99.9 K (in
steps of 0.1 K). The +/– signs may be displayed
depending on the OFFSET WHT setting (see
page 158).
No display: OFFSET WHT is OFF
+: The value of OFFSET WHT is greater than
3200K.
–: The value of OFFSET WHT is less than
3200K.
b Video format
Indicates the format of video being currently
played back or recorded (see page 52)
c Extender
“EX” appears when a lens extender is attached to
the camcorder.
During playback or search, indicates the total
number of clips and the number of the selected
clip.
During clip list playback, indicates the clip list
name, the total number of sub clips, and the
number of the selected sub clip.
f Wireless microphone reception level
When a UHF portable tuner is installed in the
camcorder, “W” appears together with foursegment reception level indicators for each of the
channels (1 or 2 channels) that can be used by the
tuner. The indications are as follows.
Normal use: The number of white segments
indicates the strength of the signal level.
Muted: The number of gray segments indicates
the strength of the signal level.
Reception level over peak: “P” is displayed
instead of the indicators. 1)
Tuner battery is low: The channel number and
indicator of the corresponding channel
flash. 1)
Chapter 1 Overview
are being changed, during adjustment, and after
adjustment.
1) DWR-S01D only
g Power source voltage/battery
remaining capacity
When the unit is powered from a battery pack,
indicates the remaining capacity of the power
source voltage. When the unit is powered from a
battery connected to the DC IN connector or AC
adaptor attached to the battery attachment shoe,
indicates the power source voltage.
h External battery
Appears if the power is supplied from an AC
adaptor connected to the DC IN connector.
i Controlling external device
Appears when HDSDI REMOTE I/F in the CAM
CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu
is set to CHARA, and this unit is controlling
recoding by an external device connected to the
SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (HDSDI output). 1)
1) SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the
OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be
set to HDSDI.
d Zoom position
j Electric color temperature filter
Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in
the range from 0 to 99.
Appears when the CC 5600K function is set to
ON.
e Clip number/number of clips
k Filter
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
31
Indicates the currently selected filter type (see
page 16).
Chapter 1 Overview
l White balance memory
Indicates the currently selected white balance
automatic adjustment memory.
A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to A.
B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to B.
P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to PRST or when the preset button on an RMB150 has been pushed.
T: Displayed when ATW is being used.
3200: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW
3200K function is set to ON.
4300: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW
4300K function is set to ON.
5600: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW
5600K function is set to ON.
6300: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW
6300K function is set to ON.
m Timecode
Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time,
timecode, user bits or other information selected
by the DISPLAY switch (see page 22).
n Gain value
Indicates the gain value (in dB) of the video
amplifier, as set by the GAIN selector.
o Shutter speed
Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.
However, if the SHUTTER selector (see page 16)
is set to OFF, nothing is displayed.
For details of the displayed shutter speed, see
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” on page 56.
p Operation/alarm message display area
For details, see “Operation/alarm messages” on
page 193.
q Audio level
Indicates the level of audio channel 1 and channel
2. The peak indication of the VDR level meter is
related as follows to the audio level.
1
2
3
-52
-28
-20
-12 -8 (dB)
1Audio channel 1 level indicator
2Audio channel 2 level indicator
3VDR level meter indicator
The segment colors change from gray to white at
or above the AU REF LEVEL set on the AUDIO2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. This
setting does not affect the relationship between
the number of lit segments and the audio levels.
The example in the above figure shows the colors
when AU REF LEVEL is set to –20 dB.
r Remaining disc capacity
Indicates the remaining recording time (in
minutes) of the disc.
Examples of remaining recording time indication
Indication
90 <
90 - 85
85 - 80
.
.
.
20 - 15
15 - 10
10 - 5
5-0
No display
Remaining recording
time
More than 90 minutes
90 to 85 minutes
85 to 80 minutes
.
.
.
20 to 15 minutes
15 to 10 minutes
10 to 5 minutes
5 to 0 minutes
0 minutes
s Remaining clips display
Displays the remaining number of clips that can
be recorded. The display flashes once per second
when the number of remaining clips is less than
10.
t Iris setting/auto iris override
Indicates the F value (iris setting) of the lens.
Auto iris override is shown by an indicator made
up of two segments each on the upper and lower
sides.
For details, see “Changing the Reference Value for
Automatic Iris Adjustment” on page 59.
u Setting change and adjustment
progress message display area
For details, see “Change confirmation/adjustment
progress messages” on page 149.
32
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Chapter
2 Preparations
1
The following power supplies are recommended
for the camcorder.
• BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Lithium-ion
Battery Pack
• AC power using the AC-DN2B/DN10 AC
adaptor
2
1BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S
2Align these lines.
Using a battery pack
When a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Battery
Pack is used, the camcorder will operate
continuously for the time shown below.
Model name
BP-GL95
BP-GL65
BP-L60S
BP-L80S
Chapter 2 Preparations
Preparing a Power
Supply
2
Slide the battery pack down until its
“LOCK” arrow points at the matching
line on the camcorder.
Operating time
Approx. 120 minutes
Approx. 75 minutes
Approx. 75 minutes
Approx. 100 minutes
1
Note
The battery pack operating time depends on the
frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient
temperature when used.
2
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger
suitable for each battery.
1“LOCK” arrow
2Matching line on the camcorder
For details on the battery charging procedure, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.
Note on using the battery pack
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully
recharged.
To attach the battery pack
1
Press the battery pack against the back
of the camcorder, aligning the line on
the side of the battery pack with the
matching line on the camcorder.
Note
If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminal
may be damaged.
To detach the battery pack
Holding the release button in, pull the battery
pack up.
Preparing a Power Supply
33
Attaching the Viewfinder
Chapter 2 Preparations
CAUTION
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the
camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun. Direct
sunlight can enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the
viewfinder and cause fire.
Release button
Notes
Note
The viewfinder is supplied separately.
• During recording and playback (while the ACCESS
indicator is lit), be careful never to remove the battery
pack.
• Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing
the battery pack.
Using AC power
When using the AC-DN10 AC adaptor
Mount an AC-DN10 on the camcorder in the
same way as a battery pack, then connect to the
AC power supply.
The AC-DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power.
Attaching the HDVF-20A/C35W
Note
When attaching the viewfinder, make notes of the
following points.
• Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling
the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF
connector. If you make this connection when the
camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not
function properly.
• Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the
camcorder’s VF connector. If the coupling is loose,
noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not
operate properly.
For more information about the connection of the
viewfinder and camcorder, contact a Sony service
representative.
1
To an AC outlet
34
Attaching the Viewfinder
1 Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right
positioning ring, 2 attach the
viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting
shoe, and 3 tighten the viewfinder leftto-right positioning ring.
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Stopper
3
1
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
2
Couple the viewfinder connector to the
VF connector.
Moving the viewfinder shoe up
1
Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder
positioning levers and the front-to-back
viewfinder positioning knobs, and then
pull the viewfinder slide assembly
forward.
2
Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal
wrench, detach the viewfinder slide
assembly and handle front cover.
VF connector
Detaching the viewfinder
You can carry out this by following the attaching
procedure in reverse order, but there is an
additional action to take: when detaching the
viewfinder from the fitting shoe, pull up the
stopper.
Chapter 2 Preparations
2
Adjusting the viewfinder position
To adjust the viewfinder left-right position,
loosen the left-right positioning ring, and to adjust
the front-back position, loosen the front-to-back
positioning knob.
Attaching the Viewfinder
35
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket
Handle front cover
Bolt with
hexagonal hole
Chapter 2 Preparations
By fitting a BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation
Bracket (not supplied), you can rotate the
viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg
does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying
the camcorder.
Viewfinder slide assembly
3
Attach the handle front cover with the
bottom edge up.
1
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the previous
section “Moving the viewfinder shoe
up” to detach the viewfinder slide
assembly.
2
Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied
bolts.
Bolts supplied
with the BKW-401
To attach the viewfinder
at the top
To attach the viewfinder
at the bottom (factory
default)
4
36
Attach the viewfinder slide assembly,
reversing the steps of the removal
procedure.
Attaching the Viewfinder
3
Adjust the front-to-back position so
that the arm of the BKW-401 does not
touch the handle when it is raised.
Adjust position so that arm
does not touch handle
Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the
screen from further away. It is also easy to
remove dust from the viewfinder screen and
mirror when the eyepiece is detached.
1
Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully
counterclockwise, to align the red
marks on the locking ring and the
viewfinder barrel.
1
1
Align the red marks on the eyepiece
locking ring and the viewfinder barrel.
2
Align the red mark on the end of the
eyepiece end with the red marks on the
eyepiece locking ring and the
viewfinder barrel. Then insert the
eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel.
3
Turn the eyepiece locking ring
clockwise until its “LOCK” arrow
points at the red mark on the viewfinder
barrel.
Chapter 2 Preparations
Detaching the eyepiece
To reattaching the eyepiece
When the eyecup is worn out, replace it with a
new one.
For details of a replacement eyecup, contact a Sony
service representative.
Adjusting the viewfinder focus
and screen
To adjust the viewfinder focus
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the
viewfinder image is sharpest.
Diopter adjustment ring
32
1Locking ring
2Locking ring match mark
3Match mark on the viewfinder barrel
2
Detach the eyepiece.
To adjust the viewfinder screen
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.
Match mark on end of eyepiece
Attaching the Viewfinder
37
1
2
PEAKING
CONTRAST
ZEBRA
DISPLAY
Chapter 2 Preparations
ASPECT
ON
OFF
MOMENT
3
Setting the Area of Use
BRIGHT
TALLY
HIGH
OFF
LOW
1PEAKING control
2CONTRAST control
3BRIGHT control
When using the unit for the first time
The area of use and the frame frequency are not
factory preset. Before using this unit, you need to
set these items. (You cannot use the unit without
setting these items.)
To set the area of use
POWER switch
MENU knob
1
Set the POWER switch to the ON
position.
The screen for setting the area of use appears
in the viewfinder.
FORMAT SETTING
COUNTRY
: NOT SELECTED
SET FORMAT
AND TURN OFF ONCE.
2
Press the MENU knob.
z on the left of NOT SELECTED changes to
?, and you can now select the area of use.
FORMAT SETTING
COUNTRY
:?NOT SELECTED
SET FORMAT
AND TURN OFF ONCE.
38
Setting the Area of Use
3
Turn the MENU knob to display the
desired area of use.
Setting
NTSC (J) AREA
NTSC AREA
Area of use
Setting the Date/Time of
the Internal Clock
NTSC area (Japan) a)
NTSC area (for areas other
than Japan) b)
PAL area c)
a) The composite signal output from this unit is an
NTSC signal with no black setup. The frame
frequency is 59.94i.
b) The composite signal output from this unit is an
NTSC signal with a black setup (7.5 IRE). The
frame frequency is 59.94i.
c) The composite signal output from this unit is a
PAL signal. The frame frequency is 50i.
4
You can set or change the date and time of the
internal clock. The date and time set are reflected
in the timecode.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the TIME/DATE page of the
DIAGNOSIS menu, and press the
MENU knob.
Chapter 2 Preparations
PAL AREA
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
Set the POWER switch to OFF, then
once again to ON.
D02 TIME/DATE
The unit is now ready for use.
2
TOP
ADJUST
:
EXEC
HOUR
MIN
SEC
:
:
:
12
55
58
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
:
:
:
08
03
31
Press the MENU knob.
The TIME ADJUST setting window appears.
TIME ADJUST
ESC
HOUR
MIN
SEC
:
:
:
12
55
58
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
:
:
:
08
03
31
OK
•
•
•
•
•
•
3
HOUR: Sets the hour value.
MIN: Sets the minutes value.
SEC: Sets the seconds value.
YEAR: Sets the year.
MONTH: Sets the month.
DAY: Sets the day.
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the
item you want to set, and press the
MENU knob.
b on the left of the selected item changes to
z and z on the left of the setting changes to
?.
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock
39
Chapter 2 Preparations
4
Turn the MENU knob to display the
desired value, and press the MENU
knob.
z changes to b and ? changes to z.
5
To continue the remaining settings,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
6
When you finish settings, turn the
MENU knob to move b to “OK”, then
press the MENU knob.
The internal clock is set with the date and
time set in steps 3 to 5. The TIME/DATE
page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears
again. The time set on the TIME ADJUST
setting window is displayed.
Mounting the Lens
First power off the camcorder, and then mount the
lens using the following procedure.
For information about using the lens, refer to the
operation manual for the lens.
3
Lens mount
securing rubber
To cancel the setting
Before executing step 6, move b to “ESC” at the
top right of the window and press the MENU
knob.
Alternatively, flick the CANCEL/PRST /
ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side.
All settings or changes are discarded and the
TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu
appears.
5
4
21
1
Push the lens locking lever up and
remove the lens mount cap from the
lens mount.
2
Align the center pin on the lens with the
center slot in the lens mount, and insert
the lens into the mount.
3
Holding the lens in place, push the lens
locking lever down to lock the lens.
Caution
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off
while the camcorder is being used. This could cause
a serious accident. Make sure the lens is firmly
locked. It is recommended that the lens mount
40
Mounting the Lens
securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as
illustrated above.
4
Connect the lens cable to the LENS
connector.
5
Secure the lens cable with the cable
clamps.
Adjusting the Flange
Focal Length
The position of the controls for adjusting the flange
focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens. Check
the identification of the various controls in the lens
manual.
Chapter 2 Preparations
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you
zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the
flange focal length (the distance from the plane of
the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane).
Make this adjustment after mounting or changing
the lens.
About 3 m
1
Set the iris to manual.
2
Open the iris. Place the flange focal
length adjustment chart about 3 m (10
ft) away from the camera, lit well
enough to provide a satisfactory video
output level.
3
Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or
F.B ring (flange focal length adjustment
ring).
4
Use manual or power zoom to set the
lens to telephoto.
5
Point the camera at the chart by turning
the focus ring and focus on it.
6
Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
7
Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart
is in focus, being careful not to disturb
the focus ring.
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length
41
8
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays
in focus all the way from wide angle to
telephoto.
9
Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing
screws.
Preparing the Audio
Input System
Chapter 2 Preparations
Connecting a microphone to the
MIC IN connector
You can attach the ECM-680S stereo microphone
(not supplied) to the microphone holder of the
HDVF-20A viewfinder (not supplied).
1
Loosen the screw and open the
microphone holder clamp.
Microphone holder clamp
1
2
2
Place the microphone in the
microphone holder.
1 Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
2 Close the microphone holder.
3 Tighten the screw.
1
3
2
On how to perform this operation, refer to the
operation manual for the microphone.
42
Preparing the Audio Input System
3
Plug the microphone cable into the MIC
IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN
switch for the channel on which you
want to record the audio from this
microphone to FRONT (for CH-1/
CH-2) or F (for CH-3/CH-4).
4
Chapter 2 Preparations
Microphone
Secure the microphone cable with the
cable clamps.
Connecting microphones to the
AUDIO IN connectors
You can connect up to two monaural
microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors, using a CAC-12 Microphone Holder
(not supplied).
The following is the procedure for attaching an
electret condenser microphone such as the ECM674/678.
On how to attach the CAC-12, refer to the operation
manual for the CAC-12.
1
Attach the electret condenser
microphone.
1 Loosen the ball joint lock lever.
2 Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
3 Close the microphone holder.
4 Tighten the screw.
5 Position so that the microphone does
not interfere with the viewfinder and
tighten the ball joint lock lever.
2
Connect the microphone cable to the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector.
3
Set the switches as follows.
Set the LINE/AES/EBU/MIC switch to MIC.
• Set the AUDIO IN input selection switch as
indicated below, depending on the power
supply type of the microphone.
Internal power supply: Set the +48V/OFF
switch to OFF.
External power supply: Set the +48V/
OFF switch to +48V (ON).
• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH4) switch for the channel to which the
microphone is connected to REAR (for
CH-1/CH-2) or R (for CH-3/CH-4).
When attaching the ECM-674/678, use the
microphone adaptor supplied with the CAC12 Microphone Holder.
Preparing the Audio Input System
43
Attaching a UHF portable tuner
(for a UHF wireless microphone
system)
1
Chapter 2 Preparations
3
2
4
1+48V/OFF switch
2Monaural microphone
3AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
4To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector
4
Switch the input level to match the
sensitivity of the microphone used.
Switch the input level by changing the REAR
MIC REF setting on the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu (factory default setting
is –60 dB). For details, see page 127.
XLR connection automatic detection function
With the XLR connection automatic detection
function being on, when a cable is connected to
the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input
from that connector is automatically selected for
audio recording, regardless of the setting of the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection
function can be switched on or off on the
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu,
with the REAR XLR AUTO item.
Notes
• If the input level on this unit is not at an appropriate
setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud sounds
may be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio may be
affected.
• In order for the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors
on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V
power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are
fitted. If the microphone cable has a female connector,
use an adaptor.
• When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once
you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to
lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12 (in step 1).
After detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two
screws back into their original places.
44
Preparing the Audio Input System
To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system,
fit one of the following UHF portable tuners.
• DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
• WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
• WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized
Diversity Tuner
For details of these units, refer to the operation
manuals for them.
Note
When you use the DWR-S01D Digital Wireless
Receiver in combination with this camcorder, you need
to check both of their versions.
Consult a Sony representative for information about
these versions.
To fit the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
1
Remove the four fixing screws holding
the cover of the portable tuner/receiver
housing slot located in the rear of this
unit, to remove the cover.
2
Insert the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
into the housing slot, and fasten the four
fixing screws.
DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
3
Set the AUDIO IN switch for the
channel to which you want to input
audio signal to WIRELESS (see page
26).
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S
Notes
To fit the WRR-862 (when using a BPGL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery Pack)
1
Adjustment
screws
Mount plate
(supplied with
WRR-862)
Phillips type
screwdriver
2
Attach the battery pack.
Chapter 2 Preparations
• When the XLR connection automatic detection
function is on, even if the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2
switch is set to WIRELESS, the signal input to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector is automatically
selected when an audio cable is connected to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector. In such a case, set
REAR XLR AUTO to OFF on the AUDIO-1 page of
the MAINTENANCE menu. (The factory default
setting is OFF.)
• When the LINE/AES/EBU/MIC switch is set to LINE
or MIC, the audio signals recorded on audio channels
3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic
detection function. They are determined by the settings
of the AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches.
On how to attach the battery pack, see “To
attach the battery pack” on page 33.
3
Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner
fitting.
Attach the WRR tuner fitting (not
supplied; service part number: A-8278057-B) to the back of the camcorder.
1 Use a Phillips type screwdriver to
tighten the four screws placed in the
tuner fitting. For three of these screws,
insert the screwdriver through the
corresponding hole and tighten the
screw.
Note
WRR-862
4
Connect the tuner power cord to the DC
OUT connector of the camcorder, and
the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN
CH1 or CH2 connector.
5
Set the switches as follows.
Make sure that all four screws are fully tightened.
2 Loosen the adjustment screws on the
tuner fitting.
3 Adjust the tuner fitting position for a
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery
Pack to be attached, and tighten the
adjustment screws to fix its position.
4 Attach the mount plate supplied with
the WRR-862.
About the WRR tuner fitting (service part
number: A-8278-057-B), contact a Sony service
or sales representative.
• Set the LINE/AES/EBU/MIC switch for
the channel to which the audio output cable
is attached to MIC.
• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH4) switch for the channel to which the audio
output cable is connected to REAR (for
CH-1/CH-2) or R (for CH-3/CH-4).
If the XLR connection automatic detection
function is on, the input signal for audio
recording is selected automatically, and
therefore this setting is not required.
Preparing the Audio Input System
45
4
4
Chapter 2 Preparations
1
1
2
3
1AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
2To DC OUT connector
3To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector
4LINE/AES/EBU/MIC switch
Connecting line input audio
equipment
Connect the audio output connector of the audio
equipment that supplies the line input signal to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.
Switch settings
Set the LINE/AES/EBU/MIC switch for the
channel to which the audio signal source is
connected to “LINE”.
Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded
• With the XLR connection automatic detection
function being off (the factory default setting):
A signal must be selected for audio recording by
setting the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to
“REAR” depending on which of the AUDIO IN
CH1 and CH2 connectors is used for connecting
the external audio equipment.
• With the XLR connection automatic detection
function being on: When a cable is connected to
the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the
input from that connector is automatically
selected for audio recording, regardless of the
setting of the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection
function can be switched on or off on the
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu,
with the REAR XLR AUTO item.
46
2
3
1AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
2To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector
3Audio equipment
4LINE/AES/EBU/MIC switch
Preparing the Audio Input System
To remove the camcorder from the tripod
adaptor
Tripod Mounting
Attach the VCT-14 tripod adaptor (not
supplied) to the tripod.
Tripod adaptor
Red button
Lever
Note
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged
position even after the camcorder is removed. If this
happens, press the red button against the lever a second
time and move the lever as shown above until the pin
returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains in the
engaged position, you will not be able to mount the
camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Chapter 2 Preparations
1
Camera mount
2
Mount the camcorder on the tripod
adaptor.
Slide the camcorder forward along the
groove in the adaptor until it clicks
Tripod Mounting
47
Connecting a Video
Light
Chapter 2 Preparations
With this camcorder, you can use the Anton
Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light
(powered by 12 V with maximum power
consumption of 50 W).
• If you connect the video light to the LIGHT
connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT
switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and
off automatically as you start and stop the VDR
operation.
• The output of the LIGHT connector on the
camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the
camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).
The brightness or color temperature of the light
will not change according to voltage increase.
Using the Shoulder
Strap
To attach the shoulder strap
1
Pull up the strap to lock the fitting
g
Clip
Notes
• Do not use a video light with power consumption of
over 50 W.
• The brightness or color temperature of the light will
change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN
connector or from the battery pack) is under 12 V.
2
To attach the video light
Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on
the camcorder grip, and connect the video light
cable to the LIGHT connector.
Note
The accessory fitting shoe on this unit is of the 1/4-inch
tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slidetype shoe, contact a Sony service representative.
48
Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap
fitting.
Connecting a Video Light / Using the Shoulder Strap
Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap
fitting on the other side of the grip in the
same way as in step 1.
To remove the shoulder strap
Press here and pull in the direction
shown by the arrow to release
You can shift the shoulder pad from its center
position (the factory default setting) backward by
up to 10 mm (3/8 inch) or forward by up to 25 mm
(1 inch). This adjustment helps you get the best
balance for shooting with the camcorder on your
shoulder.
1,3
Chapter 2 Preparations
g
Adjusting the Shoulder
Pad Position
2
Shoulder pad
1
Raise the lever in the center of the
shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder
pad.
2
Slide the shoulder pad backward or
forward until it is in the most
convenient position.
3
Bring down the lever to lock the
shoulder pad in the selected position.
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position
49
Connecting the Remote
Control Unit
• ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches, RET button on the
lens, and COLOR TEMP. button to which the
electrical CC filter 3200K/4300K/5600K/
6300K function is assigned.
Paint adjustment when the remote
control unit is connected
Chapter 2 Preparations
Connecting the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control
Unit enables remote control of the principal
camera functions.
Connecting the remote control unit to the
REMOTE connector (8-pin) automatically puts
the camcorder into remote control mode. If you
disconnect the remote control unit, the remote
control mode is cancelled.
Function of the recording start/stop
buttons when the remote control unit is
connected
When the remote control unit is connected, you
can make a setting to determine which of the
recording start/stop buttons you will use. This
setting is made using the RM REC START item
on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
1
Relationship between the setting of the RM REC
START item and the function of recording start/
stop buttons
2
3
1RM-B150/B750
2Remote control cable
3REMOTE connector
Camcorder switch functions when the
remote control unit is connected
The following switches on the camcorder do not
function.
• GAIN selector
• OUTPUT/DCC switch
• WHITE BAL switch
• AUTO W/B BAL switch
• SHUTTER selector
• ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches, RET button on the
lens, and COLOR TEMP. button to which the
TURBO SWITCH function is assigned
• REC START button (and the recording start/
stop buttons on the lens, and the ASSIGN 1/3/4
switches, RET button on the lens, and COLOR
TEMP. button to which the recording start/stop
function is assigned) (when the RM REC
START item on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of
the MAINTENANCE menu is set to “RM”)
50
The settings of the paint adjustment that were in
effect the last time the remote control unit was
used are recalled.
Connecting the Remote Control Unit
Recording start/ Settings of RM REC START
stop button
RM
CAM
PARA
Camcorder’s REC Disabled Enabled Enabled
START button
Lens’ VTR button Disabled Enabled Enabled
Camcorder’s
Disabled Enabled Enabled
ASSIGN 1/3/4
switches, COLOR
TEMP. button,
and lens’ RET
button assigned
the recording
start/stop function
Remote control
Enabled
Disabled Enabled
unit’s VTR button
When the monitor is connected to the
MONITOR OUT connector of the remote
control unit
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the
RM-B150/B750 outputs the same signal as that
from the TEST OUT connector on the camcorder.
Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B150/
B750 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR
connector on the RM-B150/B750.
When the remote control unit is
disconnected from the camcorder
The camcorder settings return to the settings in
effect before the remote control unit was
connected.
The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used
for storing paint adjustment data consists of two
regions as shown below: one is the “independent
data region” that is used when a remote control
unit is not connected, and the other is the “remote
control data region” that is used when a remote
control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is
automatically selected and output to the camera
section depending on whether or not a remote
control unit such as the RM-B150 is connected.
Setup menu of the
camcorder
Independent
data region
MASTER BLACK
MASTER GAMMA
KNEE POINT
DETAIL LEVEL
R/B GAIN
R/B BLACK
RM-B150
Remote control
data region
MASTER BLACK
MASTER GAMMA
KNEE POINT
DETAIL LEVEL
R/B GAIN
R/B BLACK
Non-volatile memory
1) Absolute value rotational controls: The data
corresponding to the angular position of controls is
output. Rotational controls for which the data
corresponding to the amount of their rotation is output
are called relative value controls.
2) Absolute value switches: Like toggle switches or
slide switches (except momentary switches), the
switches (or knobs) whose positions must coincide
with their functions are called absolute value switches.
When RM COMMON MEMORY is set to “ON”
on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, you can use settings of
the paint adjustment data stored in the
independent data region even if you connect the
remote control unit. In this case, the settings
stored in the independent data region will be
renewed when you change the settings on the
remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the paint
data made with the remote control unit can be
retained even if the remote control unit is
removed. However, if the switch position on the
remote control unit differs from the one on the
camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder
takes precedence over that on the remote control
unit.
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in
effect before you connect the remote control unit.
In this case, you should set the control knob to the
relative value mode on the remote control unit.
Chapter 2 Preparations
Structure of the paint adjustment data
region” becomes effective. Thus the camcorder
will return to the settings that were in effect
before the remote control unit was connected.
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied
with the remote control unit.
Hardware of the
camera section
RM-B150 connected
RM-B150 not connected
Thus, when a remote control unit is connected to
the camcorder, the effective data region is
switched to the “remote control data region” and
the settings of the paint adjustment that were in
effect the last time the remote control unit was
used are recalled.
The settings of the absolute value rotational
controls 1) and absolute value switches 2) are
overwritten by those on the remote control unit
after the remote control unit is connected.
When the remote control unit is disconnected
from the camcorder, the “independent data
Connecting the Remote Control Unit
51
Chapter
3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Recording Format
Adjusting the Black
Balance and the White
Balance
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
The recording formats are as follows.
Video recording format: MPEG HD 50 Mbps,
59.94i/50i/25P 1)
Audio recording format: 24-bit/48 kHz
To ensure excellent image quality when using this
camcorder, conditions may require that both the
black balance and the white balance be adjusted.
1) 59.94i: When the area of use is set to NTSC (J)
AREA/NTSC AREA.
50i/25P: When the area of use is set to PAL AREA.
Black balance adjustment
Note
It is not possible to combine material recorded in
different system frequencies and audio recording formats
on a single disc (although 50i and 25P materials can be
combined).
The black balance will require adjustment in the
following cases.
• When the camcorder is used for the first time
• When the camcorder has not been used for a
long time
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in
which the surrounding temperature has changed
greatly
• When the GAIN selector (L/M/H) values have
been changed by using the USER menu
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black
balance when using the camcorder after it has
been off.
White balance adjustment
Always readjust the white balance when the
lighting conditions change.
Viewfinder screen displays
If the black balance or white balance adjustment
is started, messages that report on the progress
and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen
when the VF DISP MODE item is set to “2” or
“3” on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu.
Note
Black balance and white balance adjustment values that
are automatically set by the camcorder and the various
settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained
even when the power is turned off.
52
Recording Format / Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
Adjusting the black balance
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are
performed in the following order: black set and
black balance. Manual black balance adjustment
can be selected from the setup menu.
For details of manual black balance adjustment,
refer to the Maintenance Manual.
see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not
a fault.
If automatic black balance adjustment
cannot be made
If the black balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Possible messages are listed below.
Error message
ABB : NG
IRIS NOT CLOSE
2
1
1OUTPUT/DCC switch
2AUTO W/B BAL switch
1
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.
2
Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLK and release the switch.
The switch returns to the center position, and
the adjustment is executed.
During adjustment, the following message is
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
ABB : NG
R (or G or B) :
OVERFLOW
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the black balance adjustment.
Keep pushing the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLK until “-BLACK SET-” appears after “BLACK BALANCE-” appears. If the error
message occurs again, an internal check is
necessary.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
ABB : NG
TIME LIMIT
Meaning
The lens iris did not close;
adjustment was
impossible.
Adjustment could not be
completed within the
standard number of
attempts.
The difference between the
reference value and the
current value is so great
that it exceeds the range.
Adjustment was
impossible.
For information about this internal check, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
ABB:EXECUTING
BLACK SET
The messages change in the following
sequence :
BLACK SET
r
BLACK BALANCE
The black balance adjustment ends in a few
seconds with the message “ABB:OK” and
the adjustment value is automatically stored
in memory.
Notes
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is
automatically closed.
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain
selection circuit is automatically activated so you may
Note
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris.
If this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.
Black balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the black
balance is next adjusted.
If a memory error occurs
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG”
flashes on the viewfinder screen when the
camcorder is turned on, the black balance and
white balance memory contents have been lost.
Adjust the black balance and white balance again.
Contact a Sony representative if this message
continues to appear even after the black balance
and white balance have been adjusted again.
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
53
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
FILTER selector (inner knob)
setting
1
2
3
4
Adjusting the white balance
1
Set the switches and selectors as shown
in the figure below.
ND filter
CLEAR
1/ ND
4
1/ ND
16
1/ ND
64
If the setting of the FILTER selector is
changed, a message reporting the setting
appears for about 3 seconds in the setting
change and adjustment progress message
display area of the viewfinder screen (in
display mode 3).
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
3
Alternatively, any white object such as a
cloth or a wall can be used.
The absolute minimum white area is as
follows.
1
2 34
Rectangle centered on the screen. The
lengths of the sides are 70% of the length
and width of the screen.
1FILTER selector
2GAIN selector: Set as low as possible.
3OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM
4WHITE BAL switch: A or B a)
a) White balance setting values are stored in
memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH <B>
item is set to “MEM” on the WHITE SETTING
page of the OPERATION menu.
If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE
BAL switch is changed, a message reporting
the new setting position appears for about 3
seconds in the setting change and adjustment
progress message display area of the
viewfinder screen.
2
Set the FILTER selector to suit the
lighting conditions as follows.
The white object must be within the
rectangle and have an area of at least 10%
of the screen.
Note
Make sure there are not bright spots in the
rectangle.
4
5
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
Adjust the lens iris.
Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an
appropriate setting.
Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/
manual switch on the lens to automatic.
The possible settings of the FILTER selector
and their corresponding filters to be selected
are listed below.
54
Place a white test card under the same
lighting conditions as for the subject to
be shot and zoom up to it.
Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
WHT and then release the switch.
Error message
WHITE : NG
LOW LEVEL
AUTO W/B BAL switch
The switch returns to the center position, and
the adjustment is executed.
The white balance adjustment ends in about
one second with the message shown in the
following figure, and the adjustment setting
is automatically stored in the memory (A or
B) that was selected in step 1.
AWB:OK
. K
Approximate color temperature
of the subject
Note
If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris,
the iris may hunt 1) during the adjustment. To
prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as
IG, IS, or S) on the lens.
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.
1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of
the image, resulting from repeated response to
automatic iris control.
If the automatic white balance adjustment
cannot be made
If the white balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Possible messages are listed below.
WHITE : NG
POOR WHITE
AREA
WHITE : NG
OVER LEVEL
The color temperature is
too low.
Adjustment could not be
completed within the
standard number of
attempts.
The white area could not
be checked.
The white video level is
too high. Either stop down
the lens iris or change the
ND filter.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the white balance adjustment. If the error
message occurs again, an internal check is
necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
If you have no time to adjust the white
balance
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
During adjustment, the message “WHITE :
OP” is displayed on the viewfinder screen (in
display mode 2 or 3).
WHITE : NG
COLOR TEMP
HIGH
WHITE : NG
COLOR TEMP LOW
WHITE : NG
TIME LIMIT
Meaning
The white video level is
too low. Either open the
lens iris or increase the
gain.
The color temperature is
too high.
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
This makes it possible to automatically set the
white balance to 5600K (factory default value) by
pressing the COLOR TEMP. button.
The color temperature to which the white balance
is set when the COLOR TEMP. button is pressed
can be selected from among 3200K, 4300K,
5600K, and 6300K on the ASSIGNABLE SW
page of the OPERATION menu. You can also
assign color temperatures to the ASSIGN 1/3/4
switches and the RET button on the lens.
For details of automatic white balance adjustment,
see page 54.
White balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the white
balance is next adjusted.
There are two sets of white balance memories, A
and B, and adjustments for each of the filters can
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
55
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
be automatically stored in the memory
corresponding to the setting (A or B) of the
WHITE BAL switch. The camcorder has four
built-in filters, so a total of eight (4 X 2)
adjustments can be stored. The number of
memories allocated to each of A and B can be
limited to one by setting the FILTER WHT MEM
item to “OFF” on the WHITE SETTING page of
the OPERATION menu. In this case, the memory
contents are not linked to the filter settings.
If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, and on the
WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION
menu, the WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to
“ATW”, the ATW function is activated to
automatically adjust the white balance of the
picture being shot for varying lighting conditions.
If a memory error occurs
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG”
flashes on the viewfinder screen when the
camcorder is turned on, the white balance and
black balance memory contents have been lost.
Adjust the white balance and black balance again.
Contact a Sony representative if this message
continues to appear even after the white balance
and black balance have been adjusted again.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
Shutter modes
The shutter modes that can be used with the
electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can
be selected are listed below.
Standard mode
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving
subjects with little blurring.
Frame
frequency
59.94i
50i
25P
Shutter speed (unit: seconds)
1/ , 1/
1
1
1
1
100 125, /250, /500, /1000, /2000
1/ , 1/
1
1
1
60 125, /250, /500, /1000,
1/
2000
1/ , 1/ , 1/ , 1/
1
33 50 100 125, /250,
1/ , 1/
1
500 1000, /2000
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
Select this mode for obtaining images with no
horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects
such as monitor screens.
Frame
frequency
59.94i
50i
25P
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)
60.00 to 4300
50.00 to 4700
25.00 to 2300
Notes
• Whatever the operating mode of the electronic
shutter, the sensitivity of the CCD decreases
with increasing shutter speed.
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens
wider as the shutter speed increases, thus
reducing the depth of field.
• Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or
mercury lamps, the light intensity may appear to
be constant, but the red, green, and blue
intensities are actually changing in
synchronization with the frequency of the
power supply causing flicker. Using an
electronic shutter under such lighting could
make the flicker even worse. Color flicker is
particularly likely to happen when the power
56
Setting the Electronic Shutter
supply frequency is 60 Hz. However, if the
power frequency is 50 Hz, setting the shutter
speed to 1/100 can reduce this flicker.
• When a bright object is shot in ECS mode in
such a manner that it fills the screen, the upper
edge of the picture may have poor quality
because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs.
Before using ECS mode, check the shooting
conditions.
• The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on
the current frame frequency.
adjustment progress message display area of
the viewfinder screen.
Examples: “: SS : 1/250”, “: ECS : 60.0 Hz”
3
Use the SHUTTER selector to select a shutter
mode or a standard-mode shutter speed. To set the
shutter speed in ECS mode, with the SHUTTER
selector set to ON and the ECS mode selected, use
the MENU knob for adjustment.
You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu to narrow the range of
choice in advance, or to select in advance whether
or not you use ECS.
Standard mode (with frame frequency: 59.94i)
Setting the shutter mode and standardmode shutter speed
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained
even when the camcorder power is turned off.
2
Follow the procedure described in
“Selecting the display items” on page
148 to set the VF DISPLAY MODE
item to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1
page of the USER menu.
Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON
to SELECT.
ECS mode
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Pushing the SHUTTER selector down to
SELECT repeatedly allows you to cycle
through the settings of mode and speed
preselected on the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu.
Note that all modes and all standard-mode
speeds listed in the table on page 56 are
preselected using the SHT ENABLE page of
the OPERATION menu.
By factory default, all available shutter
modes and shutter speeds are displayed in the
sequence shown in the following figure.
(You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu to make a setting so that
only the desired (or most frequently used)
modes and speeds are displayed.)
Selecting the shutter mode and
shutter speed
1
Before the shutter setting indication
disappears, flick the SHUTTER
selector down to SELECT again and
repeat this until the desired mode or
speed appears.
Shutter speeds in standard mode can also be
switched to angle display by using SHT DISP
MODE in the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
Setting the shutter speed in ECS mode
1
Set the shutter speed mode to ECS (see
the previous item).
2
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or
counterclockwise until the desired
frequency appears.
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is
connected
You can set the shutter speed of ECS with the
rotary encoder of the RM-B150.
SHUTTER selector
The current shutter setting indication appears
for about 3 seconds in the setting change and
Setting the Electronic Shutter
57
z on the left of the selected item changes to
b and ? on the left of the setting changes to
z.
To set another mode or speed, return to step
2.
Changing the range of choice of shutter
mode and speed settings
You can reduce the time required to select the
shutter mode and speed by narrowing the choice
of settings in advance. This can be done by using
the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION
menu.
4
Note
The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM-B150
Remote Control Unit is connected to the camcorder.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
MENU ON/OFF switch
MENU knob
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
022 SHT ENABLE
2
SHUTTER ECS
:
ON
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1/100
1/125
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the
shutter mode or shutter speed you want,
then press the MENU knob.
b on the left of the selected item changes to
z and z on the left of the setting changes to
?.
3
58
Note that only the shutter speeds set to “ON”
can be selected with the SHUTTER selector.
Turn the MENU knob until “ON”
appears, then press the MENU knob.
Setting the Electronic Shutter
To end the menu operation, set the
MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close
the cover of the menu operating section.
The menu disappears from the screen and the
display indicating the current status of the
camcorder appears along the top and bottom
of the screen.
Changing the Reference
Value for Automatic Iris
Adjustment
4
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the
screen.
5
Turn the MENU knob to change the
reference value.
Note
Changing the reference value
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the AUTO IRIS page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
016 AUTO IRIS
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is
not ECS.
The changed reference value is retained until
the power of the camcorder is turned off.
Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to
the standard value every time the power is turned
on.
To make the iris more open
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as
seen from the front of the camera.
The iris stop indicators as shown in the
following table appear in the upper part to the
left of the F number in the iris indication.
Iris stop
0.25
Indicator
0.5
0.75
1
To stop down the iris
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen
from the front of the camera.
The iris stop indicators as shown in the
following table appear in the lower part to the
left of the F number in the iris indication.
Iris stop
–0.25
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment
can be changed to aid the shooting of clear
pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blownout highlights. The reference value for the lens
iris can be set within the following range with
respect to the standard value.
• 0.25 to 1 (increasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further open
• –0.25 to –1 (decreasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further close
Also you can set the area where light detection
occurs.
Indicator
–0.5
2
–0.75
Check that the b mark is at the IRIS
OVERRIDE position, and then press
the MENU knob.
–1
b on the left of the selected item changes to
z and z on the left of the setting changes to
?.
3
Turn the MENU knob until “ON”
appears, then press the MENU knob.
z on the left of the selected item changes to
b and ? on the left of the setting changes to
z.
The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to “ON”.
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment
59
4
Turn the MENU knob to move b to
IRIS WINDOW, then press the MENU
knob.
b changes to z and z changes to ?.
5
Opening the lens iris
Turn the MENU knob until the desired
auto iris window appears, then press the
MENU knob.
Iris opened by 1
stop (two
segments)
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Iris opened by 0.5
stop (one segment)
z changes to b and ? changes to z.
Stopping down the lens iris
Iris stopped down
by 1 stop (two
segments)
If you select “VARIABLE”, the following
items become effective and you can set the
window of the desired size. Set each item to
the desired size.
Iris stopped down
by 0.5 stop (one
segment)
Item
IRIS VAR WIDTH
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is
connected
The IRIS control knob of the RM-B150 can be
used for lens iris setting. In this case, the indicator
is not displayed.
Selecting the automatic iris window
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2
described in the previous item to
display the AUTO IRIS page.
2
Turn the MENU knob to move b to
IRIS WINDOW IND, then press the
MENU knob.
b on the left of IRIS WINDOW IND.
changes to z and z on the left of the setting
changes to ?.
3
Turn the MENU knob until “ON”
appears, then press the MENU knob.
z changes to b and ? changes to z
The currently selected auto iris window
appears on the screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris
window on the screen, set to “OFF”.
60
The shaded parts indicate the
area where light detection
IRIS VAR H POS.
IRIS VAR V POS.
6
Setting
The width of the
window
The height of the
window
The position of the
window in the
horizontal direction
The position of the
window in the vertical
direction.
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
The menu disappears from the screen and the
display indicating the current status of the
camcorder appears along the top and bottom
of the screen.
To counter problems with very bright
highlights
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too
much, leaving the overall image dark, or the
highlights may be blown out. In such cases,
setting the highlight clip function on reduces the
luminance range, avoiding problems from the
automatic iris correction.
In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu, set
the CLIP HIGH LIGHT item to “ON”.
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment
Adjusting the Audio
Level
Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2
switches to AUTO automatically adjusts the input
levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio
channels 1 and 2. You can also adjust the audio
level manually.
For audio channels 3 and 4, menu settings allow
you to select automatic adjustment, manual
adjustment, or fixed.
0
10
0
10
CH-3
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
MIC LEVEL
control
1
2
1
To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO
IN CH1 or AUDIO IN CH2 connector,
set the AUDIO IN CH-1 or AUDIO IN
CH-2 switch to REAR.
To adjust both input signals, set both
switches to REAR.
Excessive
input level
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es)
corresponding to the channel(s) selected
in step 1 to MANUAL.
3
With the LEVEL control(s) for the
channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so
that the audio level meter shows up to
–20 dB for a normal input volume.
Target input
level
Manually adjusting the audio
levels of the audio inputs from the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors
With the XLR connection automatic detection
function being on, when a cable is connected to
the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input
from these connectors is automatically selected
for audio recording. In this case, start the
operation from step 2.
You can turn on and off the XLR connection
automatic detection function on the AUDIO-1 page
of the MAINTENANCE menu.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Target audio level for automatic audio level
adjustment
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level
of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level
is excessive.
3
LEVEL
Correspondence between recording level
adjustments and audio level controls
On the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu, you can select which audio level control
controls the audio recording level of the input to
each of the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. The
correspondences between the settings of the menu
items and the controls are as follows.
REAR1/WRR LEVEL: Audio recording level
of channel 1
Setting
SIDE1
FRONT
F+S1
Control
LEVEL (CH-1) control (on the left)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-1) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
Adjusting the Audio Level
61
REAR2/WRR LEVEL: Audio recording level
of channel 2
Setting
SIDE2
FRONT
F+S2
Control
LEVEL (CH-2) control (on the right)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-2) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for
the desired channel(s) selected in step 1
to MANUAL.
3
Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and
adjust so that the audio level meter
shows up to –20 dB for a normal input
volume.
Note
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2)
controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the
MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on
channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position
of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL
(CH-1/CH-2) controls.
Manually adjusting the audio
level of the MIC IN connector
Note
If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on,
when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 connectors, the camcorder detects the connection to
the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. Thus, the AUDIO
IN switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio
signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors are
automatically selected.
Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone,
confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN
CH1/CH2 connectors. Alternatively, set the REAR XLR
AUTO item to “OFF” on the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
Correspondence between recording level
adjustments and audio level controls
On the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu, you can select which audio level control
controls the audio recording level of the front
microphone input. The correspondences between
the settings of the menu items and the controls are
as follows.
MIC CH1 LEVEL: Audio recording level of
channel 1
Setting
SIDE1
FRONT
F+S1
Control
LEVEL (CH-1) control (on the left)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-1) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
MIC CH2 LEVEL: Audio recording level of
channel 2
Setting
SIDE2
FRONT
F+S2
Control
LEVEL (CH-2) control (on the
right)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-2) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
Note
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control
and LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls linked together, if the
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls are set to 0, the audio
signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check
the position of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls before
adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.
LEVEL
0
10
0
10
CH-3
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
3
1
62
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
2
1
Set either or both of the AUDIO IN
switch(es) to FRONT.
Adjusting the Audio Level
Recording audio on channels 3
and 4
Selecting the recorded audio
You can select the audio recorded on audio
channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH4 switches, or you can have the selection made
automatically, as follows.
To automatically select the same audio as on
channels 1 and 2
On the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu, set the AUDIO CH3/4 MODE item to “CH
1/2”.
page of the MAINTENANCE menu to
FRONT.
The levels of audio channels 3 and 4 can now
be adjusted with the MIC LEVEL control.
To set to a fixed value
In step 2 of the previous procedure “To adjust
manually”, set the menu items to FIX.
1
2
3
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
4
5
6
CH-3 switch
1F: The audio signal from the front
microphone is recorded.
2R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN
CH1 connector is recorded.
3W: The audio signal of the wireless
microphone is recorded.
CH-4 switch
4F: Same as with the CH3 switch.
5R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN
CH2 connector is recorded.
6W: Same as with the CH3 switch.
Note
When the LINE/AES/EBU/MIC switch is set to LINE or
MIC, the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3 and
4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection
function. They are determined by the settings of the
AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches.
Adjusting the audio recording levels
To adjust automatically
Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO-2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to STREO or MONO.
To adjust manually
1
Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the
AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu to OFF.
2
Set AUDIO CH3 LEVEL (for audio
channel 3) and AUDIO CH4 LEVEL
(for audio channel 4) on the AUDIO-3
Adjusting the Audio Level
63
F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator
keeps running.
R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode
generator runs only while recording.
Setting the Time Data
To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame
mode
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or nondrop frame (NDF) mode on the TIMECODE page
of the MAINTENANCE menu.
Setting the timecode
The timecode setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 :
00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds :
frames) for the PDW-700.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
1
RESET/RETURN
button
DISP SEL HOLD
RESET
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
LEVE
3,5
4
EXPAND
CHAPTER
COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL
CLIP MENU
0
ESSENCE
MARK
10
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
S.SEL
2
AUTO
SHIFT
REGEN
CLOCK
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET.
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
The first (leftmost) digit of timecode flashes.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
64
For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the
Internal Clock” on page 39.
MANUAL
CH-1
1
5
Saving the real Time in the Timecode
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode.
When it is necessary to set the actual time, use the
TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu.
AUDIO SELE
SUB CLIP
PRESET
4
To make the timecode consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to
R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the disc
normally produces consecutive timecode.
However, once you remove the disc and record on
another disc, the timecode will no longer be
consecutive when you use the original disc again
for recording. In this case, to make the timecode
consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to REGEN.
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN.
Setting the Time Data
Setting the user bits
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal
digits), you can record user information such as
the date, time, or scene number on the timecode
track.
generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the
internal generator of this camcorder.
Connections for timecode
synchronization
Connect both the reference video signal and the
external timecode as illustrated below.
1
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external
timecode
RESET/RETURN button
DISP SEL HOLD
RESET
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
LEVE
CHAPTER
COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL
CLIP MENU
0
ESSENCE
MARK
10
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELE
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
SHIFT
REGEN
CLOCK
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
1
2
External timecode
Reference video signal
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.
2
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
1 GENLOCK
2 TC IN
IN a)
a) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.
3
Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
2,4
3
EXPAND
To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the
desired operating mode for the
timecode generator.
The set user bit data will be recorded for both
LTC and VITC.
To store the user bit setting in memory
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is
automatically retained in memory even when the
power is turned off.
Synchronizing the timecode
You can synchronize the internal timecode
generator of this camcorder with an external
generator for the regeneration of an external
timecode. You can also synchronize the timecode
Setting the Time Data
65
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of
camcorders or timecode synchronization
To lock the timecode to an external
source
1
2
Reference camcorder
1
3
4
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
4
3
1
2
DISP SEL HOLD
RESET
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND
CHAPTER
COUNTER RC U-BIT
CLIP MENU
THUMBNAIL
0
ESSENCE
MARK
10
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
0
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
3
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
4
SHIFT
2
1
REGEN
CLOCK
CH-2
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
2
To another camcorder to be synchronized
1TEST OUT
2TC OUT
3TC IN
4GENLOCK IN a)
a) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.
SDI IN
(OPTION)
GENLOCK
IN
TEST
OUT
TC
OUT
TC IN
5
66
Setting the Time Data
1
Turn on the POWER switch.
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET.
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN.
4
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
5
Supply a timecode signal and a
reference video signal complying with
the SMPTE standard and in proper
phase relationship, to the TC IN
connector and to the GENLOCK IN
connector, respectively.
This operation synchronizes the internal
timecode generator with the external
timecode. After about 10 seconds, you can
disconnect the external timecode without
losing the synchronization. However, there
will be noise on the recorded image if you
connect or disconnect the timecode signal
during recording.
Notes
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal
timecode is immediately synchronized with the
external timecode and the counter display will show
the value of the external timecode. However, wait for
a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before
recording.
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the
same as the frame frequency of the camcorder, the
camera cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a case,
the internal timecode is not correctly synchronized
with the external timecode.
• When the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to “OFF” on
the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu,
the timecode cannot be synchronized with the
reference video signal. In this case, set the GENLOCK
item to “ON” on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
User bit settings during timecode
synchronization
When the timecode is synchronized, only the time
data is synchronized with the external timecode
value. Therefore, each camcorder can have its
own user bit settings.
You can lock the users bits of this camcorder to
the user bits of external timecode by setting EXTLK UBIT in the TIMECODE page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to EXT.
To release the timecode synchronization
First disconnect the external timecode, then set
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
To change the power supply from the battery
pack to an external power supply during
timecode synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect
the external power supply to the DC IN connector
before removing the battery pack. You may lose
timecode synchronization if you remove the
battery pack first.
Camera synchronization during timecode
synchronization
During timecode synchronization, the camera is
genlocked to the reference video signal input
from the GENLOCK IN connector.
Setting the Time Data
67
Chapter
4 Shooting
Handling Discs
Discs used for recording and
playback
Chapter 4 Shooting
The following Professional Discs 1) can be used
for recording and playback on this unit:
• PFD23A (capacity 23.3 GB)
• PFD50DLA (capacity 50.0 GB)
1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
• Do not disassemble the cartridge.
• The supplied adhesive labels are recommended
for indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct
position.
Storage
• Do not store discs where they may be subjected
to direct sunlight, or in other places where the
temperature or humidity is high.
• Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able
to gain ingress.
• Store cartridges in their cases.
Care of the discs
• Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a
cartridge using a soft dry cloth.
• If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry
before use.
Notes
• It is not possible to use the following discs for
recording or playback on this unit:
- Blu-ray Disc
- Professional Disc for Data
• PFD50DLA discs can be used only by XDCAM
devices with the DL mark (see the following
illustration). They cannot be used by XDCAM devices
without this mark.
Write-protecting discs
To protect the content recorded on the disc from
accidental erasure, move the Write Inhibit tab on
the lower surface of the disc in the direction of the
arrow, as shown in the following figure.
Lower surface of the disc
Write Inhibit tab
DL mark
Notes on handling
Handling
The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge,
and is designed to allow handling free of risk
from dust or fingerprints. However, if the
cartridge is subjected to a severe shock, for
example by dropping it, this can result in damage
or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched,
it may be impossible to record video/audio, or to
play back the content recorded on the disc. The
discs should be handled and stored carefully.
• Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within
the cartridge.
• Deliberately opening the shutter may cause
damage.
68
Handling Discs
SAVE
Slide in the direction of the arrow
Write Inhibit tab settings
SAVE
Recording enabled
SAVE
Recording disabled
You can also write protect-individual clips. For
details, see “Locking (write-protecting) clips” on
page 96.
1
Loading and unloading a disc
2
Loading a disc
1
Turn on the POWER switch.
V indication on the outside
The disc is loaded.
Note
To insert the disc correctly, make sure that the
camcorder is in the upright position (the grip
upside, the bottom downside).
POWER switch
Note
If there is condensation inside the VDR section, the
message “HUMID” appears in the status display on
the color LCD . If this happens, wait until the
indicator goes off before going on to step 2.
2
Press the EJECT button.
This opens the lid of the disc compartment.
EJECT button
3
1 Insert the disc in the V direction, and
2 close the disc compartment lid
manually.
With the power supply on, press the EJECT
button to open the disc compartment lid and eject
the disc, then remove the disc. If you are not
going to insert another disc, close the disc
compartment lid.
To unload a disc when the power supply is off
If the battery is exhausted, it is not possible to
remove the disc by pressing the EJECT button. In
such cases, use the following emergency
procedure to remove the disc manually.
1
Turn off the POWER switch.
2
Carry out the operation shown in the
following figure.
Chapter 4 Shooting
Unloading a disc
LCD monitor
1 Open this rubber cover.
2 Using a screwdriver or similar
implement, slide the black metal plate
visible inside, in the direction of the
rear of the camcorder.
The disc compartment lid opens. A red
Phillips screw is visible inside the
rubber cap.
3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the
screw counterclockwise (the direction
shown on the rubber cap).
This ejects the disc.
4 Close the rubber cover firmly.
Handling Discs
69
Handling of discs when recording
does not end normally (salvage
function)
Chapter 4 Shooting
Recording processing does not end normally if,
for example, the battery pack is removed during
recording, or if the power cord is disconnected
during recording. Because the file system is not
updated, video and audio data recorded in real
time is not recognized as files and clip contents
recorded up to that point are lost.
However, this unit has a salvage function which
can hold losses to the minimum by reconstructing
clips on such discs.
Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when
the POWER switch is set to OFF and when
battery exhaustion is detected, because the unit
does not become powered off until after the end
of recording processing.
Notes
You need not return the screw to its original
position after taking out the disc. Turning on the
power makes the disc compartment mechanism
operable again.
Note
Do not touch the disc or try to forcibly remove it until it
has been completely ejected.
Formatting a disc
When using a new disc
An unused disc requires no formatting operation.
The disc is automatically formatted so that it is
ready to use when loaded into this unit.
Formatting a disc on which material is
recorded
See page 105 for details of formatting a disc.
Note
When a recorded disc is formatted, all the data on the
disc is erased. (Even locked clips (see page 96) are also
erased.)
• Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until
recording processing has finished and the ACCESS
indicator has gone out.
• This function salvages as much recorded material as
possible after an unforeseen accident, but 100%
restoration cannot be guaranteed.
• Even when this function is used, it is not possible to
recover data from immediately before the interruption
of recording. The amount of data lost is as follows.
- Quick salvage: From 2 to 4 seconds of data before
the interruption of recording.
- Full salvage: From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the
interruption of recording.
(More data may be lost when the unit is subject to
vibrations, when you switch frequently between
recording and paused, and when you use functions
such as Picture Cash.)
Quick salvage
When the unit is powered on again after a
recording interruption due to a power
interruption, with the disc still loaded in the unit,
clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data
stored in nonvolatile memory and markers
recorded on the disc. Processing time is about 5
seconds.
Full salvage
When recording on an XDCAM device is
interrupted because of a power interruption, and a
disc is manually ejected from that device with the
70
Handling Discs
power off, clips are reconstructed on the basis of
markers recorded on the disc when the disc is
loaded in this unit. Therefore, processing takes
longer than for a quick salvage (about 30 seconds,
although it depends on the state of the disc).
Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage.
1
was not recorded normally. The “XXXX” in the
message is a code for XDCAM devices that can
salvage the disc. Refer to the table below and
use one of the indicated devices to salvage the
disc.
SALVAGE
Insert the disc on which recording did
not end normally.
The following salvage message appears.
SALVAGE
DISC CANNOT BE
RECORDED.
FORMAT DISC OR CONTACT
SERVICE TO RUN CLIP
SALVAGE PROGRAM.
(XXXX)
PUSH ESCAPE SWITCH
OR ROTARY ENCODER.
TO RECORD ON THE
DISC, IT IS NECESSARY
TO EXECUTE SALVAGE.
SALVAGE OK?
YES
NO
Code (XXXX)
0002
0200
Turn the MENU knob to move b to
“YES”, and press the MENU knob.
Salvage processing starts, and the message
“EXECUTING” appears.
A results message appears when the
processing finishes.
• If the salvage succeeded, the message
“COMPLETED” appears.
• If the salvage failed, the message
“INCOMPLETED”appears. Clips for
which recording did not end normally are
lost.
0300 a)
a) Does not appear on this unit.
To cancel the message and return to normal
operation, exchange the disc for a usable disc
and flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
to the ESCAPE side, or press the MENU knob.
Chapter 4 Shooting
2
Model name
PDW-1500/530/510/R1
PDW-F70/F350/F330
PDW-F75/F355/F335
PDW-HD1500/700
To exit without salvaging
Select NO in step 1 to exit without performing
salvage processing.
However, the status of the disc does not change.
Salvage is still required to recover the clips for
which recording did not end normally. The
salvage message will appear again when that disc
is inserted again, or when the camcorder is
powered on again.
Notes
• If salvage processing is not done, sections
which were recorded normally can be played
back, but no new recording can be done on the
disc.
• Full salvage of discs recorded by this camcorder
can be performed with the PDW-HD1500 or
PDW-700. Full salvage cannot be performed
with any other XDCAM device. The following
message may appear when you insert a disc that
Handling Discs
71
Basic Procedure for
Shooting
This section describes the basic procedures for
shooting and recording.
Before a shooting session, ensure that the
camcorder is functioning properly.
For details, see “Testing the Camcorder Before
Shooting” on page 184.
Basic procedure for shooting: from power
supply to disc loading
Chapter 4 Shooting
4 5
1
4
Check that there are no obstructions
such as cables near the disc
compartment lid. Then press the
EJECT button to open the disc
compartment lid.
5
After checking that the disc is not writeprotected (see page 68), load it and close
the disc compartment lid.
Basic procedure for shooting: from
adjusting the black balance and white
balance to stopping recording
Switch settings
After turning on the power and loading a disc, set
the switches and selectors as shown below and
begin operation.
2 1
3
2
1
3
Attach a fully charged battery pack.
For details, see “Preparing a Power Supply” on
page 33.
2
Set the POWER switch to ON.
3
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to
switch the LCD monitor to status
display, and check that the following
conditions are met.
• The HUMID indicator is not showing.
If it is, wait until it disappears.
• The battery status indicator shows at least
five segments (x).
If it does not, replace the battery pack with
a fully charged one.
72
Basic Procedure for Shooting
6
4
5
1DISPLAY: ON
2Iris: Automatic
3Zoom: Automatic
4OUTPUT/DCC: CAM, DCC: ON
5F-RUN/SET/R-RUN: F-RUN or R-RUN
(set as needed)
6AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2: AUTO
Shooting
Note
During recording (while the ACCESS indicator is
lit) do not remove the battery pack. If you do, the
internal processing for recording may not finish
properly, which may cause the last few seconds of
recording to be lost.
3
For details, see “Handling of discs when
recording does not end normally (salvage
function)” on page 70.
6
To stop recording, press the REC
START button or the VTR button on
the lens again.
The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes
off.
The material recorded from step 5 to step 6 is
saved as a single clip.
5,6 4
2
To check the last two seconds of the
recording (recording review)
If you press the RET button on the lens while
recording is paused, the last two seconds of
the recording is played back. If you hold
down the RET button, a low-speed reverse
search begins at a position two seconds
before the recording end position. When you
release the RET button, the reverse search
stops and playback in the forward direction
begins. After playback, the camcorder is
ready to start recording again.
By assigning the the same function as that of
the RET button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1/
3/4 switch or COLOR TEMP. button, you
can use the switch in the same way as the lens
RET button.
Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLK to adjust the black balance.
For details of black balance adjustment, see
page 53.
2
Select the CC filter and ND filter to
match the lighting conditions, and
adjust the white balance.
For details, see “Adjusting the white balance”
on page 54.
3
Aim the camera at the subject and
adjust the focus and zoom.
4
If necessary, set the electronic shutter
for an appropriate mode and speed.
For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter”
on page 56.
5
To start recording, press the REC
START button or the VTR button on
the lens.
If the recording start/stop function is
assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/3/4
switches, RET button on the lens, or COLOR
TEMP. button, you can also use this switch.
On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN
switches, see page 155.
During recording, the REC indicator lights in
the viewfinder. Perform zooming and focus
control, if necessary.
Chapter 4 Shooting
1
1
On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN
switches, see page 155.
7
Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required for
shooting.
Each time you repeat steps 5 and 6, successive
clips are recorded on the disc.
Clip 1
REC
START
Clip 2
REC REC
STOP START
Clip 3
REC REC
STOP START
REC
STOP
Notes
• It is not possible to record a clip shorter than 2 seconds.
If you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting, this
results in a 2-second clip.
If you stop recording and restart within 2 seconds of
Basic Procedure for Shooting
73
the original start, this creates a single continuous clip
from the original start time.
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on
a single disc is 300. If an attempt is made to record
more than 300 clips, the error message “MAX # Clips”
appears, even if there is free capacity on the disc.
Playback control buttons
During recording, the playback control buttons
(EJECT, F REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/
PAUSE, STOP) have no effect.
Playing back the recorded clip
Normal playback
Chapter 4 Shooting
By pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button, you can
review any length of recording on the viewfinder
screen in black and white or in color on the LCD
monitor. There are two other ways to review the
recording.
Recording review: You can view the last two
seconds of the recording on the viewfinder
screen in black and white or in color on the
LCD monitor.
Viewing color playback on a video monitor:
You can view the recording in color on a
color video monitor without the need for any
external adaptor.
You can also view palyback video during a fast
forward or reverse search.
For details about the switches and controls used to
select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio
level, see page 18 and page 25.
Viewing camera video during playback
(Live & Play function)
By carrying out the following procedure to enable
this function before starting playback, you can
view camera video (live video) in the viewfinder
during playback from the disc. This is a
convenient way to frame the next shot and adjust
the exposure and focus while viewing recorded
video and playback video.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired item.)
1
Set LIVE & PLAY to “ON” on the
OUTPUT 2 page of the OPERATION
menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select the video signal output conditions
from the following modes.
OFF: Do not display camera video in the
viewfinder during disc playback. (The
disc playback signals are output to the
viewfinder and LCD monitor, and from
all video output connectors.)
ON: Output camera video to the viewfinder,
even during disc playback. (The disc
playback signals are output to the LCD
monitor and from all video output
connectors.)
Freezing a picture during playback
Disc playback start position
The following operation can also be done from
the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit.
Although this unit uses optical discs, it is
designed to offer the most convenient features of
tape playback by VTRs. One of these is the
playback start position, which works in the same
way as with tape, as described below.
1
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start
playback.
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button again at
the instant when you want to freeze the
picture.
The playback pauses and a frozen picture
appears.
The timecode of the frozen frame is
displayed in the counter display and the
PLAY/PAUSE indicator now flashes (one
flash/second).
74
To restart playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button once again.
Basic Procedure for Shooting
After playback stop
The unit stops at the position where the STOP
button was pressed.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume
playback at the stop position.
After recording
The unit stops at the position where recording
ended.
To play back a clip, press the PREV button to
move to the start frame of any clip, or press the
F REV button to move to any position.
After disc insertion
The unit stops at the position of the disc when it
was most recently ejected.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume
playback at the most recent position.
The playback position is saved to the disc when
the disc is ejected, which allows playback to start
at that position whenever it is loaded into any
XDCAM player.
Note
The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the
disc is write-protected.
Deteriorating playback conditions
Deleting the recorded clip
For details, see “Deleting clips” on page 97.
Chapter 4 Shooting
Deteriorating playback may be due to the
following causes.
• Scratches and dust on the disc surface
This includes fingerprints, dust from the air, tar
from cigarette smoke, and so on.
Scratches and soiling which occur before
recording are not a problem because they are
registered in advance as defects, and recording
avoids them. However, scratches and soiling
which occur after recording can lead to
deteriorating playback conditions.
• Aging of disc recording layers
Over several decades, the recording layers of
optical discs can age and cause deteriorating
playback conditions.
• Deteriorating laser diodes performance
The performance of the laser diodes used in
optical heads can worsen with age, leading to
deteriorating playback conditions.
If playback conditions have deteriorated
Read errors occur when playback conditions
continue to deteriorate.
When a read error occurs, the message “DISC
ERROR!” appears, the video freezes, and the
audio output is suppressed.
If this happens, check the following points.
Whether the disc displays the same playback
condition on other XDCAM devices: If so,
the surface of the disc may be dirty or
scratched, or the performance of the
recording layers on the disc may have
worsened due to age. Do not use discs with
these symptoms.
Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM
device displays the same playback
conditions: If so, the performance of the
laser diodes may have deteriorated. Check
the total optical output time.
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an
approximate guide to when it is time to replace
optical heads.
To prevent playback conditions from
deteriorating
Pay attention to the following points when
handling discs.
• Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs
directly with your hands.
• Do not store for long periods in locations which
are dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans.
• Do not store for long periods under high
temperatures or in locations exposed to direct
sunlight.
Basic Procedure for Shooting
75
Advanced Operations for
Shooting
Recording essence marks
Shot marks and other essence marks can be
recorded on the disc.
Recording essence marks for scenes containing
important images and sounds enables quick
access to the marked points. This increases
editing efficiency.
Chapter 4 Shooting
To record a shot mark using the RET
button on the lens
To make it possible to record shot marks using the
RET button on the lens, carry out the following
procedure.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the ESSENCE MARK page of
the MAINTENANCE menu.
?M11 ESSENCE MARK
2
3
TOP
RET SHOT MARK 1
RET SHOT MARK 2
:
:
ON
ON
INDEX PIC. POS
:
0SEC
On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches,
see page 155.
Setting the thumbnail image at
recording time
When you record a clip, you can specify which
frame to use as the clip thumbnail image (see
page 84).
(The factory default setting is to use the first
frame in the clip as the thumbnail.)
For example, if all clips have the same image in
their first frames, you can specify a frame a few
seconds after the start of the clip, so that all
thumbnails will not show the same image.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the ESSENCE MARK page of
the MAINTENANCE menu, and press
the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select INDEX PIC. POS, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired time.
Select the essence mark to be recorded,
and press the MENU knob to display
“ON”.
4
Press the MENU knob.
Repeat the step 2, as necessary.
To record shot mark 1/2
When the camcorder is in recording or playback
mode, operate the lens RET button as follows.
Shot mark 1: Press the RET button once.
Shot mark 2: Press the RET button twice in rapid
succession.
76
“ShotMark1” or “ShotMark2” appears in the
viewfinder screen for about one second near the
timecode display.
If the SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2
recording function has been assigned to one of the
ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches and COLOR TEMP.
button, you can also use that switch to record a
SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 essence
mark.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
Starting a shoot with a few
seconds of pre-stored picture data
(Picture Cache function)
?005 REC FUNCTION
CACHE REC
The camcorder has a large capacity internal
memory, in which you can cache the last few
seconds (maximum 30 seconds) of captured
video and audio, so that recording starts from a
point just before you press the REC START
button or the VTR button on the lens.
Setting the Picture Cache mode/Picture
Cache time
OFF
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select CACHE REC, and press the
MENU knob to display “ON”.
3
Select CACHE REC TIME, and turn
the MENU knob to display the desired
Picture Cache time.
As you turn the MENU knob, the Picture
Cache time changes as follows: 0-2s y 2-4s
y 4-6s y 6-8s y 8-10s y 18-20s y
28-30s.
The Picture Cache mode settings once made
continue to be effective until changed.
You can assign the Picture Cache on/off function
to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches, RET
button on the lens, and COLOR TEMP. button.
Chapter 4 Shooting
To record in Picture Cache mode, you need to
turn on Picture Cache mode and set the picture
data storage time (Picture Cache time) using the
USER menu.
The Picture Cache time determines the number of
seconds recorded from the Picture Cache,
counting back from the time when you press the
REC START button or the VTR button on the
lens to start recording. However, the number of
seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache
may be shorter immediately after the setting of
the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is changed, and in
the special situations explained in the following
notes.
TOP
:
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” on page 155.
Notes
• Storage of images to memory begins after you select
Picture Cache mode. If you begin recoding
immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode,
images from before the selection will not be recorded.
• During playback, recording review or GUI screen
operations, no data is saved to the Picture Cache
memory. Thus it is not possible to use this function to
rerecord the last few seconds of material from
playback or recording review.
To set the Picture Cache mode/Picture Cache
time
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the REC FUNCTION page of
the USER menu.
Notes
• You can do a menu operation to change the Picture
Cache time while the camcorder is in recording mode.
However, the new setting takes effect only after the
recording is finished.
• In Picture Cache mode, the internal timecode generator
operating mode is always F-RUN regardless of the
setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch.
Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode
The recording procedure in Picture Cache mode
is basically the same as that for normal recording.
However, note the following differences.
• When you record in Picture Cache mode, the
picture you are shooting now is recorded to disc
after the picture data stored in memory (equal to
the Picture Cache time) is recorded to disc. For
this reason, disc access may continue for a short
time after you press the REC START button to
stop recording. During this time, the playback
control buttons are disabled, as in recording
mode. Also, if you press the REC START
button or the VTR button on the lens to restart
Advanced Operations for Shooting
77
Chapter 4 Shooting
recording during this time, a separate clip is
recorded.
• When you press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens to restart recording
during disc access, the start point of the
recorded clip may be later than the Picture
Cache time, especially when there are a large
number of clips recorded on the disc. In Picture
Cache mode, you should avoid stop and start
recording operations in quick succession.
• The time disc access stops after the REC
START button is pressed equals the Picture
Cache time. However, if you start recording
within the Picture Cache time immediately after
selecting Picture Cache mode, changing the
Picture Cache time or performing playback or
recording review, the picture data for the
duration of the Picture Cache time will not be
stored in memory. Thus, the time disc access
stops after the STOP button is pressed becomes
shorter than the Picture Cache time.
• In Picture Cache mode, you cannot set the FRUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET to make
timecode settings. To make timecode settings,
first exit Picture Cache mode.
Example: After recording clip 3, you want to
delete it and record a new clip 3 after clip 2.
When power is lost during recording in Picture
Cache mode
• If the POWER switch is turned off during
recording in Picture Cache mode, the
camcorder gets powered off after disc access
has continued for a few seconds so that the
picture at the moment when the POWER switch
is turned off is recorded.
• If you remove the battery, pull out the DC cable,
or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording
in Picture Cache mode, video and audio stored
in memory will be lost without being recorded
to the disc. For this reason, make sure you do
not change the battery while recording.
If an operation (other than recording review) which is not
a retake operation is carried out after the last clip has
been recorded, the retake function does not work even
when the camcorder is in the recording pause state.
In this case, the message “RE-TAKE NOT
ALLOWED!” appears. When you want to replace the
last clip with a new clip, delete the clip (see page 97).
Once you carry out a retake operation, the last clip is
deleted even if you do not carry out a recording operation
afterwards.
Retaking the most recent clip
A retake function is available, making it easy to
erase and retake the most recently recorded clip.
To use the retake function, you need to assign it
to one of the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches or COLOR
TEMP. button in advance.
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” on page 155.
78
Advanced Operations for Shooting
Clip 1
Clip 2
Clip 3
New clip
To retake the most recent clip
With recording paused or after the end of a
recording review (see page 73), proceed as
follows.
1
Hold down the button to which the
retake function has been assigned.
While the button is held down, the last frame
of the recorded clip and the message “PUSH
RET FOR CLIP DELETE” appears.
2
In this state, press the RET button.
The message “DELETING LAST CLIP”
appears, and the processing for deleting the
last recorded clip begins.
When the deleting has finished, the message
“LAST CLIP WAS DELETED” appears.
Note
Assigning user-defined clip titles
automatically
About the automatic title generation
function
By default, clips on each disc are assigned names
in the range C0001.MXF to C0300.MXF. For this
reason, two discs can contain clips with the same
names. The automatic title generation function
allows you to assign titles to all of the clips on
several discs, which facilitates clip management.
For example, if the titles TITLE00001 to
TITLE00020 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to
C0020.MXF on disc 1, then the titles
TITLE00021 to TITLE00037 are assigned to
clips C0001.MXF to C0017.MXF on disc 2.
To assign user-defined titles
automatically when clips are recorded
Titles are made up of prefixes, up to 10 characters
in length, and five-digit serial numbers such as
TITLE 00001.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page of the
OPERATION menu.
027 CLIP TITLE
C0020.MXF
TITLE
C0002.MXF
TOP
:
DSABL
C0001.MXF
TITLE00020
TITLE00020
TITLE00001
Clips recorded on Disc 1
2
Select “TITLE” and then press the
MENU knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to display
“ENABL” and then press the MENU
knob.
C0002.MXF
C0001.MXF
TITLE00037
TITLE00022
TITLE00021
Clips recorded on Disc 2
Setting the title prefix
You can assign title prefixes by choosing from a
prefix list stored in internal memory, or by
entering the prefix directly.
However, to choose from a prefix list, you must
create the list beforehand on a computer and
transfer it to the unit's internal memory with a
“Memory Stick”.
Setting the initial value of the serial number
The initial value of the serial number can be set to
00001 (the default) or to any other number. The
number is automatically incremented by 1 each
time you record a clip. When it reaches 99999, it
returns to 00001 for the next clip.
Note
Duplicate clip titles can be generated depending on the
serial number setting, for example if you reset the serial
number to the original value after recording several clips.
Care should be taken when setting the serial number.
027 CLIP TITLE
TITLE
:
SELECT PREFIX
:
CLEAR NUMERIC
:
LOAD PREFIX DATA:
PREFIX : TITLE
NUMERIC : 00001
Chapter 4 Shooting
C0017.MXF
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
TOP
ENABL
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
Clip titles will be generated automatically if
you record in this state.
The title of the next clip to be recorded will
be a combination of the prefix in the PREFIX
field and the serial number in the NUMERIC
field.
To create a list of title prefix strings
Prepare the data beforehand according to the
following rules.
File name
Assign the name “TITLES.TXT” to the file.
Input format
Enter title prefixes one at time, separated by
newline (CRLF) characters.
Prefixes can be up to 10 characters long. A prefix
file can contain up to 20 prefixes.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
79
Allowable characters
• Digits: 0 to 9
• Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z
• The following symbols:!, #, $, %, &, ', ( , ), ~, =,
-, ^, @, [, ], {, }, +, ; (semicolon), , (comma), .
(period), _ (underscore)
• Space
Title prefix list example
Tennis<CRLF>
Basketball<CRLF>
Skiing_1<CRLF>
Skiing_2<CRLF>
To select a prefix from the title prefix list
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
P00 TITLE PREFIX
001:
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
Chapter 4 Shooting
Copy the title prefix file (TITLES.TXT)
to the following folder on the “Memory
Stick”.
When no list of title prefixes has been transferred to
the internal memory of this unit, only the initial
value “TITLE” appears.
Note
2
Insert a “Memory Stick” with the title
prefix file (TITLES.TXT) into the
“Memory Stick” slot of the camcorder.
3
On the CLIP TITLE page of the
OPERATION menu (see page 117),
select “LOAD PREFIX DATA” and
then press the MENU knob.
“MEMORY STICK ACCESS” appears, and
the file on the “Memory Stick”
(TITLES.TXT) is transferred to the internal
memory of the unit.
The message “COMPLETE!” appears when
the transfer finishes.
ESC
Tennis
Basketball
Skiing_1
Skiing_2
Athletics
Aquatics
Cycling
Softball
Fencing
Sailing
Note
\\MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\GENERAL\VA
L_LIST
This folder is created when you insert a “Memory
Stick” into the camcorder. Do not create this folder
yourself on a computer.
Select “SELECT PREFIX” and then
press the MENU knob.
A list of up to 20 title prefixes appears.
To transfer a title prefix list to the
internal memory of the camcorder
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page of the
OPERATION menu.
3
Select the desired title prefix from the
list, and then press the MENU knob.
The CLIP TITLE page appears again, and the
selected prefix appears in the PREFIX field.
To enter a title prefix directly
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page on the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select “PREFIX” and then press the
MENU knob.
A prefix string appears.
Note
The message “FILE NOT FOUND!” appears if no
list of title prefixes is found.
Check the location where the file is stored on the
“Memory Stick”.
80
Advanced Operations for Shooting
027 CLIP TITLE
TOP
TITLE
: ENABL
SELECT PREFIX
:
EXEC
CLEAR NUMERIC
:
EXEC
LOAD PREFIX DATA:
EXEC
PREFIX : TITLE
!#$%&'()+,-.0123456789;
=@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZ[]^_abcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz{}~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
3
Move x onto the character you want to
change, and then press the MENU
knob.
4
Turn the MENU knob to move x onto
the desired character in the list of
selectable characters, and then press
the MENU knob.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the
remaining characters.
6
When you have finished entering the
prefix, turn the MENU knob to move x
to “END” and then press the MENU
knob.
The camcorder exits prefix input mode, and
the original CLIP TITLE page appears.
You can set the initial value of the clip title serial
number to 00001 (default) or to any 5-digit value.
To return the initial value to 00001
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page on the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select “CLEAR NUMERIC”and then
press the MENU knob.
The message “CLEAR OK? bYES NO”
appears.
3
Select “YES” and then press the MENU
knob.
The value in the NUMERIC field returns to
00001.
To set the initial value to any number
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page on the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
Select “NUMERIC” and then press the
MENU knob.
3
Move x onto the digit you want to
change, and then press the MENU
knob.
4
Turn the MENU knob to move x onto
the desired digit in the list of selectable
digits, and then press the MENU knob.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the
remaining digits.
6
When you have finished entering the
value, turn the MENU knob to move x
to “END” and then press the MENU
knob.
The camcorder exits numeric input mode,
and the original CLIP TITLE page appears.
To check clip titles
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the
thumbnail screen, and select the clip whose title
you want to check.
The title of the selected clip appears in the upper
left of the screen.
Chapter 4 Shooting
To set the initial value of the clip title
serial number
2
See “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 85) for more
information about the thumbnail screen.
Notes
• It is not possible to specify 00000 as the initial value.
Even if you enter 00000, the value is reset to 00001
when the camcorder exits numeric input mode.
• The value of the serial number is incremented by 1
every time a title is generated. When the value reaches
99999, the next number restarts from 00001.
• Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the
serial number after recording several clips or the same
is true depending on the value setting. Care should be
taken when setting the serial number.
Assigning user-defined names to
clips and clip lists
The following standard format names are
assigned automatically to clips and clip lists that
are created or recorded by XDCAM devices.
Clips: C0001.MXF to C0300.MXF
Clip lists: E0001E01.SMI to E0099E01.SMI
When you record or create clips and clip lists, you
can assign user-defined names instead of the
standard format names. Assigning meaningful
Advanced Operations for Shooting
81
names to clips and clip lists can facilitate file
management.
Chapter 4 Shooting
Limitations
• Letters, numbers and symbols from the Unicode
2.0 character set can be used.
However, the following control characters and
symbols cannot be used.
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F,
U+007F
- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ?, \, |
• Depending on the character type, the length of
name (“C*” part) may be limited to 14
characters. (The limit for ASCII characters is 56
characters.)
• All file name extensions are converted
automatically to uppercase.
• Titles are used as user-defined clip names on
this unit. Therefore, the available characters are
limited to those supported by the title function.
• Files generated along with clips and clip lists
are assigned the same names (the “C*” or “E*”
part of the following file names).
- Clips: Metadata files (C*M01.XML), proxy
AV files (C*S01.MXF)
- Clip lists: Metadata files (E*M01.XML)
• The following names cannot be assigned.
- Clips: C0000.MXF
- Clip lists: E0000E01.SMI, E0100E01.SMI to
E9999E01.SMI, E0000.SMI, E0100.SMI to
E9999.SMI
• The following names should be avoided.
- Clips: C5000.MXF to C9999.MXF
- Clip lists: E0001.SMI to E0099.SMI
To assign clip names on this unit
The title assigned to a clip is also used as the name
of that clip (or the file name).
C0001.MXF
TITLE00001
When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to
“C****”
TITLE00001.MXF
TITLE00001
When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to
“TITLE”
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Before starting, set TITLE on the CLIP
TITLE page of the OPERATION menu
to “ENABL” and set a title (see page
117).
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Display the FILE NAMING page of the
OPERATION menu.
3
Select NAMING FORM and then press
the MENU knob.
4
Turn the MENU knob to display
“FREE” and then press the MENU
knob.
You can now enter a user-defined name.
028 FILE NAMING
NAMING FORM:
AUTO NAMING:
82
Advanced Operations for Shooting
TOP
FREE
C****
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to select “AUTO
NAMING” and then press the MENU
knob.
Turn the MENU knob to display
“TITLE” and then press the MENU
knob.
The same name will now be given to newly
recorded clips.
Notes
• An FTP client software that supports UTF-8 is
required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII
characters. Command prompt FTP commands do not
support UTF-8.
• When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP
AUTO TITLING menu is a space or period (.), the clip
name is the title string minus the first letter.
Note
The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed
according to the following order of priority.
Title > user-defined clip name > standard format clip
name
Therefore, the display of this item changes as follows,
depending on whether or not there is a title.
• When a title has been set as a clip name on this unit,
the title is displayed for clips recorded on this unit.
• The user-defined name or standard format name is
displayed for clips without a title.
To check clip information (name, title, etc.)
For details, see “Checking clip properties” (page
96).
Chapter 4 Shooting
To use clip names and clip list names by FAM
and FTP
Carry out steps 2 to 4 of “To assign clip names on
this unit”.
It is now possible to write, transfer, and rename
clips and clip lists with user-defined names over
file access mode (FAM) connections (see page
174) and FTP connections (see page 178).
Fuji.MXF
User-defined clip names can be used by FAM
and FTP
Sakura.SMI
User-defined clip list names can be used by FAM
and FTP
To check clip names
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the
thumbnail screen, and select the clip whose name
you want to check.
The name of the selected clip appears in the upper
left of the screen.
See “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 85) for more
information.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
83
Chapter
5 Operations in GUI Screens
Overview
You can perform scene searches, play the
searched scenes, and select scenes (edit clip list)
in Graphical User Interface (GUI) screens. The
Switching between GUI screens
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
The most important GUI screens are:
Clip thumbnail screen: Displays thumbnails of
clips on the disc. “Clip” is displayed as the
title at the upper left of the screen (see page
85).
Clip list thumbnail screen: Displays thumbnails
of sub clips in a clip list. “Clip List” is
displayed as the title at the upper left of the
screen (see page 85).
There are also two playback screens:
Clip playback screen: Playback screen for
normal video
Clip list playback screen: Playback screen for
clip list video
You will use the THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE
MARK button 1 and the SUB CLIP/DISC
MENU button 2 to switch between these four
screens. Each press of these buttons switches
between the screens as shown in the following
figure. The THUMBNAIL and SUB CLIP
indicators light as follows, according to the type
of screen that is currently displayed.
Notes
• To switch between these four screens, a disc
with recorded clips must be loaded in the unit.
• The GUI screens can display Japanese and
European languages, but they cannot display
Chinese.
84
Overview
GUI screens are your gateways to discs and the
data saved on discs.
Clip playback screen a)
Clip thumbnail screen
Clip:C0006
1
1
TCR 00 : 23 : 00 . 26
JOG
STILL
001/036
006/040
TC 00:23:00:25
TC 00:23:40:07
TC 00:24:45:11
TC 00:25:06:14
TC 00:25:49:23
TC 00:26:22:10
TC 00:27:19:04
TC 00:27:51:09
TC 00:28:22:02
TC 00:23:34:18
TC 00:23:54:22
TC 00:28:06:09
DATE&TIME
30 NOV 2005 13:38
0:00:10:23
Lit
THUMBNAIL
Unlit
DUR
THUMBNAIL
1
1
ESSENCE
MARK
Unlit
ESSENCE
MARK
Unlit
SUB CLIP
SUB CLIP
2
2
DISC MENU
2
DISC MENU
2
2
Clip list playback screen a), b)
2
Clip list thumbnail screen b)
1
1
TCR 00 : 00 : 18 . 01
SHUTTLE STILL
F0008 : 003/005
Unlit
002/013
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:04:14
TC 00:00:12:04
TC 00:00:20:13
TC 00:00:28:08
TC 00:00:35:15
TC 00:00:46:08
TC 00:00:53:22
TC 00:00:59:16
TC 00:01:06:18
TC 00:01:13:11
DATE&TIME
28 JUL 2006 19:55
Lit
THUMBNAIL
TOTAL DUR
TC 00:01:17:27
00:01:31:16
THUMBNAIL
1
1
ESSENCE
MARK
Lit
ESSENCE
MARK
Lit
SUB CLIP
SUB CLIP
2
2
DISC MENU
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Clip List:E0001
DISC MENU
a) The playback screens appear when the LCD monitor is switched to display of video with (CHAR) or without
(MONI) superimposed text. Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch the LCD monitor to these modes (see
page 21).
b) The clip list playback screen appears when a clip list is loaded into the unit’s memory (see page 104).
The other thumbnail screens are:
• Expand thumbnail screen
• Chapter thumbnail screen
• Essence mark thumbnail screen
Information and controls in
thumbnail screens
Clip thumbnail screen
This screen displays thumbnails of clips on the
disc in the order that they were recorded. You can
Overview
85
use this screen to work with clips – deleting or
locking them, selecting their index pictures,
adding them to clip lists, and so on.
1 2
1
3 4
Clip:C0006
006/040
TC 00:23:00:25
TC 00:23:40:07
TC 00:24:45:11
TC 00:25:06:14
TC 00:25:49:23
TC 00:26:22:10
TC 00:27:19:04
TC 00:27:51:09
TC 00:28:22:02
TC 00:23:34:18
TC 00:23:54:22
e Clip date and time
Displays the date and time when the selected clip
was shot and recorded.
f Duration
Displays the duration (recording time) of the
selected clip.
1 Thumbnail display items
1
TC 00:28:06:09
DATE&TIME
30 NOV 2005 13:38
5
DUR
2
3
0:00:10:23
6
a Clip name
Displays the name of the selected clip. When the
clip has a title, it is displayed as “TITLE00001”
(see page 78). Clip names can be displayed in
European languages when the area of use (see
page 38) is set to “NTSC AREA” or “PAL
AREA”.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
86
Note
To display the clip title, Settings >Display Title in the
Disc Menu needs to be set to On.
b Selection frame
Indicates that the thumbnail is selected. To select
another thumbnail, move the frame (see page 92).
Multiple selection frames appear when multiple
thumbnails are selected (see page 91).
TC 00:26:22:10
4
5
a Index picture
Displays an image to stand for the content of the
clip. The index picture is normally the first frame
of the clip.
b Index picture changed mark
This mark, like the folded-over corner of a page
that you want to remember, appears when the
index picture has been changed to any frame other
than the first frame of a clip (see page 95).
Note
c Clip number/total number of clips
Displays the total number of clips on the disc, and
the number of the selected clip.
When you cue up a clip, the unit always cues up the first
frame, even when the index picture has been changed to
a different frame.
d Scrollbar
c S mark
When not all of the thumbnails can be displayed
in the thumbnail display area, the position of the
slider shows the relative position of the currently
displayed clips, and the length of the slider shows
the relative length of currently displayed clips
within all of the clips.
When you have a large number of thumbnails,
you can save time by using the Skip Scroll
function to jump directly to the thumbnail you
want (see page 92).
This mark appears when shot marks or multiple
Rec Start essence marks have been set in the clip
(see page 76).
The chapter thumbnail screen can be displayed
for clips that show this mark (see page 88).
Overview
d Clip and frame information
Displays the clip or frame information selected
with the Clip Information item in the Thumbnail
Menu (see page 94). The factory default selection
is the timecode of the first frame or the timecode
of the thumbnail frame.
e Lock icon
This icon appears when the clip is locked
(protected) (see page 96). Clips cannot be deleted
and their clip information cannot be changed
when this mark is displayed.
Clip list thumbnail screen
This screen displays thumbnails of the clips in the
current clip list. You can use this screen to create
and edit clips lists.
2
1
3 4
Clip List:E0001
002/013
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:04:14
TC 00:00:12:04
TC 00:00:20:13
TC 00:00:28:08
TC 00:00:35:15
TC 00:00:46:08
TC 00:00:53:22
TC 00:00:59:16
TC 00:01:06:18
TC 00:01:13:11
date and time of creation when the current clip list
has not been saved to the disc.
Note
“New File” appears when no clip list has been
loaded into the unit’s memory, and when a clip
list has been cleared from the unit’s memory.
f Total duration
Displays the total duration of all sub clips in the
clip list.
Expand thumbnail screen
This screen displays thumbnails of equally sized
divisions of the selected clip.
1
2
3 4
Expand Clip 008/024 x 12
DATE&TIME
28 JUL 2006 19:55
5
001/012
TC 00:01:17:27
TOTAL DUR
00:01:31:16
6
Displays the name of the clip list. When the clip
list has a title, it is displayed as “TITLE00001”
(see page 78). Clip list names can be displayed in
European languages when the area of use (see
page 38) is set to “NTSC AREA” or “PAL
AREA”.
Note
To display the clip list title, Settings >Display Title in the
Disc Menu needs to be set to On.
TC 00:01:38:00
TC 00:01:36:14
TC 00:01:36:27
TC 00:01:37:11
TC 00:01:37:24
TC 00:01:38:08
TC 00:01:38:22
TC 00:01:38:19
TC 00:01:40:02
TC 00:01:40:16
TC 00:01:39:06
CLIP
Tene
5
DUR
0:00:00:13
6
a Selection frame
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
85).
b Clip number/total clips x number of
divisions
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
85).
Displays the number of the selected clip, the total
number of clips on the disc, and the number of
times that the selected clip has been divided to
display the expansion thumbnails.
c Sub clip number/number of sub clips
c Thumbnail number/total thumbnails
Displays the total number of sub clips in the clip
list, and the number of the selected sub clip.
Displays the total number of expanded
thumbnails and the number of the selected
thumbnail.
b Selection frame
d Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
85).
e Clip list date and time
Displays the date and time when the clip list was
created, or the date and time of its most recent
modification. An asterisk (*) appears after the
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
a Clip list name
TC 00:01:35:17
d Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
85).
e Clip name
Displays the name of the expanded clip. When the
clip has a title, it is displayed as “TITLE00001”
Overview
87
(see page 78). Clip names can be displayed in
European languages when the area of use (see
page 38) is set to “NTSC AREA” or “PAL
AREA”.
Note
To display the clip title, Settings >Display Title in the
Disc Menu needs to be set to On.
The “S1”, “S2”, and “RS” marks on the
thumbnails indicate frames where Shot Mark1,
Shot Mark2, and Rec Start essence marks are set.
d Chapter number/total chapters
Displays the total number of chapters and the
number of the selected chapter.
Note
f Duration
Displays the time from the selected thumbnail to
the next one.
Chapter thumbnail screen
The sections between essence marks (shot marks
that have been set in clips, and Rec Start essence
marks) are called chapters. The sections between
shot mark and Rec Start essence marks in clips
are called chapters. This screen allows you to
display thumbnails of the chapters in the selected
clip.
Note
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Shot marks can be set during recording and playback.
They can be deleted and moved.
Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at the start
of recording. They cannot be deleted or moved.
1
2
3
4 5
Chapter of Clip 001/024
The total number of chapters is the total number of
chapters in the specified clip only.
e Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
85).
f Clip name
Displays the name of the clip that contains the
selected frame. When the clip has a title, it is
displayed as “TITLE00001” (see page 78). Clip
names can be displayed in European languages
when the area of use (see page 38) is set to
“NTSC AREA” or “PAL AREA”.
To display the clip title, Settings >Display Title in
the Disc Menu needs to be set to On.
g Duration
Displays the time from the first frame of the
selected chapter to the first frame of the next
chapter.
001/004
Essence mark thumbnail screen
TC 00:23:00:25
CLIP
TC 00:23:02:00
C0001
TC 00:23:04:00
DUR
6
This screen displays thumbnails of the specified
essence mark, found by searching all clips on the
disc.
0:00:01:05
1 2
3 4
7
Shot Mark1
a Selection frame
TC 00:23:02:00
TC 00:24:45:25
TC 00:25:07:01
TC 00:25:40:24
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
85).
TC 00:26:22:11
TC 00:27:19:25
TC 00:27:51:25
TC 00:28:06:17
TC 00:28:35:00
TC 00:28:55:02
TC 00:29:10:05
TC 00:29:20:03
b Clip number/total clips
Displays the total number of clips on the disc and
the number of the clip that contains the displayed
chapters.
c S1/S2/RS marks
88
001/029
Overview
30 NOV 2006 19:55
"Capping literally years of spe..."
5
6
a Essence mark name
Displays the name of the essence mark (Shot
Mark1 here).
b Selection frame
2 RESET/RETURN button
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
85).
1 MENU button
DISP SEL HOLD
c Essence mark number/total essence
marks
RESET
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND
CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL
MENU
0
10
0
10
CH-3
Displays the total number of essence marks and
the number of the selected essence mark.
ESSENCE
MARK
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
SHIFT
DISC MENU
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
PRESET
Note
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
REGEN
CLOCK
F
R
W
The total number of essence marks is the total number of
essence marks that have been set in all clips on the disc.
Thumbnail screen a)
d Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
85).
Clip:"Navigeting sibiling relati..."
018/036
TC 00:29:19:23
TC 00:29:38:25
TC 00:29:50:04
TC 00:30:25:11
TC 00:30:40:13
TC 01:01:28:25
TC 00:09:43:14
TC 00:24:24:29
TC 00:24:46:22
TC 00:25:42:08
TC 00:25:49:07
e Clip date and time
Displays the date and time when the clip that
contains the selected thumbnail was recorded or
last modified.
TC 00:24:34:27
DATE&TIME
f Clip name
12
SHIFT+SET
SHIFT+RESET
SHIFT+STOP
Thumbnail Menu b)
a) Clip thumbnail screen
b) Thumbnail Menu of the clip thumbnail screen
Shortcut operations
Shortcut button names are displayed next to the
menu items of commands that have shortcuts (see
page 107).
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
To display the Thumbnail Menu
To display the Thumbnail Menu, press the
MENU button with a thumbnail screen displayed.
To return to the original screen, press the MENU
button again, or press the RESET/RETURN
button.
0:23:22:26
Thumbnail Menu
Clip Information
Skip Scroll
Select Index Picture
Clip Properties
Add Sub Clips
Delete Clip
Lock/Unlock Clip
Thumbnail Search
Thumbnail View
Displaying menus
The Thumbnail Menu displays menu items that
are valid for the currently displayed thumbnail
screen.
DUR
1
Displays the name of the clip that contains the
selected frame. When the clip has a title, it is
displayed as “TITLE00001” (see page 78). Clip
names can be displayed in European languages
when the area of use (see page 38) is set to
“NTSC AREA” or “PAL AREA”.
To display the clip title, Settings >Display Title in
the Disc Menu needs to be set to On.
Thumbnail Menu
30 NOV 2005 14:14
Note
Shortcuts displayed within parentheses should be used
with all menus closed.
Thumbnail Menu submenus
• The Thumbnail Search Menu contains the basic
commands for thumbnail searches.
• The Thumbnail View Menu contains the basic
commands for moving to other menus.
Overview
89
Disc Menu
The Disc Menu allows you to do the following.
Item
Load Clip List
Save Clip List
Save Clip list As...
Delete Clip List
Clear Clip List
Lock or Delete All Clips
Disc Properties
Format Disc
Settings
Operation/Setting
Load clip list into this unit's memory.
Save a clip list under its current name, overwriting
the old contents.
Save a clip list under a new name.
Delete a clip list.
Clear the current clip list from the unit’s memory.
Sub-Item
Lock All Clips
Unlock All Clips
Delete All Clips
Sub-Item
SET Key on Thumbnail
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Sort Clip List By...
Display Title
To display the Disc Menu
To display the Disc Menu, press the SUB CLIP/
DISC MENU button with the SHIFT button held
down in one of the following screens.
• Clip thumbnail screen
• Clip list thumbnail screen
• Clip playback screen
• Clip list playback screen
Lock all clips.
Unlock all clips.
Delete all clips.
Display the properties of the currently loaded disc.
Format the currently loaded disc.
Selects the behavior of the unit when the SET/S.SEL
button or MENU knob is pressed with one thumbnail
selected.
Cue up & Still: Cue up the selected thumbnail.
Cue up & Play: Cue up and play the selected
thumbnail.
Selects a method to sort the clip list.
NAME (A-Z): Sort in ascending alphabetic order.
DATE (Newest First): Sort by date and time of
creation, newest clip first.
Selects whether to display clip and clip list titles.
On: Display the title, if it has been set. Otherwise
display the clip name or clip list name.
Off: Do not display the title. Always display the clip
name or clip list name.
3 RESET/RETURN button
DISP SEL HOLD
Note
The Disc Menu is not displayed when the disc is not
loaded into this unit.
90
Overview
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND
CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL
MENU
0
10
0
10
CH-3
ESSENCE
MARK
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
DISC MENU
To return to the original screen, press the RESET/
RETURN button.
RESET
SHIFT
REGEN
CLOCK
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
1 SHIFT button
2 SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button
Clip list thumbnail screen
Clip List:E0001
002/013
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:04:14
TC 00:00:12:04
TC 00:00:20:13
TC 00:00:28:08
TC 00:00:35:15
TC 00:00:46:08
TC 00:00:53:22
TC 00:00:59:16
TC 00:01:06:18
TC 00:01:13:11
DATE&TIME
28 JUL 2006 19:55
TC 00:01:17:27
TOTAL DUR
1+2
00:01:31:16
3
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the
PREV or NEXT button (to move to the first or
last item).
• Press the PREV button with the F REV button
held down, or press the NEXT button with the F
FWD button held down (to move to the first or
last item).
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the upor down-arrow button (to move to the previous
or next page).
• Press the F REV or F FWD button (to move to
the previous or next page).
Disc Menu
To select multiple thumbnails
Load Clip List
Save Clip List
Save Clip List As...
Delete Clip List
Clear Clip List
Lock or Delete All Clips
Disc Properties
Format Disc
Settings
Do one of the following.
• With the SHIFT button held down, turn the
MENU knob.
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the
left- or right-arrow button.
To return to the previous screen
GUI screen operations
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
For a menu item displayed together with T or
t, you can move to the next lower or higher
menu level by pressing the left- or right-arrow
button.
MENU knob
Left-/right-arrow buttons
DISP SEL HOLD
RESET
DISPLAY
To increment and decrement numbers
BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND
CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL
MENU
0
10
0
10
CH-3
ESSENCE
MARK
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
To confirm selections
AUDIO SELECT
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
SHIFT
DISC MENU
REGEN
CLOCK
Do one of the following.
• Press the up- or down-arrow button.
• Turn the MENU knob.
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
To move from a menu level to the next
lower or higher menu level
F
R
W
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Up-/down-arrow buttons
SET/S.SEL button
To select items
Do one of the following to select thumbnails,
menu items, timecode digits, and other items.
• Turn the MENU knob.
• Press the up-, down-, left-, or right-arrow
button.
• Press the PREV or NEXT button.
Overview
91
Thumbnail Operations
3
The current position moves by an amount
equal to 1/10 of the total number of
thumbnails.
4
You can use thumbnail screens to display clip
information and to find, protect, and delete clips.
The thumbnails provide visual confirmation of
these and other operations.
Turn the MENU knob, or press the leftor right-arrow button.
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob at the new position.
The thumbnail at the position indicated in the
small popup window appears in a thumbnail
screen like the following 1).
Expand
007/235
Selecting thumbnails
The thumbnail selection frame (see page 86)
indicates the currently selected thumbnail.
To move the thumbnail selection frame
Turn the MENU knob, or press the arrow buttons.
To skip quickly through thumbnails (Skip
Scroll function)
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
When you have a large number of thumbnails,
like in expand thumbnail screen, you can use the
Skip Scroll function to skip through them quickly.
See page 91 for more information about operations
in thumbnail screens.
1
2
In the screens like clip thumbnail screen
or expand thumbnail screen, display the
Thumbnail Menu.
Select Skip Scroll, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A small popup window appears on the
scrollbar to indicate the position of the
currently selected thumbnail within the set of
all thumbnails.
Expand
007/235
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
Skip Scroll
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
CLIP
"Seashore"
DUR
007/235
0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
CLIP
"Seashore"
DUR
0:00:00:01
1) Expand thumbnail screen
To select multiple thumbnails
Move the selection frame to the first thumbnail
that you want to select. Then, with the SHIFT
button held down, Turn the MENU knob, or press
the right-arrow button.
To cancel the multiple selection, move the
selection frame without the SHIFT button held
down.
Clip:"Navigeting sibiling relati..."
018/036
TC 00:29:19:23
TC 00:29:38:25
TC 00:29:50:04
TC 00:30:25:11
TC 00:30:40:13
TC 01:01:28:25
TC 00:09:43:14
TC 00:24:24:29
TC 00:24:46:22
TC 00:25:42:08
TC 00:25:49:07
TC 00:24:34:27
DATE&TIME
30 NOV 2005 14:14
DUR
0:23:22:26
Searching with thumbnails
By using the thumbnails that appear in the various
thumbnail screens, you can easily cue up and play
clips and sub clips.
Using thumbnails to find clips
The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails of
all clips recorded on the disc. You can use this
screen to cue up the selected clip and to carry out
playback (see page 94).
92
Thumbnail Operations
See “Selecting thumbnails” (page 92) for more
information.
Using the expand function to find scenes
The expand function allows you to divide a
selected clip into equally sized blocks, and to
display thumbnails of the first frame in each
block. This is a quick and efficient way to review
the selected clip and search for target scenes. You
can specify 12, 144, or 1728 divisions.
Using the chapter function to find scenes
Sections between shot marks and Rec Start are
called chapters.
Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at
the start of recording, but shot marks can be set at
any scene during recording or playback.
The chapter function allows you to display
thumbnails of the chapters in a clip.
See “Recording essence marks” (page 76) for more
information.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
The “S” mark appears on the thumbnails of
clips with chapters set.
Note
The maximum number of blocks may be smaller than
1728 when the recorded duration of the clip is short. In
this case, the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is
fixed at 1 frame. This allows you to view expanded
thumbnails at equal intervals.
2
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button.
The selected clip is divided into 12 blocks,
and a list appears in the expand thumbnail
screen (see page 87) with the first frame of
each block displayed as a thumbnail.
3
Select the thumbnail that you want to
expand further.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 up to 2 times, as
required.
Note
Thumbnails cannot be further expanded when they
already have the minimum duration (1 frame).
To return to the previous expansion level
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button with the
SHIFT button held down.
To display the expand thumbnail screen of the
previous or next clip
With the expand thumbnail screen still active,
press the PREV button or the NEXT button.
To delete the shot mark at a chapter position
You can delete the shot mark (Shot Mark1 or Shot
Mark2) at the chapter position in the chapter
thumbnail screen. (Rec Satrt essence marks
cannot be deleted.)
1
In the chapter thumbnail screen, select
the thumbnail for the frame whose shot
mark you want to delete.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Delete Shot Mark.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
2
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip that contains the
scene you want to find.
Press the HOLD/CHAPTER button.
The chapter thumbnail screen (see page 88)
appears, with thumbnails of the frames where
chapters are set.
The “S1”, “S2”, and “RS” marks on the
thumbnails indicate frames where Shot
Mark1, Shot Mark2, and Rec Start essence
marks are set.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of a clip with chapters set.
A message appears asking if you are sure that
you want to delete the shot mark.
Clip List:E0001
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:04:14
Delete
002/013
TC 00:00:12:04
Shot
Mark
Delete 002?
TC 00:00:28:08
TC 00:00:35:15
TC 00:00:46:08
TC 00:00:59:16
TC 00:01:06:18
TC 00:01:13:11
DATE&TIME
TC 00:00:20:13
OK
TC 00:00:53:22
Cancel
28 JUL 2006 19:55
TOTAL DUR
TC 00:01:17:27
00:01:31:16
Thumbnail Operations
93
4
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK
button with the SHIFT button held
down.
Select OK to delete the mark, or Cancel
to cancel the deletion, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Select Essence Mark screen appears.
The names of essence marks that are not
recorded on the disc are displayed in gray.
To adjust the position of shot marks at chapter
positions
You can use the chapter thumbnail screen to
adjust the position of shot marks (Shot Mark1 and
Shot Mark2) at chapter positions. (The positions
of Rec Start essence marks cannot be adjusted.)
1
In the chapter thumbnail screen, select
the thumbnail of the shot mark whose
position you want to adjust.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Move Shot Mark.
Select Essence Mark
Shot Mark1
Shot Mark2
Rec Start
Cut
Others
2
The Move Shot Mark screen is displayed.
Move Shot Mark : ShotMark2
Select the essence mark that you want,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
The essence mark thumbnail screen (see
page 88) displays a list of frames where the
selected essence mark is set.
0002/0002
Playing the scene you have found
TCR 00:28:23:14
OK
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Cancel
You can perform playback and searches in
this screen.
4
Use the PLAY/PAUSE button or F
REV/F FWD buttons to display the
frame you want.
You can also perform jog playback by
turning the MENU knob.
5
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To display the chapter thumbnail screen of the
previous or next clip with chapters
With the chapter thumbnail screen still active,
press the PREV button or the NEXT button.
The unit searches in the reverse or forward
direction for the next clip with chapters,
beginning with the previous or next clip.
94
After finding a clip with one of the methods
explained in the previous section, “Searching
with thumbnails” (page 92), you can cue up and
play the clip that you have found.
• Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob
to cue up the position of the selected thumbnail.
• The PLAY/PAUSE button starts playback from
the selected frame.
To play clips with the SET/S.SEL button
In the Disc Menu, set Settings >SET Key on
Thumbnail to “Cue up & Play”. Play begins from
the selected frame when you press the SET/S.SEL
button, in the same way as when you press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
Selecting the information
displayed on thumbnails
Using essence marks to find scenes
You can select the information to be displayed at
the bottom of the thumbnails in thumbnail
screens.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
1
In the clip playback screen or the clip
thumbnail screen, press the
Thumbnail Operations
Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip
thumbnail screen.
2
Select Clip Information.
018/036
Select Index:"Navigationg sibling relati..."
A window appears in which you can select
the information to display.
Thumbnail Menu
Clip Information
Return to Upper Menu
Date
Time Code
Duration
Sequence Number
Cancel
You can play and search with this screen.
4
3
Select the items that you want to
display.
Return to Upper Menu: Returns to the
Thumbnail Menu
Date: Date and time of creation, or date and
time of the more recent modification
Time Code: Timecode of first frame
Duration: Playback time
Sequence Number: Thumbnail sequence
number
Changing clip index pictures
The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails as
index pictures for clips. Normally the index
picture is the first frame in a clip, but you can set
any frame in the clip as the index picture.
You can also perform a jog operation by
turning the MENU knob.
5
After using the expand function (see page 93) or
chapter function (see page 93) to find a frame,
you can set that frame as the index picture of the
clip.
The following example explains how to do so
from the expand thumbnail screen.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the expand thumbnail screen, select
the thumbnail to set as the index
picture.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Set Index Picture.
A message appears asking you to confirm
that you want to set the current frame as the
index picture.
To select a clip index picture while
viewing the video
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Press the up-arrow button to select OK,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
To select index pictures by using the
expand and chapter functions
Note
You can only change index pictures from the clip
thumbnail screen. The thumbnails shown in the clip list
thumbnail screen, the expand thumbnail screen, and the
chapter thumbnail screen cannot be changed.
Use the PLAY/PAUSE button or F
REV/F FWD buttons to display the
frame you want.
Expand
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip whose index
picture you want to change.
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Select Index Picture.
Select Index screen appears.
TC 00:01:35:17
TC 00:01:38:00
TC 00:01:37:11
TC 00:01:37:24
TC 00:01:38:08
TC 00:01:38:22
TC 00:01:38:19
TC 00:01:40:02
TC 00:01:40:16
CLIP
4
001/012
Set Index Picture
TC 00:01:36:14
TC 00:01:39:06
2
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
The selected information will appear at the
bottom of the thumbnails when you display a
thumbnail screen.
OK
TCR 01:09:16:13
Tene
OK
Cancel
DUR
TC 00:01:36:27
0:00:00:13
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Thumbnail Operations
95
After pressing the RESET/RETURN button
to return to the clip thumbnail screen, check
to make sure that the newly selected frame is
displayed as the index picture.
Checking clip properties
You can check clip properties such as the title,
timecode, duration, date and time of creation, and
date and time of the more recent modification.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip
thumbnail screen.
2
Select Clip Properties.
The Clip Properties screen appears.
Clip Properties
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Clip No.
Name
Title
Title2
TC
DUR
Created
Modified
Rec Device
Locking (write-protecting) clips
In a clip thumbnail screen, you can lock the
selected clips so that they cannot be deleted or
altered.
Locking prevents the following operations on
clips.
• Deletion
• Renaming by FTP
• Changing the index picture
• Adding and deleting shot marks
Notes
• Locked clips are deleted along with other clips when a
disc is formatted.
• Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the write
inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled
position.
To lock clips
OK
001/035
TèlèvisionLCD
Capping Literally years of specu...
Rétroprpjecteurs BRAVIA
00:23:00:25
0:00:09:22
30 NOV 2005 13:35±00:00
20 MAY 2006 15:02±00:00
PDW-700(SN-10001)
Clip No.: Clip number/total number of clips
Name: Clip name 1)
Title: Title
Title2: Title 2 1)
TC: Timecode of first frame
DUR: Recording time
Created: Date and time of creation
Modified: Date and time of most recent
modification
Rec Device: Name of device that created clip
(product number)
1) Titles can be displayed in European languages
when the area of use (see page 38) is set to
“NTSC AREA” or “PAL AREA”.
To display the properties of the previous
or the next clip
Press the PREV button or the NEXT button.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnails of the clips that you want to
lock.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Lock/Unlock Clip.
4
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A lock icon (see page 87) appears on the
thumbnail of the locked clips.
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut
operation by pressing the STOP button with the
SHIFT button held down.
To lock all clips
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Lock or Delete All Clips”, and
then select “Lock All Clips”.
To return to the clip thumbnail screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm
locking all clips.
3
96
Thumbnail Operations
Select OK to lock all clips or Cancel to
cancel it, and then press the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob.
To unlock a specific clip
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip that you want to
unlock.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Lock/Unlock Clip.
A message appears asking you to confirm the
unlocking.
Clip List:E0001
TC 00:00:00:00
4
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip that you want to
delete.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Delete Clip.
TC 00:00:04:14
00:00:12:04
UnlockTCClip
TC 00:00:20:13
OK
TC 00:00:28:08
TC 00:00:35:15
TC 00:00:46:08
TC 00:00:53:22
Cancel
TC 00:00:59:16
TC 00:01:06:18
TC 00:01:13:11
28 JUL 2006 19:55
TOTAL DUR
TC 00:01:17:27
00:01:31:16
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut
operation by pressing the STOP button with the
SHIFT button held down.
To unlock all clips
Delete Clip & Clip List
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Lock or Delete All Clips”, and
then select “Unlock All Clips”.
INDEX
TC 00:25:29:09
Name
Title
Date
Dur
A message appears asking you to confirm
that you want to unlock all clips.
3
Select OK to execute the unlock, or
Cancel to cancel it, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
4
022/036
MIDDLE1
MIDDLE2
END
TC 00:25:30:00
TC 00:25:30:22
TC 00:25:31:13
C0023
SCENE-00126
2005 DEC 01 14:55
0:00:02:05
On Clip List
OK
Cancel
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
A window appears asking you to confirm the
deletion. The window displays thumbnails of
four frames from the target clip (the first
frame, two intermediate frames, and the last
frame), along with the name, title, date of
creation, and duration of the clip.
One of the following messages also appears,
depending on whether the clip is referenced
in a clip list.
When the clip is not referenced in a clip
list: “Delete Clip”
When the clip is referenced in a clip list:
“Delete Clip & Clip List” (All clip lists
that reference the target clip are deleted
along with the clip.)
002/013
C0004
Unlock this Clip?
DATE&TIME
• If a deletion target clips is referenced by clip lists on
the disc, all of those clip lists are deleted as well.
• If a deletion target clip is referenced in the current clip
list, only those referencing sub clips are deleted at the
same time as the deletion target clip.
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The selected clip is deleted, and you return to
the clip thumbnail screen.
Deleting clips
You can delete clips while checking their
contents.
Notes
• Clips cannot be deleted when the write inhibit tab of
the disc is set to the recording disabled position.
• Locked clips cannot be deleted.
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut
operation by pressing the RESET/RETURN
button with the SHIFT button held down.
To delete all clips
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Lock or Delete All Clips”, and
then select “Delete All Clips”.
Thumbnail Operations
97
A message appears asking you to confirm
that you want to delete all clips.
3
Select OK to execute the deletion, or
Cancel to cancel it, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Scene Selection (Clip
List Editing)
Note
Locked clips cannot be deleted.
What is scene selection?
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Scene selection is a function which allows you to
select material (clips) from the material recorded
on a disc and perform cut editing. You can do this
by operating on this unit only.
• Scene selection is a convenient way to perform
cut editing in the field and in other offline
situations.
• In scene selection you create a clip list (editing
data). Since the material itself is not affected,
you can repeat this any number of times.
• You can play back the edit list created by scene
selection on this unit.
• In scene selection you can add whole clips or
add parts of a clip. You can add scenes using
chapters, change the playback sequence, and
amend or delete In and Out points. All of these
operations can be carried out easily on this unit.
• Clip lists (editing data) created with the scene
selection function can be used on XPRI and
other full-feature nonlinear editing systems.
Clips
Material recorded with this unit is managed in
units called clips. A clip contains the material
from a recording start point to a recording end
point.
Clips have numbers beginning with C, for
example C0001.
Recording
start point
of clip 2
Clip 1
(C0001)
Clip 2
(C0002)
Recording
end point
of clip 2
Clip 3
(C0003)
Clip 4
(C0004)
You can also assign titles to your clips and use the
titles to manage them, instead of the clip numbers.
For more information, see “Assigning user-defined
clip titles automatically” (page 78).
98
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
Clip lists
Unit memory
You can use the scene selection function to select
clips from the clips saved on a disc and create a
cut edit list called a “clip list”.
Clip lists have numbers beginning with E, for
example E0001. Up to 99 clip lists can be saved
on a disc.
Current clip list can be edited
t Clip list
playback and
thumbnail
display
(adding, deleting, and
reordering sub clips)
SAVE m MLOAD
Disc
Sub clips (clips in clip lists)
Clips (or parts of clips) that have been added to a
clip list are called “sub clips”. Sub clips are
virtual editing data that specify ranges in the
original clips. You can use them without
modifying the original data.
The following figure illustrates the relation
between clips and sub clips.
Clips on disc
Clip 1
(C0001)
Clip 3
(C0003)
Clip 4
(C0004)
Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3
In the above example, the whole of clip 2 has been
added as sub clip 1, and the whole of clip 4 has
been added as sub clip 2.
Sub clip 3 is part of clip 3. Therefore, when clip
list E0001 is played back, clip 4 is played after
clip 2, and then the part of clip 3 shown in gray
color is played.
E0001 (Clip list 1)
E0002 (Clip list 2)
E0003 (Clip list 3)
:
:
E0099 (Clip list 99)
Clip list playback
Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc.
To play a clip list, insert a disc into the unit, load
the clip list that you want to play, and press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
Clips are played according to the data in the clip
list.
Creating and editing clip lists
The following table lists the steps in the creation
and editing of clip lists with the scene selection
function. To create a clip list, you always need to
carry out the steps inside the heavy lines. Other
steps can be carried out as required.
Clip list editing (current clip list)
To edit a clip list, you need to load the clip list
from the disc into the unit's internal memory.
The clip list which is currently loaded into the
unit memory is called the “current clip list.”
The current clip list is always the target of sub clip
creation and editing. Clip list playback also uses
the current clip list.
After creating and editing a clip list, you need to
save it to disc.
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Clip list
(E0001)
Clip 2
(C0002)
C0001 (Clip 1)
C0002 (Clip 2)
C0003 (Clip 3)
:
:
99
1
Add sub clips: Use the Add Sub Clips
command to add the clips you want to
use to a clip list. You can add up to
300 sub clips to one clip list.This
operation can be carried out in the
following thumbnail screens.
•
•
•
•
2
3
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
4
Clip thumbnail screen
Expand thumbnail screen
Chapter thumbnail screen
Clip list thumbnail screen
Change the sub clip order: Use the
Move Sub Clips command to change
the order of sub clips in a clip list.
Delete sub clips: Use the Delete Sub
Clips command to delete specified
sub clips from a clip list.
Trim sub clips: Use the Trim Sub Clip
command to adjust the In and Out
points of a sub clip. This function can
also be used to adjust the overall
duration of the clip list.
Set the start timecode: Use the Set
Start Time Code command to set the
timecode at the start of a clip list.
Play the clip list: Use the PLAY/
PAUSE button and other playback
controls to play the current clip list
and check its contents.
Save the clip list: Use the Save Clip List
or Save Clip List As… command to
save the newly created clip list to the
disc.
Adding sub clips from the clip thumbnail screen
The following procedure explains operations in
the clip thumbnail screen. You can proceed in the
same way in the expand thumbnail screen and the
chapter thumbnail screen. Expanded blocks are
added as sub clips in the expand thumbnail
screen, and chapters are added as sub clips in the
chapter thumbnail screen.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
clip that you want to add as a sub clip
(multiple selections possible).
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Add Sub Clips, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Add Sub Clip screen appears.
The clip(s) selected in step 1 appear in the
upper part of this screen, and the clip list
appears in the lower Scene Selection
window. The I cursor in the Scene Selection
window indicates the location where the
currently selected sub clip(s) will be inserted.
Add Sub Clip
TC 01:01:28:25
TC 00:09:43:14
TC 00:24:24:29
TC 00:24:34:27
TC 00:24:46:22
TC 00:24:56:24
Clip lists can be created and edited even when the write
inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording disabled.
However, if you need to save the clip list, set write inhibit
tab to enable recording before you create or edit the clip
list.
To add sub clips
You can add sub clips to clip lists from with the
clip thumbnail screen or the clip list thumbnail
screen. However, you must use the clip list
thumbnail screen to edit clip lists.
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
TOTAL
00:13:48:24
4
In the Scene Selection window, move
the I cursor to the location where you
want to insert the clip. (The existing
thumbnails arrange themselves to the
left and right of the I cursor.)
5
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
Note
100
TC 00:30:40:13
To display the total duration after
addition of the selected clip
Press the SHIFT button.
You can also delete clip lists on the disc.
For details, see “Managing clip lists” (page 104).
017/035
TC 00:30:25:11
Scene Selection
To reedit clip lists on the disc
Use the Load Clip List command to load the clip
lists you want to edit, and perform the steps 2 to
4 in the previous section.
002
The selected clip is inserted as a subclip and
a “+” mark appears on the thumbnail in the
Scene Selection window.
To check the addition results
Move the cursor.
6
where the currently selected sub clips will be
inserted.
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen.
7
8
To display the total duration after
addition of the selected clips
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add
more clips.
Save the clip list (see page 103).
In step 1, you can hold down the SHIFT button
when you press the SET/S.SEL button. This is a
shortcut that displays the Add Sub Clip screen
immediately. You can also save the clip list
immediately in step 5 by executing the Save Clip
List command in the Disc Menu.
Press the SHIFT button.
5
In the Scene Selection window, move
the I cursor to the location where you
want to insert the clip. (The existing
thumbnails arrange themselves to the
left and right of the I cursor.)
6
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
Adding sub clips from the clip list thumbnail
screen
The sub clips are added at the I cursor
position, and you return to the clip list
thumbnail screen.
You can check the results of the addition in
that screen.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
2
Select Add Sub Clips, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Clip List (Add) screen appears.
002
017/035
TC 00:30:25:11
TC 00:30:40:13
TC 01:01:28:25
TC 00:09:43:14
TC 00:24:24:29
TC 00:24:34:27
TC 00:24:46:22
TC 00:24:56:24
Scene Selection
TOTAL
00:13:48:24
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add
more clips.
8
Save the clip list (see page 103).
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut
operation by pressing the SET/S.SEL button with
the SHIFT button held down.
To reorder sub clips
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
3
Select the sub clips that you want to add
from the upper part of the screen (the
part where 8 thumbnails are displayed,
multiple selections possible).
To select from expanded thumbnails
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to
display the expand thumbnail screen.
To select from chapter thumbnails
Press the HOLD/CHAPTER button to
display the chapter thumbnail screen.
4
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The thumbnail selection is confirmed, and an
I cursor appears at the bottom of the Clip List
(Add) screen (in the Scene Selection
window). The I cursor indicates the location
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, select
the thumbnails of the sub clips that you
want to move (multiple selections
possible).
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Move Sub Clips, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Clip List (Add)
7
The Clip List (Move) screen appears.
006
Clip List (Move)
001/034
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:21:27
TC 00:04:06:00
TC 00:04:13:14
TC 00:04:35:12
TC 00:04:57:10
TC 00:05:19:08
TC 00:05:41:05
TC 00:06:03:03
TC 00:06:25:00
TC 00:06:46:27
DATE&TIME
08 AUG 2007 11:50
TOTAL DUR
TC 00:07:08:25
00:13:48:24
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
101
4
Move the I cursor to the point where
you want to move the selected
thumbnails.
5
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
5
The timecode of the new Out point appears in
the timecode display, and the Total (total
duration) and DUR (clip duration) displays
are updated.
The sub clips are moved to the I cursor
position.
6
Repeat steps 1 to 5 as required.
7
Save the clip list (see page 103).
To cue up the In point or Out point
Display the Thumbnail Menu, select Cue up
Inpoint or Cue up Outpoint, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To adjust the In and Out points of sub
clips (trim)
To cancel the In point or Out point setting
Display the Thumbnail Menu, select Reset
Inpoint or Reset Outpoint, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The In point or Out point setting returns to
the previous value.
Proceed as follows to define the range of a scene
by changing the positions of the In and Out
points.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
6
In the clip list thumbnail screen, select a
thumbnail.
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
7
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
8
Save the clip list (see page 103).
3
Select Trim Sub Clip, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To delete sub clips
1
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
The Clip List (Trim) screen appears.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
001/034
Clip List (Trim)
Total
DUR
00:13:48:24
00:00:21:27
1
Select the clips to delete in the clip list
thumbnail screen (multiple selections
possible).
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Delete Sub Clips, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
IN
01:17:33:08
OUT
01:17:55:05
TCR 01:17:33:08
CLIP
019/035
OK
Cancel
Like the clip playback screen, this screen
allows you to play and search all clips on the
disc.
To display a list of In and Out point
operations that you can perform
Press the MENU button.
4
When you find the point that you want
to make the start point, select “IN” and
then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The timecode of the new In point appears in
the timecode display, and the Total (total
duration) and DUR (clip duration) displays
are updated.
102
When you find the point that you want
to make the end point, select “OUT”
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
A message appears asking you to confirm the
deletion.
4
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
5
Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required.
6
Save the clip list (see page 103).
6
To play the clip list
Use the clip list thumbnail screen to play the clip
list (see page 94).
To change the starting timecode of clip
lists
The timecode of clip lists is continuous timecode,
unrelated to the timecode of the original clips. By
default the timecode (LTC) of the start of the clip
list is 00:00:00:00, but it can be set to any value.
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
OK is selected.
7
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob again.
8
Save the clip list (see page 103).
To save clip lists
To save under a specified name
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Thumbnail Menu.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu.
2
Select Set Start Time Code, and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
2
Select Save Clip List As..., and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The Set Start Time Code screen appears.
A list of clip lists appears.
Disc Menu
Set Start Time Code
22 : 34 . 56 : 17
H
MIN
Preset TC 00:00:00:00
SEC
FRM
OK
Cancel
Display Select
3
Press the left- or right-arrow button to
select the digit that you want to change.
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the
value of the digit.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required.
To switch the information displayed for
clip lists
Press the right-arrow button.
With each press, the display changes in the
order: “Name & Date” t “Name & Title”
t “Name & Short Date” t...
To sort clip lists
Select one of the following orders by
selecting Settings > Sort Clip List By... in the
Disc Menu.
NAME(A-Z): Sort in ascending order by
clip list name.
DATE(Newest First): Sort by date and time
of clip list creation, newest first.
To reset the timecode to 00:00:00:00
Select Reset to Zero in the Thumbnail Menu,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
To preset the frequently used timecode
Select Save Preset TC in the Thumbnail
Menu, and then press the SET/S.SEL button
or the MENU knob.
The timecode set in steps 3 and 4 is saved as
a preset value.
To recall the preset timecode
Select Recall Preset TC in the Thumbnail
Menu, and then press the SET/S.SEL button
or the MENU knob.
3
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
TC
Save Clip List
Name & Date/Sorted by Name
DVD og BI... 08 AUG2007 11:50
E0003
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0004
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0005
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0006
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0007
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0095
18 MAY2006 10:25
E0098
13 JUN2006 13:43
Select the desired clip list name, and
then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
To save under the same name
The following procedure saves the current clip
list under its current name (the name that appears
in the clip list thumbnail screen).
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
103
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
To create a new clip list
Select New File and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu (see page 90).
To clear clip lists
2
Select Save Clip List, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The following procedure clears the current clip
list from the unit’s internal memory.
The clip list is saved. However, Save Clip
List As... is executed when the name
displayed in the clip list thumbnail screen is
“no name”.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu.
2
Select Clear Clip List, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
Note
If you press the EJECT button before saving a new or
edited clip list, a message appears asking if you want to
discard your changes and continue. Follow the
instructions in the message to continue or cancel the
operation.
A message appears asking you to confirm
that you want to clear the clip list.
3
Managing clip lists
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The current clip list returns to the unnamed
state “(no name)”.
To load clip lists
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
The following procedure loads a clip list stored on
the disc into the unit's internal memory as the
current clip list.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu.
2
Select Load Clip List, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A list of clip lists stored on the disc appears.
To delete clip lists
The following procedure deletes a clip list from
the disc.
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu.
2
Select Delete Clip List, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
Disc Menu
A list of clip lists appears.
Load Clip List
Name & Date/Sorted by Name
DVD og BI... 08 AUG2007 11:50
E0003
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0004
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0005
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0006
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0007
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0095
18 MAY2006 10:25
E0098
13 JUN2006 13:43
Delete Clip List
E0001
Delete this Clip List?
Display Select
OK
Cancel
3
Select the desired clip list, and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The name of the clip list selected here
appears in the clip list thumbnail screen.
When you execute the Save Clip List
command in the Disc Menu, the clip list will
be saved under that name.
104
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
3
Select the clip list that you want to
delete, and then press the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm the
deletion.
4
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Disc Operations
To sort clip lists
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu.
2
Select Settings, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
3
Select Sort Clip List, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
4
Checking disc properties
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Disc Properties, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
Select one of the following sort methods,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
The Disc Properties screen appears.
Disc Properties
User Disc ID
Title
Title2
Total DUR
Remain
Rewrite
OK
12345
(none)
(none)
01:23:45:00
031min
1234times
User Disc ID: User disc ID 1), 2)
Title: Title 1)
Title2: Title2 1), 2)
Total DUR: Total recording time
Remain: Remaining recording time
Rewrite: Number of times rewritten
1) This can be specified with the supplied PDZ-1
Proxy Browsing Software contained on the CDROM (XDCAM Application Software).
2) Titles can be displayed in European languages
when the area of use (see page 38) is set to
“NTSC AREA” or “PAL AREA”.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
NAME(A-Z): Sort in ascending order by
clip list name.
DATE(Newest First): Sort by date and time
of clip list creation, newest first.
Clip lists will be displayed in the specified
order the next time that you carry out an
operation such as loading a clip list.
To return to the previous screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
Formatting discs
See page 91 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
Disc Operations
105
2
Select Format Disc, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm the
format.
Format Disc
All Clips, Clip Lists and
Non-AV Data (General Files)
will be Deleted.
Format OK?
OK
Cancel
3
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To cancel the format
Select Cancel, and then press the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob.
To continue by formatting another disc
Exchange the disc, select OK, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
106
To exit the formatting screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob with Exit selected.
Disc Operations
Shortcut List
You can access many functions from the
keyboard, without displaying a menu (shortcut
operations).
Shortcuts are available for the following
functions. The plus sign (+) indicates that one
button is held down while another is pressed, for
example “SHIFT + RESET/RETURN.”
Note
The same shortcut may access different functions,
depending on the screen that is active when it is
executed.
Function
Clip List Thumbnail (display clip list thumbnail screen)
Expand Thumbnail (display expand thumbnail screen)
Chapter Thumbnail (display chapter thumbnail screen)
Essence Mark Thumbnail (display essence mark thumbnail
screen)
Add Sub Clip (add sub clip)
Delete Clip (delete clip)
Lock/Unlock Clip (lock or unlock clip)
Set Inpoint (set In point)
Set Outpoint (set Out point)
Cue up Inpoint (cue up In point)
Cue up Outpoint (cue up Out point)
Reset Inpoint (reset In point)
Reset Outpoint (reset Out point)
Cue up (cue up)
Operation
SUB CLIP/DISC MENU
DISP SEL/EXPAND
HOLD/CHAPTER
SHIFT + THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK
Cue up & Play (cue up and play)
PLAY/PAUSE b)
SHIFT + down-arrow or F FWD
SHIFT + up-arrow or F REV
SHIFT + NEXT
SHIFT + PREV
SHIFT + right-arrow or SHIFT + left-arrow
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Shortcut List
107
Page Down (switch to next page)
Page Up (switch to previous page)
Go To End (go to the last item)
Go To Top (go to the first item)
Select Multi Clip (select multiple clips)
Exit (exit the current thumbnail screen)
SHIFT + SET/S.SEL
SHIFT + RESET/RETURN
SHIFT + STOP
Left-arrow + SET/S.SEL
Right-arrow + SET/S.SEL
Left-arrow + PREV or left-arrow + NEXT
Right-arrow + PREV or right-arrow + NEXT
Left-arrow + RESET/RETURN
Right-arrow + RESET/RETURN
SET/S.SEL a)
a) If Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu
is set to “Cue up & Play”, then play starts as soon as
cueup is ready.
b) If Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu
is set to “Cue up & Play”, then pressing the SET/
S.SEL button has the same effect.
Chapter
6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu Organization
[B] OPERATION menu
OPERATION
The following chart shows the organization of
menus in this camcorder.
TOP MENU
USER [A]
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION [B]
PAINT [C]
MAINTENANCE [D]
FILE [E]
DIAGNOSIS [F]
[A] USER menu
USER
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
108
Menu Organization
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
SUPERIMPOSE
LCD
REC FUNCTION
ASSIGNABLE SW
VF DISP 1
VF DISP 2
' ! ' LED
MARKER 1
GAIN SW
VF SETTING
AUTO IRIS
SHOT ID
SHOT DISP
SET STATUS
LENS FILE
USER FILE
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
SUPERIMPOSE
LCD
REC FUNCTION
ASSIGNABLE SW
POWER SAVE
VF DISP 1
VF DISP 2
VF DISP 3
' ! ' LED
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
GAIN SW
VF SETTING
AUTO IRIS
SHOT ID
SHOT DISP
SET STATUS
WHITE SETTING
OFFSET WHT
SHT ENABLE
LENS FILE
FORMAT
SOURCE SEL
UMID SET
CLIP TITLE
FILE NAMING
[C] PAINT menu
PAINT
SW STATUS
WHITE
BLACK/FLARE
GAMMA
BLACK GAMMA
KNEE
DETAIL 1
DETAIL 2
SD DETAIL
SKIN DETAIL
MTX LINEAR
MTX MULTI
V MODULATION
SATURATION
NOISE SUPPRESS
SCENE FILE
[D] MAINTENANCE menu
MAINTENANCE
<TOP MENU>
WHITE SHADING
BLACK SHADING
LEVEL ADJUST
BATTERY 1
BATTERY 2
AUDIO-1
AUDIO-2
AUDIO-3
WRR SETTING
TIMECODE
ESSENCE MARK
CAM CONFIG 1
CAM CONFIG 2
PRESET WHITE
WHITE FILTER
DCC ADJUST
AUTO IRIS 2
GENLOCK
ND COMP
AUTO SHADING
APR
NETWORK
[E] FILE menu
FILE
[F] DIAGNOSIS menu
DIAGNOSIS
HOURS METER
TIME/DATE
ROM VERSION 1
ROM VERSION 2
ROM VERSION 3
DEV STATUS
TOP menu and top-level menus
The TOP menu appears when, with no menu
displayed, you hold down the MENU knob and
set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. The TOP
menu contains only top-level menus.
When you select a top-level menu, the most
recently shown page of that menu appears. The
CONTENTS page appears when the menu is
selected for the first time.
For details about how to use menus, see page 140.
USER menu
This menu allows you to add any desired page
from the OPERATION, PAINT,
MAINTENANCE, FILE, and DIAGNOSIS
menus to suit your needs. By gathering frequently
used pages on the USER menu beforehand, you
can call up them quickly whenever you need
them.
This menu is normally displayed when the
MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON.
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu
This menu allows you to add pages to or delete
pages from the USER menu to suit your needs.
ALL menu
This menu allows you to handle all items in the
OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE,
and DIAGNOSIS menus as if they were in one
menu.
OPERATION menu
This menu contains items for changing settings
according to conditions related to the subject
when the camcorder is being operated.
PAINT menu
This menu contains items for making detailed
image adjustments while using a waveform
monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the
camera. Support of a video engineer is usually
required to use this menu. Although you can also
use an external remote control unit to set the items
on this menu, this menu is effective when using
the camcorder by itself outdoors.
Menu Organization
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
USER FILE
USER FILE 2
ALL FILE
SCENE FILE
REFERENCE
LENS FILE 1
LENS FILE 2
LENS FILE 3
MEMORY STICK
USER
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
109
This menu contains items for making settings for
audio, timecode, essence marks, and battery.
as flare, white shading, and auto iris gain. You
can save up to 32 lens files in the internal memory
of the unit and up to 100 lens files in a “Memory
Stick”.
FILE menu
DIAGNOSIS menu
This menu is for saving the adjusted data in the
camcorder memory or in a “Memory Stick”. The
following files can be saved.
This menu shows the digital hours meter, the
ROM version, and information about the internal
device status of the camcorder.
MAINTENANCE menu
User files
User files save the setting items and setting data
of customized USER menus. You can save up to
100 user files in a “Memory Stick”. Once you
save a user file in a “Memory Stick”, you can
easily set the USER menu to your preference by
loading the file.
For details on user files, see “Saving and Recalling
User Files” on page 162.
ALL files
ALL files save the setting data of all of the menus.
You can save up to 100 ALL files in a “Memory
Stick”.
Once a camcorder is set up according to your
preferences and you save an ALL file in a
“Memory Stick”, you can easily set other
camcorders to those settings by loading the data
from the “Memory Stick”.
Note
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Device specific data (output levels and shading that
requires adjustment for the specific device) is not saved.
Scene files
In the scene file, the setting values of PAINT
menu items set to shoot a particular scene are
saved. You can save up to five scene files in the
camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files in a
“Memory Stick”. For example, first adjust the
settings to shoot a rehearsal of a particular scene
and then save them as a scene file. Then load that
file before the actual shooting so that you can
quickly recreate setup conditions of the rehearsal.
Reference files
Reference files save the reference values that are
set when STANDARD is executed in the SCENE
FILE page of the PAINT menu. You can save one
reference file in the internal memory of the unit
and one in a “Memory Stick”.
Lens files
Lens files save the setting data used to
compensate for the characteristics of lenses, such
110
Menu Organization
Menu List
Tips
•
•
•
•
The bold-faced numbers designate the pages that have been registered in the USER menu at the factory.
The bold-faced settings are the factory default settings.
The initial value of items with a setting range of –99 to 99 is 0.
When the setup value in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses ( ), the value is a relative
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual.
OPERATION menu
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
01
SDI OUT 1 SELECT
OFF/HDSDI/SDSDI
Selects the output signal from the
SDI OUT 1 connector.
SDI OUT 2 SELECT
OFF/HDSDI/SDSDI
Selects the output signal from the
SDI OUT 2 connector.
SDI OUT 2 SUPER
OFF/ON
Sets the superimposed
information output from the SDI
OUT 2 connector.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the output signal from the
TEST OUT connector.
OUTPUT 1
Note
TEST OUT SUPER
OFF/ON
Sets the superimposed
information output from the
TEST OUT connector.
Notes
• Regardless of this setting, text
data is output from this connector
when the setting of TEST OUT
SELECT is Y, R, G, or B. During
the display of text data, you can
hide the text data by switching
this item from ON to OFF. (It is
also hidden in the viewfinder.)
• When TEST OUT SELECT is set
to LCD, the mode selected with
the DISP SEL/EXPAND button
determines whether text is
displayed or hidden.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
When R, G, or B is selected, turning
the power of the unit off and on
changes the setting to Y.
111
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
02
LIVE & PLAY
OFF/ON
For details, see “Viewing camera
video during playback (Live &
Play function)” on page 74.
DOWN CON MODE
CROP/SQEZE
Sets the conversion mode for
down-converted output.
WIDE ID
THROU/AUTO
Specifies whether to add wide
picture information to the SD
output signal.
THROU: Output the video
signals without adding wide
picture information.
AUTO: When the DOWN CON
MODE item is set to
SQEZE, add wide picture
information to the output
video signals.
OFF/ON
When the SDI OUT 2 SUPER
item or the TEST OUT SUPER
item on the OUTPUT 1 page is
set to ON, turn the output of text
(superimposed) information from
the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT
connector on or off for each item.
03
04
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
05
SUPER IMPOSE SUPER(VFDISP)
LCD
SUPER(MENU)
OFF/ON
SUPER(TC)
OFF/ON
SUPER(MARKER)
OFF/ON
When the TEST OUT SUPER
item on the OUTPUT 1 page is
set to ON, turns the marker
display output from the TEST
OUT connector on or off.
LCD COLOR
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the LCD color.
LCD
MARKER&ZEBRA
OFF/ON
Turns the marker and zebra
display in the LCD monitor on or
off.
REC FUNCTION CACHE REC
CACHE REC TIME
06
ASSIGNABLE
SW
OFF/ON
For details, see “Starting a shoot
0-2S/2-4S/4-6S/6-8S/8- with a few seconds of pre-stored
picture data (Picture Cache
10S/18-20S/28-30S
function)” on page 77.
ASSIGN SW <1>
For details, see “Assigning
functions to ASSIGN switches” on
page 155.
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
ASSIGN SW <RET>
COLOR TEMP SW
07
112
OUTPUT 2
POWER SAVE
Menu List
ZOOM SPEED
0 to 20 to 99
RETURN VIDEO
OFF/ON
ETHERNET/USB
DSABL/ENABL
i.LINK(FAM)
DSABL/ENABL
REC AUDIO OUT
EE/SAVE
For details, see “Setting power
saving functions” on page 157.
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
08
VF DISP
OFF/ON
VF DISP MODE
1/2/3
For details, see “Selecting the
display items” on page 148.
09
10
11
VF DISP 1
VF DISP 2
VF DISP 3
‘!’ LED
DISP EXTENDER
OFF/ON
DISP FILTER
OFF/ON
DISP WHITE
OFF/ON
DISP GAIN
OFF/ON
DISP SHUTTER
OFF/ON
DISP AUDIO
OFF/ON
DISP DISC
OFF/ON
DISP IRIS
OFF/ON
DISP ZOOM
OFF/ON
DISP COLOR TEMP
OFF/ON
DISP BATT REMAIN
INT/VOLT/AUTO
DISP DC IN
OFF/ON
DISP WRR RF LVL
OFF/ON
DISP REC FORMAT
OFF/ON
DISP CLIP NO(PB)
OFF/ON
DISP TIMECODE
OFF/ON
LOW LIGHT
OFF/ON
LOW LIGHT LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
VF BATT WARNING
10%/20%
GAIN <!>
OFF/ON
SHUTTER <!>
OFF/ON
WHT PRESET <!>
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
EXTENDER <!>
OFF/ON
FILTER <!>
OFF/ON
OVERRIDE <!>
OFF/ON
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
ATW RUN <!>
For details, see “Indicators” on
page 30.
Menu List
113
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
12
MARKER
OFF/ON
CENTER
OFF/ON
For details, see “Setting the
marker display” on page 149.
13
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
CENTER MARK
1/2/3/4
SAFTY ZONE
OFF/ON
SAFTY AREA
80%/90%/92.5%/95%
ASPECT
OFF/ON
ASPECT SELECT
15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/1.85/
2.35
ASPECT MASK
OFF/ON
ASPECT MASK LVL
0 to 12 to 15
100% MARKER
OFF/ON
USER BOX
OFF/ON
USER BOX WIDTH
3 to 240 to 479
USER BOX HEIGHT
3 to 135 to 269
USER BOX H POS
–477 to 0 to 476
USER BOX V POS
–267 to 0 to 266
CENTER H POS
–480 to 0 to 479
CENTER V POS
–270 to 0 to 269
ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF/ON
ASPECT SAFE AREA 80%/90%/92.5%/95%
14
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
114
15
GAIN SW
VF SETTING
Menu List
GAIN LOW
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
For details, see “Setting gain
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
values for the GAIN selector
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB positions” on page 154.
GAIN MID
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
GAIN HIGH
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
GAIN TURBO
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
TURBO SW IND
OFF/ON
SHOCKLESS GAIN
OFF/ON
ZEBRA
OFF/ON
ZEBRA SELECT
1/2/BOTH
ZEBRA1 DET LVL
20% to 70% to 107%
ZEBRA1 APT LVL
1% to 10% to 20%
ZEBRA2 DET LVL
52% to 100% to 109%
VF DETAIL LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
For details, see “Setting the
viewfinder” on page 150.
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
16
IRIS OVERRIDE
OFF/ON
IRIS SPEED
(–99 to 99)
CLIP HIGH LIGHT
OFF/ON
For details, see “Changing the
Reference Value for Automatic
Iris Adjustment” on page 59.
IRIS WINDOW
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR
17
18
AUTO IRIS
SHOT ID
SHOT DISP
IRIS WINDOW IND
OFF/ON
IRIS VAR WIDTH
20 to 240 to 479
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
20 to 135 to 269
IRIS VAR H POS
–460 to 0 to 459
IRIS VAR V POS
–250 to 0 to 249
ID-1
Blank/up to 12
characters
ID-2
Blank/up to 12
characters
ID-3
Blank/up to 12
characters
ID-4
Blank/up to 12
characters
SHOT DATE
OFF/ON
SHOT TIME
OFF/ON
SHOT MODEL NAME OFF/ON
SHOT SERIAL NO
OFF/ON
SHOT ID SEL
OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/
ID-4
SHOT 16:9 CHARA
OFF/ON
For details, see “Setting the shot
ID” on page 152.
For details, see “Recording shot
data superimposed on the color
bars” on page 151.
SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF/ON
19
WHITE
SETTING
STATUS ABNORMAL OFF/ON
STATUS SYSTEM
OFF/ON
STATUS FUNCTION
OFF/ON
STATUS AUDIO
OFF/ON
For details, see “Displaying the
status confirmation screens” on
page 153.
WHITE SWITCH <B> MEM/ATW
Specifies the operating mode
when the WHITE BAL switch is
set to the B side.
MEM: Auto white balance
ATW: Auto tracing white balance
SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF/1/2/3
Specifies the transition time when
the WHITE BAL switch is
changed to a new setting (1 is
fastest)
ATW SPEED
1/2/3/4/5
Switches the transition speed of
auto tracing white balance (ATW)
(1 is fastest)
AWB FIXED AREA
OFF/ON
Executes AWB (auto white
balance) at the center of the
screen.
FILTER WHT MEM
OFF/ON
Sets the content of the white
balance memory area for each
position number of the FILTER
selector.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
20
SET STATUS
115
No. Page
Item
21
OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF/ON
OFFSET WHT
WARM-COOL <A>
WARM-COOL BAL
<A>
Settings
Description
For details, see “Specifying an
Displays reference color offset for the auto white balance
setting” on page 158.
temperature
(–99 to 99)
OFFSET WHITE <B> OFF/ON
22
23
24
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
116
SHT ENABLE
LENS FILE
FORMAT
WARM-COOL <B>
Displays reference color
temperature
WARM-COOL BAL
<B>
(–99 to 99)
SHUTTER ECS
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/33
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/50
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/60
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/100
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/125
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/250
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/500
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/1000
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/2000
OFF/ON
LENS FILE SELECT
1 to 32
F.ID
Display only
L.ID
Display only
L.MF
Display only
SYSTEM
FREQUENCY
Display only
REC FORMAT
Display only
COUNTRY
NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC
AREA/PAL AREA
25
SOURCE SEL
FRONT MIC SELECT MONO/STREO
(when stereo
microphone is
connected)
26
UMID SET
COUNTRY CODE
Menu List
The items which can be set differ
depending on the setting of the
SYSTEM FREQUENCY item on
the FORMAT page. For details,
see “Setting the Electronic
Shutter” on page 56.
For details, see “Selecting the
lens file” on page 159.
For details, see “Recording
Format” on page 52.
For details, see “Setting the Area
of Use” on page 38.
Input mode selection for front
microphone.
ORGANIZATION
Blank/up to 4 characters For details, see “Setting the
Blank/up to 4 characters UMID data” on page 159.
USER CODE
Blank/up to 4 characters
TIME ZONE
00 to 3F
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
27
TITLE
DSABL/ENABL
SELECT PREFIX
(when the TITLE item
is set to “ENABL”)
EXEC
For details, see “Assigning userdefined clip titles automatically”
on page 78.
CLEAR NUMERIC
(when the TITLE item
is set to “ENABL”)
EXEC
CLIP TITLE
LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC
(when the TITLE item
is set to “ENABL”)
28
FILE NAMING
PREFIX (when the
TITLE item is set to
“ENABL”)
TITLE/up to 10
characters
NUMERIC (when the
TITLE item is set to
“ENABL”)
00001 to 99999
NAMING FORM
C****/FREE
AUTO NAMING
(when the NAMING
FORM item is set to
“FREE”)
C****/TITLE
For details, see “Assigning userdefined names to clips and clip
lists” on page 81.
PAINT menu
Item
Settings
Description
01
GAMMA
OFF/ON
Turns the gamma correction on
or off.
BLACK GAMMA
OFF/ON
Turns the black gamma
correction on or off.
MATRIX
OFF/ON
Turns the linear matrix correction
and user-set matrix correction
functions on or off.
KNEE
OFF/ON
Turns the knee correction on or
off.
WHITE CLIP
OFF/ON
Turns the white clipping
correction on or off.
SW STATUS
DETAIL
OFF/ON
Turns the detail signal on or off.
APERTURE
OFF/ON
Turns the aperture function on or
off.
FLARE
OFF/ON
Turns the flare function on or off.
TEST SAW
OFF/ON
Selects the test signal.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
No. Page
117
No. Page
Item
Settings
02
COLOR TEMP <A>
Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of
temperature.
WHITE A.
C TEMP BAL <A>
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the value more precisely
when the color temperature
adjustment through COLOR
TEMP is not satisfactory.
R GAIN <A>
(–99 to 99)
Only the value of R GAIN is
changed.
B GAIN <A>
(–99 to 99)
Only the value of B GAIN is
changed.
COLOR TEMP <B>
Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of
temperature.
WHITE B.
C TEMP BAL <B>
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the value more precisely
when the color temperature
adjustment through COLOR
TEMP is not satisfactory.
R GAIN <B>
(–99 to 99)
Only the value of R GAIN is
changed.
B GAIN <B>
(–99 to 99)
Only the value of B GAIN is
changed.
03
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
118
04
WHITE
BLACK/FLARE MASTER BLACK
GAMMA
Menu List
Description
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the master black level.
R BLACK
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the R black level.
B BLACK
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the B black level.
MASTER FLARE
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the flare level of the
master.
R FLARE
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the R flare level.
G FLARE
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the G flare level.
B FLARE
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the B flare level.
FLARE
OFF/ON
Turns the flare correction circuit
on or off.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the output signal of TEST
OUT connector.
GAMMA
OFF/ON
Turns the gamma correction
function on or off.
STEP GAMMA
0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90
Sets the master gamma
correction curve.
MASTER GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the master gamma
correction curve.
R GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the R gamma correction
curve.
G GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the G gamma correction
curve.
B GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the B gamma correction
curve.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the output signal of TEST
OUT connector.
GAMMA TABLE
1 to 5 to 6
Selects the gamma type.
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
05
BLACK GAMMA
OFF/ON
Turns the black gamma
correction on or off.
06
KNEE
DETAIL 1
BLACK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/H.MID/
HIGH
Sets the range affected by black
gamma.
MASTER BLK
GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the master black gamma.
R BLACK GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the correction curve of the R
black gamma.
G BLACK GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the correction curve of the G
black gamma.
B BLACK GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the correction curve of the B
black gamma.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the output signal of TEST
OUT connector.
KNEE
OFF/ON
Turns the knee correction circuit
on or off.
KNEE POINT
50.0% to 95.0% to
109.0%
Sets the knee point level.
KNEE SLOPE
(–99 to 99)
Set the knee slope level.
KNEE SATURATION
OFF/ON
Turns the knee saturation
function on or off.
KNEE SAT LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the knee saturation level.
WHITE CLIP
OFF/ON
Turns the white clipping function
on or off.
WHITE CLIP LEVEL
NTSC: 90.0% to
108.0% to 109.5%
PAL: 90.0% to 105.0%
to 109.5%
Adjusts the white clipping level.
DETAIL
OFF/ON
Sets the detail correction function
on or off.
APERTURE
OFF/ON
Turns the aperture correction
function on or off.
DETAIL LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the general level of the detail
signal.
APERTURE LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the aperture correction level.
DTL H/V RATIO
(–99 to 99)
Sets the level of the V detail
signal.
CRISPENING
(–99 to 99)
Sets the crispening level.
LEVEL DEPEND
OFF/ON
Turns the level depend function
on or off.
LEVEL DEPEND LVL (–99 to 99)
Sets the level of the level depend.
DETAIL FREQUENCY (–99 to 99)
Sets the frequency of the H detail
signal.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
07
BLACK
GAMMA
119
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
08
KNEE APERTURE
OFF/ON
Turns the knee aperture function
on or off.
09
DETAIL 2
SD DETAIL
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
120
Menu List
KNEE APT LVL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the knee aperture level.
DETAIL LIMIT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the both detail black and
white limiters.
DTL WHT LMT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the detail white limiter.
DTL BLK LMT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the detail black limiter.
DTL V-BLK LMT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the V detail black limiter.
V DTL CREATION
NAM/G/R+G/Y
Selects the source signal of the V
DTL signal.
H/V CONTROL MODE H/V/V
Selects the operation mode of
DTL H/V RATIO on the
DETAIL 1 page.
H/V: H and V increase and
decrease in inverse
proportion
V: V DTL only enabled
SD DETAIL
OFF/ON
Turns the SD detail correction on
or off.
SD DETAIL LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the general level of the SD
detail signal.
SD CRISPENING
(–99 to 99)
Sets the SD crispening level.
SD DTL WHT LIMIT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the SD detail white limiter.
SD DTL BLK LIMIT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the SD detail black limiter.
SD LEVEL DEPEND
OFF/ON
Turns the SD level depend
function on or off.
SD LV DEPEND LVL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the level of the SD level
depend.
SD DTL FREQUENCY (–99 to 99)
Sets the frequency of the SD H
detail signal.
SD DTL H/V RATIO
(–99 to 99)
Sets the level of the SD V detail
signal.
SD CROSS
COLOR(when
NTSC(J)AREA or
NTSC AREA is
selected on the
FORMAT page)
(–99 to 99)
Sets the SD cross color reduction
level.
Item
Settings
Description
10
SKIN DETAIL ALL
OFF/ON
Turns on or off all of channels 1,
2 and 3 for the color detail
function.
SKIN DETECT
Moves to color detection Executes the color detail
page.
function.
SKIN AREA IND
OFF/ON
Turns on and off the function that
displays a zebra pattern where
color was detected.
SKIN DTL SELECT
1/2/3
Selects the type of the color
detail function. The following
items depend on the selected type
of the color detail function.
SKIN DETAIL
OFF/ON
Turns the color detail function on
or off for the type selected in the
above item.
SKIN DETAIL LVL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the level of the color detail
signal.
SKIN DTL SAT
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the saturation level of the
hue possessed by the color detail
function.
SKIN DTL HUE
(0 to 359)
Adjusts the center phase of the
hue possessed by the color detail
function.
SKIN DTL WIDTH
(0 to 40 to 359)
Adjusts the width of the hue
possessed by the color detail
function.
MATRIX
OFF/ON
Turns the linear matrix correction
and user-set matrix correction
functions on or off.
MATRIX(USER)
OFF/ON
Turns the user-set matrix
correction function on or off.
MATRIX(PRESET)
OFF/ON
Turns the preset matrix
correction function on or off.
MATRIX(PRST) SEL
1/2/3/4/5/6
Selects the preset matrix
correction function.
MATRIX(USER) R-G
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX(USER) R-B
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX(USER) G-R
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX(USER) G-B
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX(USER) B-R
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX(USER) B-G
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set
matrix coefficients.
11
SKIN DETAIL
MTX LINEAR
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
No. Page
121
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
12
MATRIX
OFF/ON
Turns the linear matrix correction
and multi matrix correction
functions on or off.
MATRIX (MULTI)
OFF/ON
Turns the multi matrix correction
function on or off.
MATRIX AREA IND
OFF/ON
Turns the zebra indication on or
off in the area corresponding to
the currently selected setting.
MTX MULTI
MATRIX COLOR DET Moves to color detection Detects color.
page.
MTX(MULTI)PRESET EXEC
13
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
14
15
122
V
MODULATION
SATURATION
NOISE
SUPPRESS
Menu List
Return MTX(MULTI)HUE and
MTX(MULTI)SAT values to
preset values for each of the 16
axes.
MTX (MULTI) AXIS
B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/ Sets 16 hue axes as the targets of
R/R+/YL–/YL/YL+/G–/ the multi matrix correction
G/G+/CY/CY+/B–
function.
MTX (MULTI) HUE
(–99 to 99)
Sets hue correction values for
each of the 16 axis modes.
MTX (MULTI) SAT
(–99 to 99)
Sets saturation correction values
for each of the 16 axis modes.
V MOD
OFF/ON
Turns the V modulation function
on or off.
MASTER VMOD
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the master V modulation
level.
R VMOD
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the R V modulation
level.
G VMOD
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the G V modulation
level.
B VMOD
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the B V modulation
level.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the output signal of the
TEST OUT connector.
LOW KEY SAT
OFF/ON
Turns the low key saturation
function on or off.
L KEY SAT LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the saturation level of the
low luminance part.
L KEY SAT RANGE
LOW/L.MID/H.MID/
HIGH
Sets the luminance level at which
the low key saturation function
becomes effective.
Y BLACK GAMMA
OFF/ON
Turns the Y black gamma
function on or off.
Y BLK GAM LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the gamma curve in the low
luminance part.
Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/H.MID/
HIGH
Sets the luminance level at which
the Y black gamma becomes
effective.
NOISE SUPPRESS
Turn on and off the noise
suppression function.
OFF/ON
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
16
1
STANDARD
2
STANDARD
Recalls the scene file saved in the
memory of the camcorder.
3
STANDARD
4
STANDARD
SCENE FILE
5
STANDARD
STANDARD
–
Clears all current detail-adjusted
settings and switch settings and
returns the settings to the
standard settings saved in the
reference file.
SCENE RECALL
–
Recalls the scene file from the
memory of the camcorder or the
“Memory Stick”.
SCENE STORE
–
Stores the scene file in the
memory of the camcorder or the
“Memory Stick”.
F.ID
Blank/up to 16
characters
Sets the File ID.
MAINTENANCE menu
Item
Settings
Description
01 WHITE
SHADING
WHT SHAD CH
SEL
R/G/B/TEST
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If TEST
is selected, the setting is linked to the setting of
TEST OUT SELECT.
TEST OUT
SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/
LCD
Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT
connector.
R/G/B WHT H
SAW
(–99 to 99)
H Saw white shading compensation.
R/G/B WHT H
PARA
(–99 to 99)
H Parabola white shading compensation.
R/G/B WHT V
SAW
(–99 to 99)
V Saw white shading compensation.
R/G/B WHT V
PARA
(–99 to 99)
V Parabola white shading compensation.
WHITE SAW/
PARA
OFF/ON
Turns white shading Saw and Parabola
compensation on and off.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
No. Page
123
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
02 BLACK
SHADING
BLK SHAD CH
SEL
R/G/B/TEST/
LCD
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If
“TEST” is selected, the setting is the same as the
setting of TEST OUT SELECT.
TEST OUT
SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/
LCD
Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT
connector.
R/G/B BLK H
SAW
(–99 to 99)
H Saw black shading compensation.
R/G/B BLK H
PARA
(–99 to 99)
H Parabola black shading compensation.
R/G/B BLK V
SAW
(–99 to 99)
V Saw black shading compensation.
R/G/B BLK V
PARA
(–99 to 99)
V Parabola black shading compensation.
BLACK SAW/
PARA
OFF/ON
Turns black shading Saw and Parabola
compensation on and off.
MASTER BLACK (–99 to 99)
03 LEVEL
ADJUST
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
124
Menu List
Master black level adjustment.
MASTER
GAIN(TMP)
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/ Temporarily adjusts the master gain value.
3dB/6dB/9dB/
12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/
36dB/42dB
VBS VIDEO
LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the composite signal video level.
HD-Y LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the Y level of the HD component signal.
TEST OUT
SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/
LCD
Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT
connector.
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
04 BATTERY 1
Info BEFORE
END
5%/10%/
15%...95%/
100%
Used when a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack is used.
Sets the remaining power (% value) of the battery at
which the BEFORE END warning should be
issued. a)
Info END
0%/1%/2%/3%/ Used when a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack is used.
4%/5%
Sets the remaining power (% value) of the battery at
Sony BEFORE
END
11.5V to 17.0V
(in 0.1V steps)
Sony END
11.0V to 11.5V
(in 0.1V steps)
Other BEFORE
END
11.5V to 11.8V
to 17.0V (in
0.1V steps)
Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery
pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at
which the BEFORE END warning should be
issued.
Other END c)
11.0V to 14.0V
(in 0.1 V steps)
Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery
pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at
which the END warning should be issued.
DC IN BEFORE
END
11.5V to 11.8V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
Used when an external power source is connected
to the DC IN connector. Sets the voltage level of the
connected external power source at which the
BEFORE END warning should be issued.
DC IN END
11.0V to 14.0V
(in 0.1 V steps)
Used when an external power source is connected
to the DC IN connector. Sets the voltage level of the
connected external power source at which the END
warning should be issued.
DETECTED
BATTERY
Info/Sony/Other/ Displays the type of automatically detected battery.
DC IN
which the END warning should be issued. b)
Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used.
Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the
BEFORE END warning should be issued. a)
Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used.
Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the
END warning should be issued. b)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu List
125
No. Page
Item
Settings
05 BATTERY 2
TYPE
DETECTION
AUTO/OTHER AUTO: Automatically detects the type of the
battery.
OTHER: Always judges the battery to be of the
Description
“OTHER”c) type regardless of the actual
battery type.
SEGMENT NO.7 11.0V to 17.0V
(in 0.1 V steps)
SEGMENT NO.6 11.0V to 16.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
126
When the battery type
Battery status
judgment is “OTHER”, sets indicator segments
the voltage level below which
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
the battery status indicator
segment No.7 should turn off. (“E” d) and “F” are
When the battery type
always on.)
judgment is “OTHER”, sets
the voltage level below which
the battery status indicator
segment No. 6 should turn
off.
SEGMENT NO.5 11.0V to 15.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”, sets
the voltage level below which
the battery status indicator
segment No. 5 should turn
off.
SEGMENT NO.4 11.0V to 14.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”, sets
the voltage level below which
the battery status indicator
segment No. 4 should turn
off.
SEGMENT NO.3 11.0V to 13.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”, sets
the voltage level below which
the battery status indicator
segment No. 3 should turn
off.
SEGMENT NO.2 11.0V to 12.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”, sets
the voltage level below which
the battery status indicator
segment No. 2 should turn
off.
SEGMENT NO.1 11.0V to 17.0 V When the battery type
(in 0.1 V steps) judgment is “OTHER”, sets
the voltage level below which
the battery status indicator
segment No. 1 should turn
off.
Menu List
No. Page
Item
Settings
06 AUDIO-1
FRONT MIC
SELECT
MONO/STREO Input mode selection for front microphone.
Description
AUDIO CH3/4
MODE
CH1/2/SW
Selects the sources to be recorded to channels CH3/4.
CH1/2: Same sources as CH-1/2.
SW: Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4
switches.
REAR XLR
AUTO
OFF/ON
Turns the XLR connection automatic detection on
or off.
FRONT MIC REF –60dB/–50dB/– Sets the reference level of the front microphone.
40dB
07 AUDIO-2
REAR MIC REF
–60dB/–50dB/– Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN CH1
40dB
connector is set to MIC.
MIN ALARM
VOL
OFF/SET
Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone when it
is turned all the way down.
OFF: Almost inaudible.
SET: Faintly audible.
SP ATT LEVEL
OFF/3dB/6dB/
9dB
Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker. Has no
effect on earphone volume.
HEADPHONE
OUT
MONO/STREO Selects whether to make the rear earphone
monaural or stereo.
AU REF LEVEL
–20dB/–18dB/– Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal.
16dB/–12dB/
EBUL
AU REF OUT
0dB/+4dB/–
3dB/EBUL
AU CH12 AGC
MODE
MONO/STREO Selects whether to perform automatic input level
adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded
on channels 1 and 2 independently for each
channel, or in stereo mode.
AU CH34 AGC
MODE
MONO/STREO/ Selects whether to perform automatic input level
OFF
adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded
on channels 3 and 4 independently for each
channel, or in stereo mode, or not at all (OFF).
AU AGC SPEC
–6dB/–9dB/
–12dB/–15dB/
–17dB
AGC saturation level setting.
AU LIMITER
MODE
OFF/–6dB/
–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
For manual audio input level adjustment, selects the
limiter saturation level for loud input signals.
AU OUT
LIMITER
OFF/ON
Turns the audio output limiter on or off.
Sets the output reference level.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu List
127
No. Page
Item
Settings
08 AUDIO-3
AU SG (1KHz)
ON/OFF/AUTO Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone during the
Color Bar mode or not.
ON: A 1 kHz test tone is output during the Color
Bar mode.
OFF: A 1 kHz test tone is not output during the
Color Bar mode.
AUTO: A 1 kHz test tone is output only when the
CH 1 AUDIO SELECT switch on the inside
panel is in the AUTO position.
Description
MIC CH1 LEVEL SIDE1/FRONT/ When recording the front microphone sound on CH
F+S1
1, selects which control is to be used for the level
adjustment.
SIDE 1: LEVEL control (left side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S1: LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to
each other.)
MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2/FRONT/ When recording the front microphone sound on CH
F+S2
2, selects which control is to be used for the level
adjustment.
SIDE 2: LEVEL control (right side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S2: LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to
each other.)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
REAR1/WRR
LEVEL
SIDE1/FRONT/ Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio
F+S1
level of the equipment that is connected to the
wireless microphone and whatever is connected to
the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel.
SIDE 1: LEVEL control (left side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S1: LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to
each other.)
REAR2/WRR
LEVEL
SIDE2/FRONT/ Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio
F+S2
level of the equipment that is connected to the
wireless microphone and whatever is connected to
the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel.
SIDE 2: LEVEL control (right side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S2: LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to
each other.)
AUDIO CH3
FIX/FRONT
Selects the audio level recorded on channel 3.
FIX: Fixed
FRONT: Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL
control on the front panel of the camcorder
FIX/FRONT
Selects the audio level recorded on channel 4.
FIX: Fixed
FRONT: Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL
control on the front panel of the camcorder
LEVEL e)
AUDIO CH4
LEVEL e)
128
Menu List
No. Page
Item
09 WRR
SETTING
WRR VALID CH ALL/CH1
Settings
SEL f)
WRR CH
TX1/TX2
Specifies the target channel for other items in this
menu.
TX1: Channel 1
TX2: Channel 2
OFF/ON
Enables or disables the delay compensation
function for wireless audio input.
OFF: Disables the function.
ON: Enables the function (the audio in all EE
output is delayed by about 8 ms).
–
Displays the name of the transmitter whose signals
are being received on the channel selected by WRR
CH SELECT.
SELECT f)
WRR DELAY
COMP f)
TX*(*: channel
number) f)
---/PEAK
TX* AUDIO
PEAK(*: channel
number) f)
TX* INPUT
MIC/LINE
LEVEL(*: channel
number) f)
–
TX* ATT
LEVEL(*: channel
number) f)
channel number) f)
Displays whether the input level of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH SELECT is set to MIC or
LINE.
Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals
are being received on the channel selected by WRR
CH SELECT (the permissible setting range may
vary depending on the transmitter device).
–
Sets the Low Cut Filter frequency of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH SELECT (the permissible
setting range may vary depending on the transmitter
device).
AUTO/
0.0ms~8.0ms
When WRR DELAY COMP is set to ON, sets the
amount of audio delay for the channel selected by
WRR CH SELECT.
AUTO: Automatically adjusts the amount of delay
so that the delay in the audio received from the
wireless receiver is zero.
0.0ms~8.0ms: Sets the amount of anticipated
wireless system delay, for cases in several
wireless systems are being used over a device
such as an audio mixer.
number) f)
TX* SYSTEM
DELAY(*:
Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH SELECT is over the peak.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
TX* LCF
FREQ(*: channel
Description
Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the
wireless receiver, or channel 1 only.
ALL: Enable both channel 1 and 2.
CH1: Enable channel 1 only. Select this setting to
use the wireless receiver as a monaural
receiver.
129
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
10 TIMECODE
TC OUT
AUTO/GENE
Selects the timecode signal output.
AUTO: Outputs the timecode generator output
during recording and outputs the timecode
reader output during playback.
GENE: Outputs the timecode generator output
during recording and playback.
DF/NDF
(when SYSTEM
FREQUENCY is
set to “59.94i”)
DF/NDF
Sets DF or NDF mode.
DF: Drop frame mode
NDF: Non-drop frame mode
11 ESSENCE
MARK
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
130
EXT-LK DF/NDF INT/EXT
(when SYSTEM
FREQUENCY is
set to “59.94i”)
Selects either internal setting or external setting for
DF/NDF.
INT: Internal
EXT: External
EXT-LK UBIT
INT/EXT
Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to an
INT or an EXT source when the timecode is locked
to an external source.
INT: Internal lock
EXT: External lock
LTC UBIT
FIX/TIME
Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of LTC.
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.
TIME: Records the present time.
WATCH AUTO
ADJ
OFF/ON
Matches the time of the internal clock with the time
data of the user bits of an external timecode. Turns
the automatic time correction function of the
internal clock on or off.
UBIT GROUP ID 000/101
Selects the UBIT GROUP ID.
RET SHOT
MARK 1
OFF/ON
For details, see “Recording essence marks” on page
76.
RET SHOT
MARK 2
OFF/ON
INDEX PIC. POS 0SEC to 10SEC For details, see “Setting the thumbnail image at
(in 1 sec steps) recording time” on page 76.
Menu List
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
12 CAM
CONFIG 1
REC TALLY
BLINK
OFF/ON
Turns the tally illumination control on or off when
the battery is almost exhausted or the disc is almost
full.
REC START
BEEP
OFF/ON
Turns on or off the REC START/STOP alarm
sound.
SUB LCD MODE TIMER/OFF/
SEL
CONT
Sets the timecode (TC) display after poweroff as
follows.
TIMER: The TC display turns off after the elapse
of the time set by the SUB LCD TIMER below.
OFF: Not displayed.
CONT: Displayed.
SUB LCD TIMER 1H/3H/8H
Sets the duration of time after which the TC display
is to be turned off after power-off, when the SUB
LCD MODE SEL item, above, is set to “TIMER”
(H: hours).
HDSDI REMOTE OFF/CHARA/
I/F
G-TLY/R-TLY
Selects whether to use the function that enables
recording control from this unit of an external
device connected to the SDI OUT 1/2 connectors
Note
When R-TLY is selected, the REC indicator lights even
when the unit is not recording.
13 CAM
CONFIG 2
TEST SAW
SELECT
SAW/REC
Selects the test signal.
COLOR BAR
SELECT
ARIB/100%/
75%/SMPTE
Selects the HD color bar type.
USER & ALL
ONLY
OFF/ON
Show only USER menu in the top menu.
RM COMMON
MEMORY
OFF/ON
Selects whether or not to share settings for when a
remote control unit is connected and when the unit
is used alone.
RM REC START
RM/CAM/
PARA
When an RM remote control unit is connected,
selects which recording start/stop buttons are
enabled.
RM: remote control unit
CAM: camcorder
PARA: both
SHT DISP MODE SEC/DEG
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
(HDSDI output) of this unit. g) Also selects the
indication that shows whether the external device is
recording.
OFF: Do not use the remote recording control
function.
CHARA: Use the function, and indicate by the
controlling external device indicator in the
viewfinder (see page 31).
G-TLY: Use the function, and indicate by the
TALLY indicator in the viewfinder.
R-TLY: Use the function, and indicate by the REC
(recording, red tally) indicator in the
viewfinder.
Selects shutter speed display (seconds or degrees).
Menu List
131
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
14 PRESET
WHITE
COLOR TEMP
<P>
Display
reference color
temperature.
Sets the white balance preset value.
15 WHITE
FILTER
C TEMP BAL <P> (–99 to 99)
Finer setting when the desired color could not be
obtained with the COLOR TEMP <P> color
temperature setting.
R GAIN <P>
(–99 to 99)
Sets the R gain preset value.
G GAIN <P>
(–99 to 99)
Sets the G gain preset value.
AWB ENABLE
<P>
OFF/ON
When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, turns
the function that enables execution of AWB (auto
white balance) on and off.
ND FILTER
CTEMP
OFF/ON
Turns on and off the function which assigns
electrical CC filters to neutral density (ND) filters.
ND FLT CTEMP
<1>
3200K/4300K/
5600K/6300K
Select the color temperatures when the electrical
CC filters are assigned to the ND filters.
ND FLT CTEMP
2-4
3200K/4300K/
5600K/6300K
16 DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION DCC/FIX
SEL
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
132
Menu List
Enables or disables automatic knee point
adjustment when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set
to CAM, DCC: ON.
DCC: Automatically adjust the knee point
according to the luminance of the subject.
FIX: Set the knee point to a fixed value.
DCC D RANGE
400%/450%/
500%/550%/
600%
Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/DCC
switch is set to CAM, DCC: ON.
DCC POINT
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the DCC minimum knee point.
DCC GAIN
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the gain to DCC detected value.
DCC DELAY
TIME
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the DCC reaction speed.
DCC PEAK
FILTER
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the response sensitivity to the peak of the
DCC detected value.
No. Page
Item
17 AUTO IRIS 2 IRIS WINDOW
Settings
Description
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR Selects the auto iris detection window.
VAR: variable
IRIS WINDOW
IND
OFF/ON
IRIS LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
IRIS APL RATIO (–99 to 99)
Turns on and off the function which displays a
frame marker for the auto iris detection window.
Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value.
Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris detection peak
value and average value.
IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 240 to 479 Adjusts the width of detection frame when the auto
iris detection window is set to VAR.
IRIS VAR
HEIGHT
20 to 135 to 269 Adjusts the height of detection frame when the auto
iris detection window is set to VAR.
IRIS VAR H POS –460 to 0 to 459 Adjusts the horizontal position of detection frame
when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.
IRIS VAR V POS –250 to 0 to 249 Adjusts the vertical position of detection frame
when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.
18 GENLOCK
19 ND COMP
21 APR
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the auto iris speed.
CLIP HIGH
LIGHT
OFF/ON
Turns on and off the function which, during auto
iris adjustment, ignores very bright areas by dulling
the reaction to high luminescence.
GENLOCK
OFF/ON
Turns genlock on and off.
GL HD H PHASE (–99 to 99)
Sets the HD output H phase for genlock operation.
GL SD H PHASE (–99 to 99)
Sets the SD output H phase for genlock operation.
REFERENCE
INTERNAL/
GENLOCK
Displays the type of reference signal used by this
unit.
ND OFFSET
ADJUST
OFF/ON
Turns on and off the mode which sets ND (neutral
density) filter color compensation values.
CLEAR ND
OFFSET
EXEC
Clear ND filter color compensation values.
AUTO BLK
SHADING
EXEC
Execute the auto black shading correction function.
RESET BLK SHD EXEC
Clear black shading compensation values.
TEST OUT
SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/
LCD
Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT
connector.
MASTER
GAIN(TMP)
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/ Temporarily sets the master gain value.
3dB/6dB/9dB/
12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/
36dB/42dB
APR
EXEC
Execute the automatic pixel noise reduction
function.
APR PRESET
EXEC
Delete defect compensation data that was added by
execution of the APR and automatic black balance
adjustment functions.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
20 AUTO
SHADING
IRIS SPEED
133
No. Page
Item
Settings
22 NETWORK
DHCP
ENABL/DSABL Selects whether to enable automatic acquisition of
the IP address from a DHCP server.
Description
IP ADDRESS
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Sets the IP address.
192.168.1.10
SUBNET MASK
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Sets the subnet mask.
255.255.255.0
DEF.GATEWAY
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Sets the default gateway.
0.0.0.0
LINK SPEED
AUTO/10Mbps/ Sets the communications speed.
100Mbps
DUPLEX
AUTO/FULL/
HALF
a) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of
Other BEFORE END when TYPE DETECTION in
the BATTERY 2 page is set to “OTHER”.
b) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of
Other END when TYPE DETECTION in the
BATTERY 2 page is set to “OTHER”.
c) When TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page
is set to “AUTO”, any batteries other than Sony BPseries batteries and Anton Bauer intelligent battery
systems are classified as “Others”.
d) Flashes once per second when the battery status is
“BEFORE END”, and flashes 4 times per second
when the battery status is “END”.
Sets the duplex mode.
e) A setting for this item is required when AU CH34
AGC MODE in the AUDIO-2 page is set to OFF.
f) A setting for this item is required when the DWRS01D Digital Wireless Receiver is installed.
Note
When you use the DWR-S01D Digital Wireless
Receiver in combination with this camcorder, you
need to check both of their versions.
Consult a Sony representative for information
about these versions.
g) SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT in the
OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be
set to HDSDI.
FILE menu
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
134
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
01
USER FILE LOAD
EXEC
USER FILE SAVE
EXEC
F.ID
Blank/up to 16
characters
For details, see “Saving and
Recalling User Files” on page
162.
USER PRESET
EXEC
USER FILE
Menu List
For details, see “Resetting USER
menu settings to the standard
settings” on page 147.
No. Page
Item
02
STORE USR PRESET EXEC
Save settings for items on pages
registered in the USER menu as
the standard settings.
CLEAR USR PRESET EXEC
Clear the standard setting of pages
registered in the USER menu.
CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC
Return the pages registered in the
USER menu to the factory default
state.
LOAD CUSTOM
DATA
Selects whether to load page and
item customization data when
USER FILE LOAD on the USER
FILE page is executed.
03
USER FILE 2
ALL FILE
Settings
OFF/ON
Description
Selects whether to load data for
items on pages not registered in
the USER menu when USER
FILE LOAD on the USER FILE
page is executed.
BEFORE FILE PAGE
OFF/ON
Selects whether to load data for
items on the pages beyond USER
FILE in the USER menu when
USER FILE LOAD on the USER
FILE page is executed.
USER LOAD WHITE OFF/ON
Selects whether to load white
balance data when USER FILE
LOAD on the USER FILE page is
executed.
ALL FILE LOAD
–
Load ALL file.
ALL FILE SAVE
–
Save ALL file.
F.ID
Blank/up to 16
characters
Name ALL file.
ALL PRESET
EXEC
Return all items to preset values.
STORE ALL PRESET EXEC
Save the current settings of all
items as preset values.
CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC
Clear the preset values of all
items.
3SEC CLR PRESET
OFF/ON
Turns the following function on
and off: When the CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch is held on
the CANCEL/PRST side for three
seconds, clear the preset values of
each item.
NETWORK DATA
OFF/ON
Selects whether or not to read in
the network-related data.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
LOAD OUT OF USER OFF/ON
135
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
04
1
STANDARD
2
STANDARD
3
STANDARD
For details, see “Saving and
Loading Scene Files” on page
165.
4
STANDARD
5
STANDARD
05
SCENE FILE
REFERENCE
STANDARD
–
SCENE RECALL
–
SCENE STORE
–
F.ID
STANDARD
REFERENCE STORE EXEC
Save reference file saved in the
“Memory Stick” in internal
memory.
REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC
Clear reference file.
REFERENCE LOAD
EXEC
Load reference file.
REFERENCE SAVE
EXEC
Save reference file to “Memory
Stick”.
F. ID
Blank/up to 16
characters
Enter reference file name.
SCENE WHITE DATA OFF/ON
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
136
Menu List
Selects whether to load white
balance data when SCENE
RECALL or STANDARD on the
SCENE FILE page is executed.
Item
06
LENS FILE RECALL EXEC
Load lens file.
LENS FILE STORE
EXEC
Save lens file.
F.ID
No Offset/up to 16
characters
Sets the name of the last selected
lens file.
SOURCE
MEMORY1
Displays the number of last
loaded lens file.
LENS NO OFFSET
EXEC
Clear lens file.
LENS AUTO
RECALL
OFF/ON/S.No
Specifies whether to automatically
load the lens file of a lens that
supports serial communications.
OFF: Do not use the lens file
function.
ON: Load the lens file
corresponding to the lens
model name, and reflect the
contents of the file.
S.No: If the lens can communicate
its serial number, load the
lens file corresponding to the
lens model name and serial
number, and reflect the
contents of the file. If the lens
serial number cannot be
communicated, load the lens
file corresponding to the lens
model name (same as the ON
setting).
L.ID
EXEC
Display the name of the connected
lens that supports serial
communications.
L.MF
EXEC
Display the manufacturer of the
connected lens that supports serial
communications.
LENS M VMOD a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the lens file V SAW
shading compensation.
LENS CENTER H a)
–480 to 0 to 479
Compensates the horizontal
position of lens file center marker.
LENS CENTER V a)
–270 to 0 to 269
Compensates the vertical position
of lens file center marker.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the signal output of the
TEST OUT connector.
LENS R FLARE a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the lens file flare (R).
LENS G
FLARE a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the lens file flare (G).
LENS B
FLARE a)
07
LENS FILE 1
LENS FILE 2
Settings
Description
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the lens file flare (B).
OFST a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the white balance (R)
compensation value of the lens
file.
LENS W-B OFST a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the white balance (B)
compensation value of the lens
file.
LENS W-R
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
No. Page
137
No. Page
Item
Settings
Description
08
SHADING CH SEL
R/G/B/TEST
Selects the channel adjusted by
this menu. If TEST is selected, the
setting is linked to the setting of
TEST OUT SELECT.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the signal output of the
TEST OUT connector.
LENS FILE 3
LENS R/G/B H SAW a) (–99 to 99)
LENS R/G/B H
(–99 to 99)
PARA a)
LENS R/G/B V SAW a) (–99 to 99)
Adjusts the V Saw white shading
compensation.
Adjusts the V Parabola white
shading compensation.
M.S. FORMAT
EXEC
Format “Memory Stick”.
M.S. IN > JUMP TO
For details, see “Jumping to a
OFF/USER/ALL/
SCENE/LENS/REFER/ File-Related Menu Page When
USER1
Inserting a “Memory Stick”” on
page 168.
PARA a)
MEMORY
STICK
Adjusts the H Parabola white
shading compensation.
(–99 to 99)
LENS R/G/B V
09
Adjusts the H Saw white shading
compensation.
a) “EX” is displayed when the extender is on, and “08”
is displayed when the shrinker is on.
DIAGNOSIS menu
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
No. Page
Item
Description
01
OPERATION
Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on, in
units of hours.
LASER
Displays the total number of output parameters to the optical
heads.
OPERATION (rst)
Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on, in
units of hours (reset possible).
SPINDLE (rst)
Displays the total time that the spindle has been rotating, in
units of hours (reset possible).
LOADING (rst)
Displays the number of times that discs have been loaded
(reset possible).
SEEK (rst)
Displays the total seek time by the optical heads, in units of
hours (reset possible).
ADJUST
For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock”
on page 39.
02
HOURS METER
TIME/DATE
HOUR
MIN
SEC
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
138
Menu List
No. Page
03
Item
ROM VERSION 1 PACKAGE: X.XX
Description
Displays ROM version.
SY1: X.XX
SY2K: X.XX
SY2U: X.XX
DRV: X.XX
AT: X.XX
FP: X.XX
04
ROM VERSION 2 LVIS: X.XX
TSYS: X.XX
TMBP: X.XX
FAM: X.XX
LABY: X.XX
BRDG: X.XX
PIER: X.XX
CAVA: X.XX
05
ROM VERSION 3 DSP0: X.XX
DSP2: X.XX
PRXA: X.XX
06
DEV STATUS
I/O: MS, FP, CN,
DCP, VF
Displays the status of each internal device of this unit.
D/A: DCP1, DCP2,
DCP3
EEPROM: CN, DCP,
DR
FRAM: AT
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
FAN: MB
LSI: DCP1, DCP2,
DCP3, DCP4, TG
SCI: SY, RM
Menu List
139
Menu Operations
indicating the current status of the camcorder
appears on the viewfinder screen.
For details, see “Selecting the display items” on
page 148.
To display the TOP menu
With no menu displayed on the screen, hold down
the MENU knob and set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to ON.
Displaying menus
1
Depending on the internal switch settings, display of
the TOP menu may be disabled. For details, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
Basic menu operations
By pressing and turning the MENU knob, you can
set various menu items. In the remainder of this
section, the LCD monitor is generally shown as
an example of the menu display, but a similar
display also appears on the viewfinder screen.
5 4 32
1Viewfinder
2LCD monitor
3DISP SEL/EXPAND button
4MENU ON/OFF switch
5POWER switch
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
To use the MENU ON/OFF switch, open the
cover of the menu operating section.
When the camcorder is powered on, set the
MENU ON/OFF switch to ON to display the
menu on the viewfinder screen and the LCD
monitor.
If this is the first time the menu has been used
after the camcorder has been powered on, the
USER menu is displayed. If the menu has been
used before, the last accessed page appears.
When the menu is not displayed on the LCD
monitor
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button below the
LCD monitor to select the CHAR display.
To clear the menu display from the
screen
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. (When
the cover of the menu operating section is closed,
this switch is automatically set to OFF.)
When the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT
switch on the viewfinder is set to ON, the display
140
Menu Operations
To select the setting items and values on
the menu
Turn the MENU knob to select in the cases
explained below.
To scroll pages
?001 OUTPUT1
TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
?005 REC FUNCTION
CACHE REC
TOP
:
OFF
When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to switch pages.
To select a menu or setting item
001 OUTPUT1
TOP
001 OUTPUT1
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
TOP
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
When b appears, turn the MENU knob to move b up and down.
To change a setting value
001 OUTPUT1
TOP
001 OUTPUT1
TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:?
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:?
TEST OUT SUPER :
Y
OFF
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to change the setting (ON/OFF, value, etc.).
To confirm the selection of a menu, a
setting item, or a setting value
Each time you press the MENU knob, the menu
display switches in the following sequence.
Menu Operations
141
Example: When using the OPERATION menu
TOP menu
CONTENTS page
?000 CONTENTS
<TOP MENU>
USER
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
ADVANCED
If the menu
has not been
used
TOP
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.POWER SAVE
08.VF DISP 1
09.VF DISP 2
10.VF DISP 3
If the menu has
been used before
Menu selection mode
Menu selection page
TOP
000 CONTENTS
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.POWER SAVE
08.VF DISP 1
09.VF DISP 2
10.VF DISP 3
?001 OUTPUT1
Setting item selection mode
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
001 OUTPUT1
TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
Setting value selection mode
001 OUTPUT1
TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT:?
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
Note
If the TOP menu has not been displayed since the
camcorder is powered on, “TOP” does not appear at the
upper right on the above screen, and you cannot go to the
TOP menu. In this case, follow the procedure in “To
display the TOP menu” (page 140).
142
Menu Operations
TOP
When you set items on the ALL,
OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE,
FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus, move b to
the menu that contains the desired item in the
TOP menu, and then press the MENU knob.
To display the TOP menu when another
menu is displayed
Move b to “TOP” displayed at the top right of
each page of the menu, and press the MENU
knob. Or flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch repeatedly to ESCAPE until the TOP
menu is displayed.
2
Turn the MENU knob until the desired
page appears.
?U05 REC FUNCTION
Using the USER menu (example
menu operation)
CACHE REC
TOP
:
OFF
U05 REC FUNCTION
TOP
CACHE REC
OFF
This section explains menu operations using the
USER menu as an example. The operations are
the same for the ALL, OPERATION, PAINT,
MAINTENANCE, and DIAGNOSIS menus.
For details about how to operate the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu, see “Editing the USER menu”
(page 144).
1
3
b and z appear.
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
1 Press the MENU knob. Then turn the
MENU knob to move b to the desired
page number.
?U00 CONTENTS
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting.
Depending on the direction of turning the
knob, the setting value increases, decreases,
switches between ON and OFF, and so on.
TOP
2 Press the MENU knob again.
The page selected in 1 is displayed.
Go to step 3.
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the
desired item, and then press the MENU
knob.
b changes to z, and z changes to ?.
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.VF DISP 1
08.VF DISP 2
09.'!' LED
10.MARKER 1
This indicates that the menu
screen can be scrolled.
:
To interrupt changing the settings
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON
again, the values that were displayed when
you interrupted the setting operations will
reappear so you can continue making
settings.
6
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Normally, the USER menu appears.
If it does not, turn the MENU knob to move
b to USER in the TOP menu, and press the
MENU knob.
If the USER menu has been used before, the
last accessed page appears. In this case, go to
step 2.
If this is the first time the USER menu has
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the
USER menu appears. In this case, follow the
procedure below.
Press the MENU knob.
Press the MENU knob.
z changes to b, and ? changes to z. The
selection is confirmed.
7
To continue setting other items on the
same page, repeat steps from 4 to 6.
Menu Operations
143
8
To end the menu operation, set the
MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
The menu disappears from the screen, and
the display indicating the current status of the
camcorder appears along the top and bottom
of the screen.
To cancel a change or return to the
standard settings
Note
Depending on the setting item, in some cases only the
function to return to the standard setting is valid.
1
Before pressing the MENU knob in step
6 of the above procedure, flick the
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the
CANCEL/PRST position.
The message “CANCEL DATA OK?”
appears.
2
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position
again.
The message “CANCEL DATA” appears to
indicate that the change has been cancelled.
3
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
To return to the standard settings after
pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the
above procedure, flick the CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch to the
CANCEL/PRST position.
Editing the USER menu
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows
you to configure a USER menu that consists only
of pages and items that you need by adding,
deleting or replacing the pages.
To add a new page
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows
you to add a new page to the USER menu.
While the EDIT page contains factory-preset
items, the USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages
are all blank in their initial state. You can register
up to 10 items, including blank lines, on each of
these pages.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the TOP menu (see page 140).
2
Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE,
and press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the
CONTENTS page of the menu appears.
The message “PRESET DATA OK?”
appears on the screen.
4
?E00 CONTENTS
01.EDIT
02.USER
03.USER
04.USER
05.USER
06.USER
07.USER
08.USER
09.USER
10.USER
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position
again.
This returns to the standard settings.
TOP
PAGE
1 EDIT
2 EDIT
3 EDIT
4 EDIT
5 EDIT
6 EDIT
7 EDIT
8 EDIT
9 EDIT
To move to another page
?U05 REC FUNCTION
CACHE REC
:
If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has
been used before, the last accessed page
appears.
TOP
OFF
3
When ? appears in front of the page number
Turn the MENU knob to switch pages.
144
When nothing appears in front of the page
number
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the page
number, and press the MENU knob. Then turn the
MENU knob to switch pages.
Menu Operations
If the CONTENTS page is displayed,
press the MENU knob. Then select one
of USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT, and
press the MENU knob.
If a different page other than the
CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the
MENU knob until the desired page appears,
then press the MENU knob.
Example: when the USER 9 EDIT page is
selected
E10 USER 9 EDIT
7
Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add the remaining
items.
You can add up to 10 items on one page.
To delete items from a page by using the
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new
page” (page 144).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
item that you want to delete.
3
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position.
ESC
The message “DELETE ITEM OK?”
appears.
4
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
line where you want to add an item, and
press the MENU knob.
4
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
EDIT FUNCTION
ESC
INSERT
MOVE
DELETE
BLANK
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position
again.
To delete items from a page by using the menu
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new
page” (page 144).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
item that you want to delete, and press
the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
Select INSERT, and press the MENU
knob.
3
The following menu appears.
?P00 CONTENTS
6
The previously displayed page appears
again, and the message “DELETE OK? YES
b NO” appears.
TOP
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.POWER SAVE
08.VF DISP 1
09.VF DISP 2
10.VF DISP 3
Add the items as follows.
1 Press the MENU knob, scroll the page
until the desired item appears, and then
press the MENU knob again.
2 Press the MENU knob again, select the
desired item, and then press the MENU
knob.
The USER 9 EDIT page appears again,
displaying the newly added item.
Select DELETE, and press the MENU
knob.
4
Select YES, and press the MENU knob.
To replace items on a page
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new
page” (page 144).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
item that you want to replace, and press
the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
5
Select MOVE, and press the MENU
knob.
The previously displayed page appears
again.
Menu Operations
145
4
The EDIT PAGE appears.
Select the position to which you want to
move the item, and press the MENU
knob.
?E01 EDIT PAGE
The item selected in step 2 moves to the
position that you selected in step 4.
To insert a blank line
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new
page” (page 144).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
item that you want to replace, and press
the MENU knob.
4
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select BLANK, and press the MENU
knob.
The previously displayed page appears
again, and a blank line is inserted above the
specified item.
5
6
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Display the TOP menu (see page 140).
2
Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE,
and press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the
CONTENTS page appears. If the menu has
been used before, the last accessed page
appears.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed,
press the MENU knob. Then select
EDIT PAGE, and press the MENU
knob.
If a different page is displayed, turn the
MENU knob until the EDIT PAGE screen
appears.
146
Menu Operations
Select the desired page, and press the
MENU knob.
The number and name of the page selected in
step 6 is added above the item selected in
step 4.
To cancel adding a page
Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6,
select ESC at the top right of the screen, and
press the MENU knob.
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.
To add/delete/replace pages
1
Select INSERT, and press the MENU
knob.
The CONTENTS page appears.
Note
To add a page
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
position where you want to add the
page, and press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items
have already been registered.
You can add a new page to the USER menu,
delete a page from the USER menu, or replace
pages, using the EDIT PAGE of the USER
MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.
TOP
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.VF DISP 1
08.VF DISP 2
09.'!' LED
10.MARKER 1
To delete a page by using the CANCEL/PRST/
ESCAPE switch
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”
(page 146).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
page that you want to delete.
3
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position.
The message “DELETE PAGE OK?”
appears.
4
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position
again.
To delete a page by using the menu
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”
(page 146).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
page that you want to delete, and press
the MENU knob.
?F01 USER FILE
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
4
2
Select YES, and press the MENU knob.
2
EXEC
EXEC
:
EXEC
Press the MENU knob, then select
USER PRESET, and press the MENU
knob.
The message “PRESET OK? YES b NO”
appears.
To replace pages
1
:
:
F.ID : ssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET
Select DELETE, and press the MENU
knob.
The previously displayed page appears
again, and the message “DELETE OK? YES
b NO” appears at the upper right.
TOP
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”
(page 146).
F01 USER FILE
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
page that you want to move, and press
the MENU knob.
USER PRESET
TOP
PRESET OK?
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
YES NO
:
EXEC
:
EXEC
F.ID : ssssssssssssssss
:
EXEC
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select MOVE, and press the MENU
knob.
The previous screen appears again.
4
Select the position to which you want to
move the page, and press the MENU
knob.
3
Select YES, and press the MENU knob.
The message “COMPLETE” appears, and
the settings for all items in the USER menu
are reset to the standard settings.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
The page selected in step 2 is moved to the
position.
Resetting USER menu settings to
the standard settings
You can return all settings in the USER menu to
standard settings.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
Menu Operations
147
Setting the Status
Display on the
Viewfinder Screen and
the LCD Monitor
This section explains the menu settings for the
display of the viewfinder screen. These settings
are also used for the display of the LCD monitor
in the same way.
Selecting the display items
To select the items to be displayed on the
viewfinder screen (with the viewfinder
DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch set
to ON) and the LCD monitor, use the
VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, and VF DISP 3 pages of
the OPERATION menu.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, or
VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION
menu, and press the MENU knob.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select the desired setting item, and
press the MENU knob.
On the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, and VF DISP
3 pages, you can select any of the following
items to turn its display on or off.
VF DISP 1 page
Item
VF DISP
viewfinder display a)
VF DISPLAY MODE Selecting the display
DISP EXTENDER
DISP FILTER
DISP WHITE
DISP GAIN
DISP SHUTTER
DISP AUDIO
148
Description
Turning on or off the
mode b)
Extender indicator
Types of the ND filter
White balance
memory indicator
Gain indicator
Shutter speed and
ECS mode indicator
Audio level indicator
Item
DISP DISC
DISP IRIS
Description
Remaining disc
capacity indicator
Iris opening indicator
a) The viewfinder display can be also turned on or
off by using the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/
ASPECT switch on the viewfinder.
b) For detailed information on the display mode, see
“Change confirmation/adjustment progress
messages” (page 149).
VF DISP 2 page
Item
DISP ZOOM
Description
Zoom position
indicator
DISP COLOR TEMP Displays the color
temperature.
Displays the battery
DISP BATT
voltage/remaining
REMAIN a)
capacity of an internal
battery pack or an
external battery
connected to the DC
IN connector.
DISP DC IN
Displayed when the
power is supplied
from an external
battery connected to
the DC IN connector.
DISP WRR RF LVL Displays the reception
level of the wireless
microphone.
DISP REC FORMAT Displays the recording
format.
DISP CLIP NO(PB) Displays the clip
number.
DISP TIMECODE
Displays the
timecode.
a) When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BPGL65/GL95 battery pack is installed, the
remaining battery power is shown as a
percentage value (%) according to the setting of
this item.
INT: When one of the above batteries is
installed, the remaining power is shown as a
percentage value (%) when there is a change
in the value or when the power is low.
AUTO: The remaining power is shown as a
percentage value (%) when one of the above
batteries is installed. Otherwise the voltage
(VOLT) is displayed continuously.
VOLT: The voltage (VOLT) is displayed
continuously.
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
VF DISP 3 page
Item
LOW LIGHT
Description
Turns on and off the
on-screen warning
that the average level
of the video has
dropped beneath a set
level.
LOW LIGHT LEVEL Sets the LOW LIGHT
threshold value.
VF BATT WARNING Specifies the
remaining battery
capacity level that
starts the flashing
warning in the
viewfinder.
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired setting (ON, OFF, or value), and
press the MENU knob.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Change confirmation/adjustment
progress messages
Y: Message is displayed.
N: Message is not displayed.
Message display Message
condition
When the filter
selection has
been changed
When the gain
setting has been
changed
Display
mode
setting
1 2 3
N N Y
FILTER: n
(where n = 1, 2,
3, 4)
GAIN: n (where N
n = –6dB, –3dB,
0dB, 3dB, 6dB,
9dB,12dB, 18dB,
24dB, 30dB,
36dB, 42dB)
N
Y
When the setting
of the WHITE
BAL switch has
been changed
WHITE: n
(where n = A
CH, B CH,
PRESET) or
ATW: RUN
DCC: ON (or
OFF)
Display
mode
setting
1 2 3
N N Y
When the
N
OUTPUT/DCC
switch has been
set to DCC ON
or OFF
N
When the shutter :SHUTTER:
speed and mode 1/100
setting has been (or 1/125, 1/250,
1/500, 1/1000,
changed a)
1/2000, ECS)
When the black E.g. AWB : OK N
or white balance
has been adjusted
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
a) This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the
SHUTTER selector is set to ON.
Changing the display mode
1
Display the VF DISP 1 page of the
OPERATION menu on the screen, and
press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select VF DISP MODE, and press the
MENU knob.
3
Select the desired display mode, and
press the MENU knob.
Setting the marker display
Switch the display of the center and safety zone
markers on or off, and select whether the area
indicated by the safety zone marker is 80%, 90%,
92.5%, or 95% of the screen area.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
You can limit or suppress the messages that give
details of setting changes and adjustment
progress and results by setting a display mode.
The conditions under which messages are
displayed and their correspondence with the
display mode are as follows:
Message display Message
condition
Display the MARKER 1 or MARKER 2
page of the OPERATION menu on the
screen, and press the MENU knob.
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
149
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Item
USER BOX
Description
Turns the display of
the box cursor on and
off.
USER BOX WIDTH Sets the width of the
box cursor (distance
from center to left or
right edge).
USER BOX HEIGHT Sets the height of the
box cursor (distance
from center to top or
bottom edge).
USER BOX H POS
Sets the horizontal
position of the center
of the box cursor.
USER BOX V POS
Sets the vertical
position of the center
of the box cursor.
CENTER H POS
Sets the horizontal
position of the center
marker.
CENTER V POS
Sets the vertical
position of the center
marker.
ASPECT SAFE
Turns the display of
ZONE
the aspect safety zone
on and off.
ASPECT SAFE
Selects the range of
AREA
the aspect safety zone
(80%/90%/92.5%/
95%).
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 pages.
MARKER 1 page
Item
MARKER
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Description
To hide all markers,
set to “OFF”.
CENTER
To display the center
marker, set to “ON”.
CENTER MARK
Selects the position of
the center marker.
SAFETY ZONE
To display the safety
zone, set to “ON”.
SAFETY AREA
Selects the safety zone
range (80%, 90%,
92.5% or 95%).
ASPECT
To display the aspect
marker, set to “ON”.
ASPECT SELECT
Selects the aspect
mode (15:9/14:9/13:9/
4:3/1.85/2.35).
To make the areas out
ASPECT MASK a)
of the selected aspect
marker dimmer, set to
“ON”.
ASPECT MASK LVL To set the mask level,
when the ASPECT
MASK is set to “ON”.
100 % MARKER
To display the
effective pixel area,
set to “ON”.
a) The ASPECT MASK setting affects the
viewfinder and LCD monitor display. In the
following cases, it also affects the VBS signal.
• When TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1
page is set to VBS.
• When both TEST OUT SUPER on the
OUTPUT 1 page and SUPER(MARKER) on
the SUPER IMPOSE page are set to ON.
MARKER 2 page
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Setting the viewfinder
You can make settings for viewfinder screen
display functions.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the VF SETTING page of the
OPERATION menu on the screen, and
press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
150
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
1
You can set the following items on the VF
SETTING page.
Item
ZEBRA
ZEBRA SELECT
ZEBRA 1 DET. LVL
ZEBRA 1 APT. LVL
ZEBRA 2 DET. LVL
VF DETAIL LEVEL
Description
Turns the zebra
display on or off. a)
Selects ZEBRA 1,
ZEBRA 2 or BOTH.
Adjusts the level of
the zebra 1 (20% to
70% to 107%)
display.
Adjusts the aperture
level of the zebra 1
display. (1% to 10%
to 20%)
Adjusts the level of
the zebra 2 (52% to
100% to 109%)
display.
Adjusts the sharpness
of the viewfinder (–99
to 99).
Display the SHOT DISP page of the
OPERATION menu on the screen, and
press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the SHOT
DISP page.
Item
SHOT DATE
SHOT TIME
SHOT MODEL
NAME
SHOT SERIAL NO.
SHOT ID SEL
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
SHOT 16:9 CHARA
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Recording shot data
superimposed on the color bars
In the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu, you
can select which shot data is recorded
superimposed on the color bars. You can also
select which of the shot IDs (1 to 4) set in the
SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on
the picture.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
SHOT BLINK
CHARA
superimposed. a)
Turns the following
function on and off:
When displaying
aspect ratio 4:3 video,
record superimposed
“16:9” in the locations
where 16:9 video is
cut.
Selects whether or not
the blinking * is
superimposed (ON or
OFF).
a) To carry out superimposed recording, select the
SHOT ID number (1 to 4). Not to carry out
superimposed recording, select “OFF”.
3
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
a) When you use the viewfinder which is not
equipped with the ZEBRA switch, turns the
display on or off using this item. When you use
the viewfinder with the ZEBRA switch, the most
recent operation of the ZEBRA switch and this
menu operation is effective.
Description
Selects whether or not
the shot data is
superimposed (ON or
OFF).
Selects whether or not
shot time is
superimposed (ON or
OFF).
Selects whether or not
the model name is
superimposed (ON or
OFF).
Selects whether or not
the serial number is
superimposed (ON or
OFF).
Selects whether or not
the shot ID set on the
SHOT ID page is
Turn the MENU knob to select whether
or not to record the selected item
superimposed on the color bars or the
SHOT ID number, and press the
MENU knob.
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
151
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
017 SHOT ID
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
To carry out superimposed recording
To actually record the items selected for
superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page,
set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to BARS, DCC
OFF.
The items selected for superimposed recording
appear on the screen and are recorded
superimposed on the color bars.
2
:
:
:
:
TOP
ssssssssssss
ssssssssssss
ssssssssssss
ssssssssssss
Select one of ID-1 to ID-4, and press the
MENU knob.
A x mark appears over the first character
position in the string, and characters can now
be input.
Example display: when SHOT DATA is set to
ON
017 SHOT ID
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
08/03/15
TOP
:? x
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
3
Setting the shot ID
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
You can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric
characters, spaces, and symbols.
When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to BARS,
DCC OFF, this shot ID is output with the color
bar signal. You can set four shot IDs (ID-1 to
ID-4).
Note
When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed
even if the color bar signal is output.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SHOT ID page of the
OPERATION menu on the screen, and
press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
Enter or change the shot ID.
When you are entering the whole shot ID, go
to 2.
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the x
mark to the character which you want
to change, then press the MENU knob.
017 SHOT ID
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
TOP
:? x
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
2 Turn the MENU knob until the x mark
moves to the character position that
you want to select, then press the
MENU knob.
017 SHOT ID
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
TOP
:?+
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
152
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
4
Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining
characters.
5
When the input is complete, turn the
MENU knob to move the x mark over
END, then press the MENU knob.
This ends the input, and returns to the
original SHOT ID page.
To insert a space
In step 3 above, move the x mark over INS, and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel inserting a space, move the x mark
over RET, then press the MENU knob.
To delete a character
In step 3 of “Setting the shot ID” (page 152),
move the x mark over DEL, and press the
MENU knob.
This deletes the character under the x mark in the
shot ID row.
To cancel deleting the character, move the x
mark over RET, and press the MENU knob.
To cancel changing shot ID
Displaying the status
confirmation screens
AUDIO STATUS screen
This screen allows you to confirm the following
items related to audio.
• Audio bit rate
• Setting condition of DF/NDF (only for the
PDW-510/530)
• Type of front microphone
• Type of input signal to audio channels 1 to 4
• Input level of audio channels 1 to 4
You can use the SET STATUS page of the
OPERATION menu to set whether or not the
status confirmation screens are displayed.
To display the status confirmation
screens
You can use the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch as the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch
when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF
(when the cover of the menu operating section is
closed, OFF is automatically selected).
To disable display of the status
confirmation screens
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
You can confirm the settings or status of the
camcorder on the LCDs by displaying the
following four screen.
ABNORMAL <!> screen
This window allows you to confirm why the !
(warning) indicator lights in the viewfinder.
You can use the ‘!’ LED page of the
OPERATION menu to set whether or not the !
(warning) indicator lights.
Display the SET STATUS page of the
OPERATION menu on the screen, and
press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the SET
STATUS page.
SYSTEM screen
This screen displays information such as the
system frame frequency, the recording format,
whether output from the TEST OUT connector is
on or off, and the type of output signal.
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Before executing step 5 of “Setting the shot ID”
(page 152), move the b mark over ESC, then
press the MENU knob or flick the CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch to ESCAPE.
FUNCTION screen
This screen displays the functions assigned to the
ASSIGN switches, the detection level, and other
information.
153
Item
STATUS
ABNORMAL
STATUS
SYSTEM
STATUS
FUNCTION
STATUS
AUDIO
Description
Selects whether or not the
ABNORMAL window is
displayed (ON or OFF).
Displays (ON) or hides
(OFF) the SYSTEM menu.
Selects whether or not the
FUNCTION window is
displayed (ON or OFF).
Selects whether or not the
STATUS AUDIO window is
displayed (ON or OFF).
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Adjustments and
Settings From Menus
Setting gain values for the GAIN
selector positions
You can set the gain values for the L, M, and H
positions of the GAIN selector, which switches
the gain of the video amplifier.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the GAIN SW page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select the item for the switch position,
then press the MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the GAIN
SW page.
Description
Sets the gain value
corresponding to the L position
of the GAIN selector.
GAIN MID Sets the gain value
corresponding to the M position
of the GAIN selector.
GAIN
Sets the gain value
HIGH
corresponding to the H position
of the GAIN selector.
GAIN
Sets the gain value
TURBO
corresponding to TURBO GAIN
function.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Item
GAIN
LOW
154
Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Item
TURBO
SW IND
SHOCKLESS
GAIN
3
Description
OFF: When you operate the
GAIN selector after
pressing the button to which
the TURBO GAIN function
has been assigned once, the
video gain is changed
according to the GAIN
selector operation.
ON: When the video gain is
boosted to the video gain to
the value preset by pressing
the button to which the
TURBO GAIN function has
been assigned once, the
video gain is not changed
even if you operate the
GAIN selector, until you
press the button once more.
Turns shockless gain on or off.
Item
SDI OUT 1
SELECT
SDI OUT 2
SELECT
SDI OUT 2
SUPER
TEST OUT
SELECT
Turn the MENU knob to select the gain
value, and press MENU knob.
Any of –6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36 or
42 dB can be set for each of the L, M, H, and
TURBO positions, in any sequence.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Selecting the output signals
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
1
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Display the OUTPUT 1 page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
OUTPUT 1 page.
Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches
You can assign the desired function to any of the
ASSIGN switches.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
TEST OUT
SUPER
Setting
Selects the signal output from
the SDI OUT1 connector.
OFF: Do not output video.
HD-SDI: Output HD-SDI.
SD-SDI: Output SD-SDI
Selects the signal output from
the SDI OUT2 connector.
OFF: Do not output video.
HD-SDI: Output HD-SDI.
SD-SDI: Output SD-SDI
Selects whether to superimpose
(ON) or not superimpose (OFF)
text information on the signal
output from the SDI OUT2
connector.
Selects the output signal from
the TEST OUT connector.
VBS: Output composite video
signal. When you select
VBS, connect to the
VIDEO IN connector of
your monitor.
Y: Output HD-Y signal.
R/G/B: Output HD RGB
signal.
LCD: Output a signal like the
display in the LCD
monitor.
Selects whether to superimpose
(ON) or not superimpose (OFF)
text information on the signal
output from the TEST OUT
connector.
Display the ASSIGNABLE page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
Adjustments and Settings From Menus
155
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
You can assign functions by using the
following items.
Item
ASSIGN SW
<1>
Description
Assigns the function to
ASSIGN 1 (push-type)
switch.
ASSIGN SW
Assigns the function to
<2>
ASSIGN 2 (slide-type)
switch.
ASSIGN SW
Assigns the function to
<3>
ASSIGN 3 (push-type)
switch.
ASSIGN SW
Assigns the function to
<4>
ASSIGN 4 (push-type)
switch.
ASSIGN SW
Assigning the function to
<RET>
RET button on the lens.
COLOR TEMP Assigning the function to
SW
COLOR TEMP. button.
2
Select the desired switch or button, and
press the MENU knob.
A selection screen for the selected switch or
button appears. You can use these screens to
assign one of the following functions.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1/
3/4 (push-type) switch, RET button on the
lens, or COLOR TEMP. button
Function
OFF
FRONT
MIC
Description
Assigns no function.
Assigns the function that switches
between stereo and monaural
when a stereo microphone is
connected.
PICTURE Assigns execution of recording in
CACHE
picture cache mode.
SUPER
Assigns the function of a switch
(VFDISP to select mixing or no mixing of
&MENU) superimposed viewfinder and
menu text data into the video
signals output from the SDI OUT
2 or TEST OUT connector, when
SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST
OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1
page of the OPERATION menu
are set to ON.
MARKER Assigns the ON/OFF function to
display all markers. a)
156
Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Function
Description
Assigns the function to delete the
last recorded clip.
b)
ATW
Assigns the ON/OFF function of
auto tracing white balance.
RETURN Assigns the ON/OFF function to
VIDEO
display the image of the return
video signal on the viewfinder to
RETAKE
LENS
RET
REC
SWITCH
TURBO
SWITCH
ZEBRA
COLOR
TEMP
SW
3200K
COLOR
TEMP
SW
4300K
COLOR
TEMP
SW
5600K
COLOR
TEMP
SW
6300K
CC 5600K
ZOOM
TELE/
WIDE d)
ZOOM
WIDE/
TELE d)
SHOT
MARK1
SHOT
MARK2
UA01 to
UA10 e)
the switch. c)
Assigns the same function as that
of the RET button on the lens and
other functions to the switch.
Assigns the recording start/stop
function to the switch.
Assigns the turbo gain function to
the switch.
Assigns the zebra pattern display
function to the switch.
Assigns the function to switch the
white balance to 3200K.
Assigns the function to switch the
white balance to 4300K.
Assigns the function to switch the
white balance to 5600K.
Assigns the function to switch the
white balance to 6300K.
Applies an electrical 5600 K filter.
When using a lens that supports
serial communications, assign the
ZOOM TELE setting to ASSIGN
3, and the WIDE setting to
ASSIGN 4.
When using a lens that supports
serial communications, assign the
ZOOM WIDE setting to ASSIGN
3, and the TELE setting to
ASSIGN 4.
Assigns the function to record a
SHOT MARK 1 essence mark.
Assigns the function to record a
SHOT MARK 2 essence mark.
Assigns the items assigned in the
ASSIGN SEL menu.
a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on
the MARKER page of the USER menu, the
ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches allow you to display or
not to display all markers.
b) This function cannot be assigned to the RET
button on the lens.
c) Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF
on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the
OPERATION menu, you can use this switch to
display the image of the return video signal on
the viewfinder.
d) Only the Assign 3 SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens
appear.
e) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the
Assign menu.
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2
(slide-type) switch
Function
OFF
FRONT
MIC
Content
Assigns no function.
Assigns the function that switches
between stereo and monaural
when a stereo microphone is
connected.
Assigns execution of recording in
picture cache mode.
ZEBRA
UA01 to
UA10 b)
Assigns the zebra pattern display
function to the switch.
Assigns the items assigned in the
ASSIGN SEL menu.
a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on
the MARKER page of the USER menu, the
ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or not to
display all markers.
b) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the
Assign menu.
Note
For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2
(slide-type) switch, you cannot change those
settings using other menus. The function assigned
3
Select the desired function, and press
the MENU knob.
The function is assigned, and the
ASSIGNABLE SW page appears again.
Operation of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches when
UA01 to UA10 are assigned
When an on/off switchable function (or menu
item) is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4
switches, each time the switch is pressed toggles
the function on or off.
When another type of menu item is assigned,
pressing the switch displays the item and its
setting value on the viewfinder screen.
You can then change the setting by pressing and
turning the MENU knob.
The viewfinder screen display disappears
approximately three seconds after the last
operation.
Setting power saving functions
You can limit the function of some output
connectors to save power consumption.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the POWER SAVE page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
POWER SAVE page.
Item
Description
ETHERNET/USB Enables or disables the
network connector and
USB connector.
Enables or disables the
i.LINK(FAM) a)
i.LINK connector (FAM
function).
REC AUDIO OUT Puts the AUDIO OUT
connectors in EE or
SAVE mode.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
PICTUR
E
CACHE
SUPER
Assigns the function of a switch to
(VFDISP select mixing or no mixing of
&MENU) superimposed viewfinder and
menu text data into the video
signals output from the SDI OUT
2 or TEST OUT connector, when
SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT
SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of
the OPERATION menu are set to
ON.
MARKE Assigns the ON/OFF function to
R
display all markers. a)
to the ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the
menu setting.
a) The unit must be powered off and on again to
enable changes to this setting.
Adjustments and Settings From Menus
157
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired setting, and press the MENU
knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Setting the color temperature
manually
Specifying an offset for the auto
white balance setting
By setting an offset for the value of auto white
balance, you can make the picture warmer or
colder.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
You can manually adjust the value of the white
balance by setting the color temperature.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
2
Display the WHITE page of the PAINT
menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
You can set the following items in the
OFFSET WHT page.
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
Item
Description
OFFSET
When this item is set to ON,
WHITE <A> the offset adjusted on this page
is added to the white balance
for channel A.
WARMWhen OFFSET WHITE <A>
COOL <A> is “ON”, sets the offset for the
white balance of channel A,
using the color temperature.
Adjust the value while looking
at the real image because error
tends to be bigger for
adjustment of high color
temperature.
WARMAdjusts the value more
COOL BAL precisely if the adjustment by
<A>
WARM-COOL <A> is not
satisfactory.
OFFSET
When this item is set to ON,
WHITE <B> the offset adjusted on this page
is added to the white balance
for channel B.
WARMWhen OFFSET WHITE <B>
COOL <B> is “ON”, sets the offset for the
white balance of channel B,
using the color temperature.
Adjust the value while looking
at the real image because error
tends to be bigger for
adjustment of high color
temperature.
You can set the following items on the
WHITE page.
Item
COLOR
TEMP <A>
Description
Sets the color temperature for
the desired value. Adjust the
value while looking at the real
image because error tends to be
bigger for adjustment of high
color temperature.
C TEMP
Adjusts the value more
BAL <A>
precisely when the color
temperature adjustment
through COLOR TEMP is not
satisfactory.
R GAIN <A> Changes only the value of R
GAIN.
B GAIN <A> Changes only the value of B
GAIN.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
158
Display the OFFSET WHT page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
The above table shows the adjustment of the
white balance of channel A. Items followed
by <B> are used to adjust the white balance
of channel B.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Adjustments and Settings From Menus
Item
WARMCOOL BAL
<B>
3
Description
Adjusts the value more
precisely if the adjustment by
WARM-COOL <B> is not
satisfactory.
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the
channel (A or B) that you want to set.
Note
If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B, the
adjusted value is not reflected in the video output
even though you carry out the following operation.
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
If you want to set the other channel, go back
to step 2.
Selecting the lens file
The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows
you to change the lens file according to the lens in
use.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the LENS FILE page of the
USER menu, and press the MENU
knob.
The LENS FILE page shows the name (F.ID)
of the currently selected lens file.
The lens name (L.ID) and manufacturer
(L.MF) appear when a lens that supports
serial communications is mounted.
U17 LENS FILE
LENS FILE SELECT:
TOP
1
F.ID:No Offset
<LENS INFORMATION>
L.ID: J16ax8B4 IRSD
L.MF: Canon
2
Select LENS FILE SELECT, and press
the MENU knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
What is a UMID?
The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a
unique identifier for audio-visual material
defined by the SMPTE330M-2003 standard.
The UMID may be used either as the 32-byte
Basic UMID or as the Extended UMID, which
includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to
make a total 64 bytes.
For details, refer to SMPTE 330M.
Globally unique ID is automatically recorded in
clip units.
The Extended UMID is metadata that provides
additional information such as location, time/
date, company and so on.
Using the Extended UMID
You have to enter a country code, organization
code and user code. Set the country code referring
to the ISO 3166 table, and set the organization
code and user code independently.
For details, see “About UMID ownership
information” (page 160).
Functions of UMID data
The UMID data enables the followings:
• Add a globally unique ID to every clip of audiovisual material. The unique ID is used to detect
the material source and to link it with the
original source material.
• Distinguishing between original material and
copied material. 00 is added to the Instance
Number for original material.
• Recording based on the UTC. The UTC is used
when recording the UMID. This enables
uniform control of source material recorded all
over the world based on the universal timecode.
• Calculating the date difference among source
materials. The source material is recorded based
on the MJD (Modified Julian Date), which
enables easy calculation of date difference
among source materials.
To set UMID ownership information
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
Setting the UMID data
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
Adjustments and Settings From Menus
159
1
Display the UMID SET page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Set the following item.
Item
COUNTRY CODE
ORGANIZATION
USER CODE
TIME ZONE
Contents
Country code
Organization code
User code
Time difference from
UTC
For details on how to enter characters, see
“Setting the shot ID” (page 152).
3
Press the MENU knob.
About UMID ownership information
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
COUNTRY CODE
Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string (4-byte
alphanumeric strings) according to the values
defined in ISO 3166-1.
There are about 240 country codes.
Find your own country code on the following
home page.
Refer to ISO 3166-1:
http://www.iso.org/iso/country-codes/
iso_3166_code_lists.htm
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the
active part of the code will occupy the first part of
the 4-bytes and the remainder must be filled with
the space character (20h).
Example: In the case of Japan
For Japan, if the country code is JP, it is 2 bytes,
if JPN, it is 3 bytes.
Thus, enter the following:
JP_ _
or
JPN _
where _ represents a space.
ORGANIZATION (organization code)
Enter an abbreviated 4-byte alphanumeric string
for the organization code.
Notes
• Organization codes must be acquired by applying to
the SMPTE registration office.
160
Adjustments and Settings From Menus
When no organization code has been acquired, it is
forbidden to enter an arbitrary string. As a rule, the
code “00” must be entered. Freelance operators who do
not belong to an origination should enter “~”.
• There are no problems in recording or playing back
audio-video signals, if ORGANIZATION is not set.
USER CODE
Enter the 4-byte alphanumeric strings for user
identification.
The user code is registered with each organization
locally. It is usually not centrally registered.
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, enter
the country code from the beginning of the 4
bytes and enter the space character (20h) in the
remaining strings.
This user code is determined by the organization.
The methods used depend on the organization.
Note
User code cannot be entered when no organization code
has been entered.
TIME ZONE
Set the time difference from UTC.
Notes
• The UTC is calculated based on the local time, using
the time zone. If the time zone is not set, the UTC is not
recorded correctly.
• When you change the time zone, adjust the internal
clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder
off and then the power on again.
Chapter
7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Handling the “Memory
Stick”
The “Memory Stick” can be inserted to or
removed from the camcorder with the power
turned on or off.
”Memory Sticks” usable with this
camcorder
With this camcorder, you can use a Sony
“Memory Stick”, “Memory Stick Duo”,
“Memory Stick PRO” whose capacity does not
exceed 4 GB, and “Memory Stick PRO Duo”.
For details, see “About a “Memory Stick”” on page
204.
Note
If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some
resistance when you insert it, the “Memory Stick” may
be turned around or upside down. Do not force the
“Memory Stick” into the slot. Confirm the direction of
the notch and arrow on the “Memory Stick” before
inserting the “Memory Stick” and then try inserting it
again.
To remove the “Memory Stick”
1
Check that the access indicator is not lit,
then gently press in the “Memory
Stick” once and release.
The “Memory Stick” pops out.
2
Pull the “Memory Stick” towards you
to withdraw it from the slot.
Note
Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while the access
indicator is lit. You may lose data, or damage the
“Memory Stick”.
Inserting a “Memory Stick”
To protect saved data
To prevent accidental erasure of important setup
data, slide the LOCK switch on the “Memory
Stick” right to the write protect position.
1
Open the cover of the menu operating
section.
2
Hold the “Memory Stick” with the
notch facing downward and the arrow
facing away from you, and insert the
“Memory Stick” into the “Memory
Stick” slot until it clicks into place. Then
close the cover.
It is now impossible to write or delete data on the
“Memory Stick”. If you try to do so, the message
“MEMORY STICK LOCKED” appears and the
data cannot be overwritten or deleted.
Note
“Memory Stick Duo” and “Memory Stick PRO Duo” do
not have this function.
To format a “Memory Stick”
Note
Do not format the “Memory Stick” using a PC.
Handling the “Memory Stick”
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Label
161
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the MEMORY STICK page of
the FILE menu, and press the MENU
knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select M.S. FORMAT, and press the
MENU knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Select “YES” and press the MENU
knob.
Saving and Recalling
User Files
The camcorder is equipped with a “Memory
Stick” slot, which enables you to save the settings
in the USER menu as a user file onto the
“Memory Stick”. You can load these files from
the “Memory Stick” for immediate recall of a
particular setting configuration.
In addition to user files, you can save scene files,
reference files, lens files and ALL files in a
“Memory Stick”.
When a menu is displayed, inserting a “Memory
Stick” displays the appropriate file-related menu
page automatically.
Saving user menu data to the
“Memory Stick”
You can save USER menu settings held in the
camcorder as user files in the “Memory Stick”.
You can save up to 100 user files in the “Memory
Stick”.
Insert the “Memory Stick” then proceed as
follows.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
162
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
?F01 USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
TOP
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID : ssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET
:
EXEC
To set a file ID for the data to be saved
Set the file ID before going to step 2.
For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the
file ID” on page 163.
Saving and Recalling User Files
2
Select USER FILE SAVE, and press the
MENU knob.
The USER SAVE page appears.
Up to 20 pages, from P00 to P19, can be used
to save user files to the “Memory Stick”.
Each page can hold up to five files.
3
Turn the MENU knob until the page
which contains the desired file number
appears, and press the MENU knob.
4
Select the desired file number, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO”
appears.
If a file number is followed by “NEW FILE”,
this means that the file is empty. If data is
stored in the file, the file number is followed
by the file name.
5
To carry out the save, select YES and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b
pointing to NO.
The access indicator lights. When the saving
is completed, the message “COMPLETE”
appears and the access indicator goes off.
If no “Memory Stick” has been inserted
The message “NO MEMORY STICK” will
appear. Insert a “Memory Stick” and carry
out the operation once again.
You can select the information displayed on
each USER SAVE or USER LOAD page.
For details, see “To select the file information
items to be displayed” on page 164.
About the USER menu settings to be saved in the
“Memory Stick”
Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu
are saved in the “Memory Stick” as a user file.
Error message
NO MEMORY
STICK
(flashing)
Cause
No “Memory
Stick” is
inserted.
MEMORY
STICK
LOCKED
The LOCK
switch on the
“Memory
Stick” is set to
the write
protect
position.
MEMORY
Circuit or
STICK ERROR “Memory
(flashing)
Stick” fault.
Action
Insert or
reinsert the
“Memory
Stick”.
Set the LOCK
switch to the
write enable
position.
Recheck and
consult a Sony
service
representative.
To set the file ID
You can set an file ID before you save your data
as a user file. This will help you identify the user
file quickly. The file ID that has been set is saved
together with the data.
Note
Set the file ID before saving data in the “Memory Stick”.
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select F. ID, and press the MENU knob.
A character table appears.
F01 USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
TOP
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID :? x
i#$%&'()*+,-./012345678
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
Saving and Recalling User Files
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
If you select a file number where data has
already been saved
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b
NO” appears.
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob
leaving b pointing to NO.
• To overwrite, select YES and press the
MENU knob.
If data cannot be saved
If one of the following error messages appears
during or after the save operation, then the data
was not saved.
163
3
Follow steps 3 and 4 described in
“Setting the shot ID” on page 152 to
enter characters.
4
When you have finished entering the
file ID, turn the MENU knob to move x
to END, and press the MENU knob.
Display type
ALL
F.ID
DATE
MODEL
The entered file ID is now displayed.
F01 USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
TOP
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
:
EXEC
Description
File ID (10 characters) and
date (year/month/day)
File ID (16 characters)
Date saved (year/month/day/
hours/minutes/seconds)
Information on the model
Loading saved data from a
“Memory Stick”
F.ID : ID-001
USER PRESET
Note
The data loaded from the “Memory Stick” overwrites the
data saved in the camcorder.
File ID that has been set appears.
When you carry out a user file save operation (see
page 162), the set file ID is saved to the “Memory
Stick” together with the data.
To select the file information items to be
displayed
You can select the user file information items to
be displayed on the USER FILE SAVE page and
USER FILE LOAD page (P00 to P19), that are
the pages used to save and call up the data to and
from “Memory Stick”.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
164
Display a USER FILE LOAD page or
USER FILE SAVE page of the USER
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select the DISPLAY MODE, and press
the MENU knob.
3
Select the desired type of file
information, and press the MENU
knob.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select USER FILE LOAD, and press
the MENU knob.
The USER LOAD page appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob until the page
which contains the desired file number
appears, then press the MENU knob.
4
Select the desired file number, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “LOAD OK? YES b
NO”appears.
5
To carry out the load, select YES and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b
pointing to NO.
The access indicator lights.
When the load is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears and the access
indicator goes off.
If data cannot be loaded
If one of the following error messages appears
during or after the load operation, then the data
was not loaded.
Saving and Recalling User Files
Error
message
NO
MEMORY
STICK
(flashing)
MEMORY
STICK
ERROR
(flashing)
FILE
ERROR
(flashing)
Cause
Action
No “Memory
Stick” is
inserted.
Insert or reinsert
the “Memory
Stick”.
Circuit or
Recheck, and
“Memory Stick” consult a Sony
fault.
service
representative.
The “Memory
Data saved to a
Stick” contains “Memory Stick”
data that cannot using a
be loaded into
camcorder
this camcorder. whose model is
not the same as
this camcorder
cannot be loaded
into this
camcorder.
Returning the user file settings to
the standard settings
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select USER PRESET, and press the
MENU knob.
Saving and Loading
Scene Files
You can save various settings for shooting a
particular scene as a scene file. By loading the
scene file, you can quickly recreate setup
conditions suitable for the scene. You can save up
to five scene files in the camcorder memory and
up to 100 scene files in a “Memory Stick” .
You can also load data from the “Memory Stick”
into the camcorder memory.
Data that can be saved in a scene file
You can save the following data in a scene file:
• Values adjusted using the PAINT menu
• Shutter speed settings made in the standard
mode and ECS mode
• The white balance data included in a scene file
depends on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting
on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu.
Saving a scene file
To save a scene file to the “Memory Stick”, insert
the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot
before starting the following operation.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
?F04 SCENE FILE
TOP
s1
:STANDARD
s2
:STANDARD
s3
:STANDARD
s4
:STANDARD
s5
:STANDARD
s STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID: STANDARD
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
To set a file ID for the data to be saved
Set the file ID before going to step 2.
For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the
file ID” on page 163.
Saving and Loading Scene Files
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
For details on menu operation, see “Basic menu
operations” on page 140.
165
2
3
Select SCENE STORE, and press the
MENU knob.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
The SCENE STORE page appears.
1
Press the MENU knob, then select the
desired file number, and press the
MENU knob again.
The file to be saved is selected.
When no “Memory Stick” is inserted
Select the desired memory number, and press
the MENU knob.
When the save is completed, the SCENE
FILE page appears again.
When you select a file number where data
has already been saved
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b
NO” appears.
• To cancel the overwriting, press the MENU
knob leaving b pointing to NO.
• To overwrite, select YES and press the
MENU knob.
When a “Memory Stick” is inserted
You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20,
to save scene files in the “Memory Stick”.
Each page can hold up to five files.
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
166
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page
which contains the desired file number
appears, then press the MENU knob.
2 Select the desired file number, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “STORE OK? YES b
NO” appears.
3 To carry out the save, select YES and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob
leaving b pointing to NO.
You can select the file information items
to be displayed on each page of SCENE
STORE and SCENE RECALL.
For details, see “To select the file information
items to be displayed” on page 164.
To save scene files stored in the
camcorder memory to the “Memory
Stick”
The five scene files stored in the camcorder
memory can be saved to the “Memory Stick” all
in a single operation.
Saving and Loading Scene Files
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select SCENE STORE, and press the
MENU knob.
One of the SCENE STORE pages appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired SCENE STORE page, and
press the MENU knob.
4
Select 5FILE SAVE B MEM1-5, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “STORE OK? YES b
NO”appears.
5
To carry out the save, select YES and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b
pointing to NO.
When the save is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
Note
If files have been saved in the page selected in step 3,
those files are replaced with files loaded from the
camcorder memory. For example, files from 001 to 005
are replaced by the above procedure.
To set the file ID
You can set an file ID before you save your data
as a scene file. This will help you identify the
scene file quickly. The file ID that has been set is
saved together with the data.
You can carry out a scene file ID setting operation
on the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.
For details about this operation, see the description
of step 2 and following of “To set the file ID” on
page 163.
1 Select SCENE RECALL, and press the
MENU knob.
The SCENE RECALL page appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob until the page
which contains the desired file number
appears, then press the MENU knob.
3 Select the desired file number, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “RECALL OK? YES b
NO” appears.
To select the file information items to be
displayed
You can select the items of file information to be
displayed on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to
P20) or the SCENE RECALL pages (P01 to P20)
used for saving data to or loading data from a
“Memory Stick”.
You can select the scene file information items to
be displayed on the SCENE STORE page and
SCENE RECALL page of the SCENE FILE
menu.
3
For details about item selection, see the description
of step 2 and following of “To select the file
information items to be displayed” on page 164.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b
pointing to NO.
When the loading is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears. The camcorder is
set up according to the loaded scene file. If no
file is present with a particular file number,
this is shown as “NO FILE”.
Loading scene files
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
2
To carry out the recall, select YES and
press the MENU knob.
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
To load scene files from the “Memory
Stick” into the camcorder memory
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
You can load up to five scene files stored in the
“Memory Stick” into the camcorder memory all
in a single operation.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
To load the scene file stored in the
camcorder, select the desired file
number, and press the MENU knob.
s on the left of the file number changes to
x. The camcorder is set up according to the
loaded scene file.
F04 SCENE FILE
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
TOP
2
Select SCENE RECALL, and press the
MENU knob.
The SCENE RECALL page appears.
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
To cancel the selected scene file
Turn the MENU knob to move b to x, and
press the MENU knob again. x changes to
s. The camcorder returns to the settings
before selecting this scene file.
To load a scene file saved in the “Memory
Stick”
3
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE
RECALL page which contains the
desired scene files appears, and press
the MENU knob.
4
Select 5FILE LOAD b MEM1-5, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “RECALL OK? YES b NO”
appears.
Saving and Loading Scene Files
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
s1
:SCENE 25
x2
:SCENE 26
s3
:SCENE 27
s4
:SCENE 28
s5
:NO FILE
s STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID :SCENE21
1
167
P01 SCENE RECALL
ESC
RECALL OK?
YES NO
DISPLAY MODE
:
ALL
001.SCENE1
002.SCENE2
003.NO FILE
004.SCENE4
005.SCENE5
***.5FILE LOAD
5
Jumping to a File-Related
Menu Page When Inserting
a “Memory Stick”
MEM1-5
To carry out the load (recall), select
YES and press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b
pointing to NO.
When loading is complete, the message
“COMPLETE” appears and the access
indicator goes off.
Notes
• The scene files loaded from the “Memory Stick”
overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory.
• To load the scene file saved in the camcorder
memory when the “Memory Stick” is inserted,
return to the P00 SCENE RECALL page and load
the desired scene file in the camcorder memory.
• When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO
FILE”), an existing file of the same number is
unaffected. In the example shown in step 4,
MEM3 is not overwritten.
A “Memory Stick” enables you to save user files,
scene files, lens files, reference files and ALL
files.
The camcorder menu system allows you to make
a setting so that when a “Memory Stick” holding
these files is inserted while in menu operating
mode, a menu page relating to the desired file is
automatically displayed on the screen. Thus you
can proceed to file operation quickly. This is very
convenient especially when you manage data files
using “Memory Stick”s.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Setting
OFF
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
168
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
USER
ALL
SCENE
LENS
REFER
USER 1
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
2
Select STANDARD, and press the
MENU knob.
s displayed on the left of STANDARD
changes to x. When x changes to s once
again, the settings of the camcorder are reset
to the standard settings.
If you press the MENU knob again while x
is displayed, the operation is cancelled and
the camcorder returns to the settings before
STANDARD was selected.
Select MS IN > JUMP TO, and press the
MENU knob.
The MS IN > JUMP TO page allows you to
select one of the following settings.
Returning the scene file settings
to the standard settings
1
Display the MEMORY STICK page of
the FILE menu, and press the MENU
knob.
3
Description
Disables this function. Menu pages
do not change when a “Memory
Stick” is inserted.
Jumps to the USER FILE page.
Jumps to the ALL FILE page.
Jumps to the SCENE FILE page.
Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page.
Jumps to the REFERENCE page.
Jumps to the USER 1 FILE page.
Turn the MENU knob until the name of
the desired file page appears, then press
the MENU knob.
Notes
In the following cases, jumping to the target page is
impossible.
• When the power is turned on after you insert a
“Memory Stick”.
• When OFF is selected on the MS IN > JUMP TO page.
Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”
• When any of the following menu pages is already
displayed.
- A file-related page such as the USER FILE page of
the FILE menu
- MEMORY STICK, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE,
LENS FILE, REFERENCE or ROM VERSION
page
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”
169
Chapter
8 File Operations
Overview
root a)
INDEX.XML
ALIAS.XML b)
DISCMETA.XML
A remote computer can be connected to this unit
and used to operate on recorded data which has
been saved in data files, such as video and audio
data files.
There are two ways to connect a remote
computer.
• FAM connection
Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector on this
unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the
remote computer, using an i.LINK cable (see
page 174).
• FTP connection
Connect the network connectors on this unit and
the remote computer, using a network cable (see
page 178).
MEDIAPRO.XML
SYSPRO.XML
Clip
C0001.MXF
C0001M01.XML
C0002.MXF
C0002M01.XML
C0003.MXF
C0003M01.XML
Edit
E0001E01.SMI
Directory structure
The following figure shows the directory
structure of discs visible to a remote computer.
Note
This structure is not the same as the actual structure
recorded on the disc.
E0001M01.XML
E0002E01.SMI
E0002M01.XML
Sub
C0001S01.MXF
C0002S01.MXF
C0003S01.MXF
General
Chapter 8 File Operations
a) Root directory
b) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING
page of the OPERATION menu is set to “FREE”
170
File operation restrictions
This section explains which operations are
possible on files stored in each directory.
When required, the following operation tables
distinguish reading and writing from partial
reading and writing.
Overview
Read: Read data sequentially from the start to the
end of the file.
Partial read: Read only a part of the data in the
file.
Write: Write data sequentially from the start to
the end of the file.
Partial write: Write data to a part of the file only.
Root directory
File name
INDEX.XML
ALIAS.XML a)
DISCMETA.XML
MEDIAPRO.XML
SYSPRO.XML
Other files
Content
Operations
Read/
Write/
Partial
Partial
read
write
Contains data for management Yes
No
of the material on the disc.
Contains conversion tables for Yes
No
assigning user-defined names
to clips and clip lists.
Contains metadata to indicate Yes
Yes b)
the disc properties.
Contains a list of materials on Yes
No
the disc, basic properties,
related information, and
information about access
methods.
Contains system setting
Yes
No
information and menu setting
information for the devices.
Files other than the above
No
a) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING
page of the OPERATION menu is set to “FREE”.
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.
Rename
Create
Delete
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
-
No
-
Notes
• Directories cannot be created in the root directory.
• The directories in the root directory (Clip, Edit, Sub,
and General) cannot be deleted or renamed.
Clip directory
File name
C*.MXF a)
Other files
Clip file created by recording
(MXF file)
*: 0001 to 9999
Metadata file generated
automatically when C*.MXF
file is created.
*: 0001 to 9999
Files other than the above
a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.
b) Overwriting is not possible.
c) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length, in
a format matching the format (system frequency
(59.94i, 50i, or 25P)) and recording format (MPEG
HD422 and number of audio channels) of the recorded
Operations
Read/
Write/
Partial
Partial
read
write
Yes
No b), c)
Rename
Create
Delete
Yes
Yes c)
Yes d)
Yes
Yes e)
No f)
No g)
No h)
-
No
-
No
-
sections of the disc, and which can be overwritten by
XDCAM.
d) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to
enable recording. Any clip may be selected and
deleted.
e) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.
Overview
Chapter 8 File Operations
C*M01.XML a)
Content
171
f) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is
changed, a C*M01.XML file with the same name in
the “C*” part is also changed automatically.
g) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*M01.XML file
with the same name in the “C*” part is created
automatically.
h) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*M01.XML file
with the same name in the “C*” part is also deleted
automatically.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory.
Edit directory
File name
E*E01.SMI a)
E*M01.XML a)
Other files
Content
Clip list file
*: 0001 to 0099
Metadata file generated
automatically when
E*E01.SMI file is created.
*: 0001 to 0099
Files other than the above
Operations
Read/
Write/
Partial
Partial
read
write
Yes
Yes b)
Rename
Create
Delete
Yes
Yes c)
Yes d)
Yes
Yes b)
No e)
No f)
No g)
-
No
-
No
-
a) The “E*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. Partial
writing is not possible.
c) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.
d) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to
enable recording.
e) When the “E*” part of a E*E01.SMI is changed, an
E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part
is also changed automatically.
f) When an E*E01.SMI file is created, an E*M01.XML
file with the same name in the “E*” part is also
generated automatically.
g) When an E*E01.SMI file is deleted, an E*M01.XML
file with the same name in the “E*” part is also deleted
automatically.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory.
Sub directory
File name
C*S01.MXF a)
Other files
Content
Proxy AV data (MXF file)
generated automatically when
a C*.MXF file is created.
*: 0001 to 9999
Files other than the above
-
Chapter 8 File Operations
a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.
b) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is
changed, a C*S01.MXF file with the same name in the
“C*” part is generated automatically.
c) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*S01.MXF file
with the same name in the “C*” part is generated
automatically.
d) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*S01.MXF file
with the same name in the “C*” part is also deleted
automatically.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory.
172
Overview
Operations
Read/
Write/
Partial
Partial
read
write
Yes
No
No
Rename
Create
Delete
No b)
No c)
No d)
-
No
-
General directory
File name
Content
Any file
Operations
Read/
Write/
Partial
Partial
read
write
Yes
Yes
Rename
Create
Delete
Yes a)
Yes
Yes b)
a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length.
(Depending on the character type, file names
(including extension) may be limited to 21
characters.)
b) Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to
enable recording.
The following directory operations are possible in the
General directory.
• Directory creation (up to 64 levels, including the
General directory)
• Deletion and renaming of directories
Notes
• The maximum number of files that can be created on
one disc, including directories, is 5000 for a singlelayer disc and 6000 for a dual-layer disc.
• File names and directory names can use letters,
numbers, and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 (UTF-8)
character set. 1)
However, the following control characters and
symbols cannot be used.
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F
- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ', ?, \, |
• To create a new directory in the General directory, first
create a directory on the desktop and rename it using
only characters that can be used on this unit. Then drag
it from the desktop and drop it in the General directory.
1) The following character codes cannot be used by FAM
connections.
U+010000, U+020000, U+030000, U+040000,
U+050000, U+060000, U+070000, U+080000,
U+090000, U+0A0000, U+0B0000, U+0C0000,
U+0D0000, U+0E0000, U+0F0000, U+100000
Chapter 8 File Operations
Overview
173
File Operations in File
Access Mode (for
Windows)
File access mode operating environment
column is displayed, allowing you to check the
version of ProDisc.
To enable FAM connections over the i.LINK
connector
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Operating system requirements for file operations
by file access mode (called FAM below) are as
follows.
Computer operating system: Microsoft
Windows XP Professional SP2 or higher, or
Microsoft Windows Vista Business/Ultimate
(32 bit)
Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the
POWER SAVE page of the
OPERATION menu, then press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
U07 POWER SAVE
Note
64-bit editions of Windows Vista are not supported.
TOP
ETHERNET/USB
iLINK(FAM)
:
:
DSABL
DSABL
REC AUDIO OUT
:
EE
Preparations
Install the FAM driver on the remote computer.
To install the FAM driver
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM
Application Software) into the CD-ROM drive of
your computer, navigate to the FAM Driver
directory, and run the installer in the directory for
your operating system, then follow the
installation instructions.
2
Move b to i.LINK(FAM) then press the
MENU knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select
“ENABL”, then press the MENU knob.
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the
CD-ROM disc.
4
The message “Valid after power off.”
appears.
Note
Use Version 2.02 or higher of the FAM driver. The FAM
driver on the supplied CD-ROM is Version 2.02 or
higher.
If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer,
check the version (see the next section).
The setting made in step 3 is enabled.
Making FAM connections
1
To check the FAM driver version
Chapter 8 File Operations
174
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows)
If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put
the unit into the following state.
Recording, playback, search and other
disc operations: Stopped
THUMBNAIL indicator: Off
Disc access by clip deletion, disc
formatting, or other operation:
Stopped
Picture Cache function: Off
MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear
For Windows XP:
Select Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs
> ProDisc, and click on “Click here for support
information.”
For Windows Vista:
(1) Select Control Panel > Programs, open the
Programs and Features window, right click in the
window’s header bar (including the Name,
Publisher, and other headers), and select Others...
(2) In the Choose Details dialog, check the
Version check box and click OK. The Version
Power the camcorder off, and then
power it on again.
2
If this unit is connected to a remote
computer by FTP, log out from the FTP
session (see page 179).
3
Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector
on this unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394)
connector on the remote computer,
using an i.LINK cable.
Notes
• If you power this unit off during a FAM
connection, the data transferred thus far is
discarded.
• All file operations are not possible for some types
of files.
Windows recognizes this unit as a removable
disc, and displays one of the following icons
on the remote computer’s taskbar:
For details, see “File operation restrictions”
(page 170).
• Windows XP:
• Windows Vista:
The remote computer is now able to perform
file operations when a disc is inserted into
this unit.
To eject discs from a remote computer
Right click the icon representing this unit in
Explorer, and select Eject from the menu which
appears.
Note
You will not be able to log in if you put the unit into
the state described in step 1 after connecting the
cable. To log in, disconnect the cable, put the unit
into the state described in step 1, and connect it
again.
When you make your first FAM connection
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog appears
when you connect this unit to your computer.
Select “Install the software automatically
(Recommended)”, and then click the Next button.
Click the Finish button when the software
installation finishes.
Operation limitations during FAM connections
• With the exception of the EJECT button,
recording buttons and playback control buttons
are disabled.
• VDR of this unit cannot be controlled from
devices connected to the REMOTE connector
(8-pin) and (i.LINK) S400 connector.
Exiting file operations
Note
Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to
3.
1
• Double click.
• Right click to display the context menu and
select “Safely Remove Hardware” from the
context menu.
The Safely Remove Hardware dialog
appears.
2
3
4
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as
required.
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows)
Chapter 8 File Operations
Use Explorer to perform file operations
on the disc loaded in this unit.
You can operate in the same way that you
operate on local drives and files on network
computers.
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-700 IEEE
1394 SBP2 Device” and click “OK”.
In Windows XP, “Sony XDCAM PDW-700
IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device” is deleted from the
list of hardware devices.
In Windows Vista, the message “This device
can be safely removed from your computer.”
appears.
This unit can now resume normal operations.
(The limitations described in “Operation
limitations during FAM connections” on
page 175 no longer apply.)
Start Explorer.
Check that a drive letter has been assigned to
this unit. (The drive letter will differ
depending on the number of other peripherals
connected to the remote computer.)
2
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-700 IEEE
1394 SBP2 Device” and click “Stop”.
The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears.
Operating on files
1
Do one of the following on the
or
icon displayed in the remote computer’s
taskbar.
175
To make a reconnection
To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one
of the following, depending on whether an
i.LINK cable is connected.
i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit
and a remote computer with an i.LINK cable.
i.LINK cable is connected: Disconnect the
i.LINK cable from either this unit or the
remote computer, wait for at least 10
seconds, and then reconnect the disconnected
cable.
The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is
connected: Power the unit on.
File Operations in File
Access Mode (for
Macintosh)
File access mode operating environment
Operating system requirements for file operations
by file access mode are as follows.
Computer operating system: Mac OS X
v10.4.11 or higher
Preparations
Do the following on the remote computer and this
unit.
• Install the FAM driver on the remote computer
(see the next item).
• Set i.LINK(FAM) on the POWER SAVE page
of the OPERATION menu to “ENABL” (see
page 157).
To install the FAM driver
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM
Application Software) into the CD-ROM drive of
your computer, and execute the FAM Driver
>Mac >dmg file of the FAM Driver, then follow
the installation instructions.
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the
CD-ROM disc.
To check the FAM driver version
Connect this unit to your computer with an
i.LINK cable, and then, with a disc loaded, start
the system profiler utility of the application. The
version appears to the right of “prodisk_fs” when
you select “Advanced Functions” under
“Software”.
Making FAM connections
Chapter 8 File Operations
176
1
If there is a disc loaded in this unit, put
the unit into the following state.
Recording, playback, search and other
disc operations: Stopped
THUMBNAIL indicator: Off
Disc access by clip deletion, disc
formatting, or other operation:
Stopped
Picture Cache function: Off
MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh)
For details, see “File operation restrictions”
(page 170).
Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear
2
3
If this unit is connected to a remote
computer by FTP, log out from the FTP
session (see page 179).
Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector
on this unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394)
connector on the remote computer,
using an i.LINK cable.
When a disc is inserted into this unit, the
remote computer recognizes this unit as a
removable disc. The following icon appears
in the Finder on the remote computer,
indicating that the computer is now able to
perform file operations.
Operation limitations during FAM connections
• With the exception of the EJECT button,
recording buttons and playback control buttons
are disabled.
• Do not use the EJECT button to eject discs.
Always eject discs from the computer.
• Do not disconnect the i.LINK cable during a
FAM connection. Doing so may result in
unstable operation. Always eject any loaded
disc before disconnecting the i.LINK cable.
Operating on files
1
To eject discs from a remote computer
Click the eject button to the right of the icon for
this unit in the Finder, or drag the icon for this unit
from the Finder to the Trash.
Exiting file operations
Note
Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1
and 2.
1
Eject the disc by clicking the eject
button to the right of the icon for this
unit in the Finder, or by dragging the
icon for this unit from the Finder to the
Trash.
2
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as
required.
To make a reconnection
To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one
of the following, depending on whether an
i.LINK cable is connected.
i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit
and a remote computer with an i.LINK cable.
i.LINK cable is connected: The unit is mounted
automatically, so you do not need to do
anything.
The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is
connected: Power the unit on.
Start the Finder.
Check to be sure that a drive has been
assigned to this unit.
2
Operate from the Finder on the files on
the disc in this unit.
Chapter 8 File Operations
You can operate in the same way that you
operate on local drives and files on network
computers.
Notes
• If you power this unit off during a FAM
connection, the data transferred thus far is
discarded.
• All file operations are not possible for some types
of files.
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh)
177
U07 POWER SAVE
FTP File Operations
File operations between this unit and a remote
computer can be carried out by the File Transfer
Protocol (called FTP below).
Preparations
1
2
Connect the network connectors of this
unit and a remote computer with a
network cable. Or connect this unit to
the network to which the remote
computer is connected.
On the NETWORK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, set the IP
address and other network setting items
for this unit. 1)
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 140.
If network settings have already been
made
Check the IP address of this unit.
1) This unit is able to acquire an IP address
automatically from a DHCP server. It also
supports an Auto-IP function to assign an IP
address automatically when access from this unit
to the DHCP server times out. You can check
DHCP settings and the assigned IP address on the
NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE
menu.
3
Chapter 8 File Operations
178
TOP
ETHERNET/USB
iLINK(FAM)
:
:
DSABL
DSABL
REC AUDIO OUT
:
EE
4
Move b to ETHERNET/USB then press
the MENU knob.
5
Turn the MENU knob to select
“ENABL”, then press the MENU knob.
Making FTP connections
FTP connections between this unit and a remote
computer can be made with either of the
following.
• The command prompt
• FTP client software
This section explains how to use the command
prompt. For more information about using FTP
client software, refer to the documentation of the
FTP client software on your system.
To log in
If this unit is connected to a remote computer with
a FAM connection, first exit file operations on the
FAM connection (see page 175).
1
Load a disc into this unit and put the
unit into the following state.
Recording, playback, serch, and other disc
operations: Stopped
THUMBNAIL indicator: Off
Disc access by clip deletion, disc
formatting, or other operation:
Stopped
Picture Cache function: Off
MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear
Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the
POWER SAVE page of the
OPERATION menu, then press the
MENU knob.
Note
Login is not possible unless the unit is in the state
described above.
2
FTP File Operations
Start the command prompt.
3
Enter “ftp <SP> <IP address>”, and
press the Enter key. (<SP> refers to a
space.)
For example, if the IP address of this unit is
set to 192.168.001.010, enter “ftp
192.168.1.10”.
Refer to the Windows help for more information
about the FTP command.
If the connection succeeds, you are prompted
to enter a user name.
4
Enter the user name “admin” and press
the Enter key.
When the user name is verified, your are
prompted to enter a password.
5
Enter the password and press the Enter
key.
The password is set to “pdw-700” when the
unit is shipped from the factory.
The login is complete when the password is
verified.
See “Command list” (page 179) for the protocol
supported by this unit.
If the connection times out
This unit terminates FTP connections if no
command is received within 90 seconds of
the last command. If this occurs, log out (see
the next section) and repeat steps 2 to 4.
Note
If you power this unit off during an FTP connection,
the data transferred thus far is discarded.
To log out
To log out after finishing file operations, enter
“QUIT” at the command prompt and press the
Enter key.
This unit supports standard protocol (see the next
section), and extended protocol (see page 182).
Notes
• To execute FTP commands, you must install
application software such as PDZ-1 on your computer.
• The commands supported by application software
vary.
• An FTP client that supports UTF-8 is required to use
Unicode characters other than ASCII characters.
Standard commands
In the command syntax column, <SP> means a
space, entered by pressing the space bar, and
<CRLF> means a new line, entered by pressing
the Enter key.
USER
Send this command to begin the login process.
Syntax: USER <SP> <username> <CRLF>
Input example: USER admin
PASS
After sending the USER command, send this command
to complete the login process.
Syntax: PASS <SP> <password> <CRLF>
Input example: PASS pdw-700
QUIT
Terminates the FTP connection. If a file is being
transferred, terminates after completion of the
transfer.
Syntax: QUIT <CRLF>
PORT
Specifies the IP address and port to which this unit
should connect for the next file transfer (for data transfer
from this unit).
Syntax: PORT <SP> <h1,h2,h3,h4,p1,p2>
<CRLF>
h1 (most significant byte) to h4 (least
significant byte): IP address
p1 (most significant byte), p2 (least
significant byte): Port address
Input example: PORT 10,0,0,1,242,48
(IP address: 10.0.0.1, Port number: 62000)
PASV
This command requests this unit to “Listen” on a data
port (which is not its default data port). It puts this unit
into passive mode, waiting for the remote computer to
make a data connection.
Syntax: PASV <CRLF>
TYPE
Specifies the type of data to be transferred.
Syntax: TYPE <SP> <type-code (options
delimited by <SP>)> <CRLF>
FTP File Operations
Chapter 8 File Operations
Command list
Command prompt FTP commands do not support
UTF-8.
179
<type-code> can be any of the following. However,
for XDCAM, data is always transferred as “I”,
regardless of the type-code specification.
• A: ASCII
- N: Non-print
- T: Telnet format
- C: ASA Carriage Control
• E: EBCDIC
- N: Non-print
- T: Telnet format
- C: ASA Carriage Control
• I: IMAGE (Binary) (default)
• L: LOCAL BYTE
- SIZE: byte size
Input example: TYPE I
STRU
Specifies the data structure.
Syntax: STRU <SP> <structure-code> <CRLF>
<structure-code> can be any of the following.
However, for XDCAM, the structure is always “F”,
regardless of the structure-code specification.
• F: File structure (default)
• R: Record structure
• P: Page structure
Input example: STRU F
MODE
Specifies the transfer mode.
Syntax: MODE <SP> <mode-code> <CRLF>
<mode-code> can be any of the following.
However, for XDCAM, the mode is always “S”,
regardless of the mode-code specification.
• S: Stream mode (default)
• B: Block mode
• C: Compressed mode
Input example: MODE S
• No specification: A list of the files in the current
directory.
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?”
(any character) may be used in <path-name>.
Input example 1: LIST -a Clip
Input example 2: LIST Clip/*.MXF
NLST
Sends a list of file names from this unit to the remote
computer, with no other information.
Syntax: NLST <SP> <options or path-name>
<CRLF>
The following options may be specified when no
path name is specified.
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “.”
• -I: Display information other than file name
(gives the same result as the LIST command).
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.
The following data is transferred, depending on
whether <path-name> specifies a directory or file.
• Directory specified: A list of the file names only
in the specified directory
• No specification: A list of the file names only in
the current directory.
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?”
(any character) may be used in <path-name>.
Input example 1: NLST-I
Input example 2: NLST Clip/*.MXF
RETR
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on
this unit to the current directory on the remote computer.
Syntax:RETR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Input example: RETR Clip/C0001.MXF
STOR
LIST
Chapter 8 File Operations
180
Sends a list of files from this unit to the remote computer.
Syntax: LIST <SP> <options> <SP> <path-name>
<CRLF>
<options> can be any of the following.
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “·”.
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.
The following data is transferred, depending on
whether <path-name> specifies a directory or file.
• Directory specified: A list of the files in the
specified directory
• File specified: Information about the specified
file
FTP File Operations
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on
the remote computer to the current directory on this unit.
Depending on the type of file transferred, the following
items are created.
• C*.MXF file 1), 3)
- C*M01.XML file (metadata)
- C*S01.MXF file (proxy AV data)
- For C*.MXF files, the UMID of the copy source file
is not saved. However, it is saved if an immediately
preceding SITE UMMD extended command has
been issued.
• E*E01.SMI file 2), 3)
- E*M01.XML file (metadata)
1) *: 0001 to 9999
2) *: 0001 to 0099
3) The unit can handle files with user-defined names in
the “C*” and “E*”parts.
Notes
• For C*.MXF files, some data, such as file header
metadata, may be missing.
• Depending on the transfer destination directory and the
file type, transfer may not be possible.
• For C*.MXF files, the UMID of the copy source file is
not saved. However, it is saved if an immediately
preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been
issued.
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
170).
Syntax: STOR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Input example: STOR Edit/E0001E01.SMI
RNFR
RNTO
Rename a file. Specify the file to be renamed with the
RNFR command, and specify the new name with the
RNTO command. (Always follow a RNFR command
with a RNTO command.)
Syntax: RNFR <SP> <path-name (before
change)> <CRLF>
RNTO <SP> <path-name (after change)>
<CRLF>
Input example: RNFR General/info.txt
RNTO General/clip_info.txt
DELE
Deletes the specified file on this unit.
Note
Depending on the directory and file type, deletion may
not be possible.
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
170).
Syntax: DELE <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Input example: DELE Clip/C0099.MXF
Sends information about properties of the specified file,
or about data transfer status, from this unit to the remote
computer.
The following property information is sent, depending
on the file type.
• MXF file
- File name
- File type
- CODEC type
- Frame rate
- Number of audio channels
The following data is transferred, depending on
whether a file is specified with <path-name>.
• File specified: The properties of the specified
file
• No specification: The size of the data transferred
thus far (unit: bytes)
Input example: STAT Clip/C0001.MXF
ABOR
Requests this unit to abort a file transfer currently in
progress.
Syntax: ABOR <CRLF>
SYST
Displays the system name of this unit.
Syntax: SYST <CRLF>
HELP
Displays a list of the commands supported by this unit,
or an explanation of the specified command.
Syntax: HELP <SP> <command-name> <CRLF>
The following data is transferred, depending on
whether a command name is specified with
<command-name>.
• Command name specified: Explanation of the
specified command.
• No specification: Command list
• Input example: HELP RETR
NOOP
Does nothing except return a response. (Used to check
whether this unit is running.)
Syntax: NOOP <CRLF>
PWD
Displays the current directory (“/” if the directory is the
root directory).
Syntax: PWD <CRLF>
CWD
Changes the current directory (moves from the current
directory to another directory).
Syntax: CWD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
FTP File Operations
Chapter 8 File Operations
STAT
- Duration
- UMID
• non-MXF file
- File name
Syntax: STAT <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
181
Moves to a directory as follows, depending on
whether a directory is specified with <path-name>.
• Directory specified: To the specified directory
• No specification: To the root directory
Input example: CWD General
CDUP
Moves one level up in the directory structure (makes the
parent of the current directory be the current directory).
Syntax: CDUP <CRLF>
MKD
Syntax: SITE REPF <SP> <path-name> <SP>
<start-frame> <SP> <transfer-size>
<CRLF>
<start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of
the file. Data is transferred from the video frame at
the offset (the first frame is 0).
<transfer-size> specifies the number of video
frames to transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of
the file).
Input example: SITE REPF Clip/C0001.MXF 5
150 (Transfer C0001.MXF. Body data is
transferred only from frame 6 to frame
150.)
Creates a new directory.
Note
Directories can be created only in the General directory.
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
170).
Syntax: MKD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
SITE REPFL
Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to
the remote computer. This command allows you to
specify a segment in the body of the MXF file (composed
of video and audio data), for transfer of the required
segment only.
Note
RMD
A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified.
Deletes a directory.
Note
Directories can be deleted only in the General directory.
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
170).
Syntax: RMD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Extended commands
In the command syntax column, <SP> means a
space, entered by pressing the space bar, and
<CRLF> means a new line, entered by pressing
the Enter key.
SITE REPF
Chapter 8 File Operations
Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to
the remote computer. This command allows you to
specify a segment in the body of the MXF file (composed
of video and audio data), for transfer of the required
segment only.
Notes
• A segment greater than the file size cannot be
specified.
• This command cannot be used when the path name
contains a space. Use the SITE REPFL command
instead.
Syntax: SITE REPFL <SP> “<path-name>” <SP>
<start-frame> <SP> <transfer-size>
<CRLF>
<path-name> specifies the path name of the file to
transfer. Enclose the path name in double quotation
marks.
<start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of
the file. Data is transferred from the video frame at
the offset (the first frame is 0).
<transfer-size> specifies the number of video
frames to transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of
the file).
Input example: SITE REPFL “Clip/sakura
0001.MXF 5” 150 (Transfer sakura
0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only
from frame 6 to frame 150.)
SITE FSTS
Acquires the system status of this unit.
One of the following status codes is sent.
0: Initial state, or no disc is loaded.
1: File system mount is OK.
3: File system mount is not OK.
Syntax: SITE FSTS <CRLF>
SITE MEID
Acquires the media ID of the disc loaded in this unit.
182
FTP File Operations
Syntax: SITE MEID <CRLF>
SITE FUNC
Acquires the function and version of the expanded
commands.
Information is sent in the following format.
<main function> <SP> <branch function> <SP>
<branch function version>
For XDCAM, sent in a format like “200 MXF DISK 1”
(200 is a response code).
Syntax: SITE FUNC <CRLF>
SITE UMMD
When C*.MXF file is sent with the STOR, the copy
source UMID is saved if this command is invoked
immediately before the STOR command.
Syntax: SITE UMMD <CRLF>
SITE DF
Acquires the amount of free disc space.
Syntax: SITE <SP> DF <CRLF>
SITE CHMOD
Locks and unlocks clips. Also sets permissions for
directories and files in the General directory.
Syntax: SITE CHMOD <SP> <flag> <SP> <pathname> <CRLF>
Recording Continuous
Timecode With FAM and
FTP Connections
When you are connected to the unit by FAM or
FTP, you can create new clips with timecode that
is continuous with the timecode of the last frame
of the last clip on the disc. To record continuous
timecode, set PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch
to “REGEN”, and then proceed as follows.
FAM connection
Write clip files to the unit from the computer or
other device that is connected to this unit.
FTP connection
Use the “STOR” command to transfer clip files
from the computer that is connected to this unit. If
you issue the “SITE UMMD” command
immediately before the “STOR” command, the
original timecode of the transferred file is
recorded, regardless of the setting of PRESET/
REGEN/CLOCK switch.
Input example: SITE CHMOD 444 Clip/
C0001.MXF (Lock clip C0001.MXF)
Recording Continuous Timecode With FAM and FTP Connections
Chapter 8 File Operations
Specify one of the following values in <flag>,
according to the specification in <path-name>.
• When a clip is specified in <path-name>:
444: Lock.
666: Unlock.
• When a directory in the General directory is
specified in <path-name>:
555: Forbid writing to the directory.
777: Allow writing to the directory.
• When a file in the General directory is specified
in <path-name>:
444: Forbid writing to and execution of the file.
555: Forbid writing to the file, but allow
execution.
666: Allow writing to the file, but forbid
execution.
777: Allow writing to and execution of the file.
183
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Chapter
9 Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder
Before Shooting
4
After confirming that the disc is not
write-protected, load the disc and close
the disc compartment lid.
Testing the camera
Check the functions of the camcorder before
setting out for a shooting session, preferably by
operating the camcorder together with a color
video monitor.
Set the switches and selectors as follows.
1
Preparations for testing
4 1
3
2
34 5 6
1 Iris switch: Automatic
2 Zoom selector: SERVO/MAN
3 VDR SAVE/STBY switch: SAVE
4 GAIN selector: Set as low as possible.
5 OUTPUT/DCC switch: BARS
6 WHITE BAL switch: A or B
2
1
Attach a fully charged battery pack.
2
Set the POWER switch to ON and
check that the HUMID indicator does
not appear and that the BATT indicator
shows at least five segments.
• If the HUMID indicator appears, wait until
it disappears.
• If the BATT indicator does not show at
least five segments, replace the battery
pack with a fully charged one.
3
184
Check that there are no obstructions
near the disc compartment, and then
press the EJECT button to open the disc
compartment lid.
Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting
Testing the viewfinder
1
Adjust the position of the viewfinder.
2
Check that the color bars are displayed
on the viewfinder screen, and adjust the
BRIGHT, CONTRAST, and
PEAKING controls to give the best
color bar display.
3
Check each of the following operations.
4
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM,
and change the FILTER selector
position in the sequence of 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Check that the FILTER indicator on the
viewfinder screen displays the correct
numbers.
5
Carry out of the following operations,
and check that the ! indicator lights if
the corresponding item has been turned
on on the ‘!’ LED page of the USER
menu.
• Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using
the GAIN selector and the GAIN SW page
of the OPERATION menu.
• Set the SHUTTER selector to ON.
• Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
• Use the lens extender.
• Set the reference value of the auto iris to
other than the standard value.
6
Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON
to SELECT repeatedly, and check that
the shutter setting changes on the
viewfinder screen.
7
Pointing the camera at a suitable
subject, focus the camera and check the
picture on the viewfinder screen.
8
Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to
FRONT, and check that when sound is
input to a microphone connected to the
MIC IN connector on the front of the
camcorder, the audio level indicators
appear on the viewfinder screen.
9
Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to
ON and OFF makes the zebra pattern
appear and disappear on the viewfinder
screen.
Note
The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as
expected, depending on the settings relating to the
viewfinder display function. In this case, set the desired
items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the
USER menu.
Chapter 9 Maintenance
• The menu is displayed on the viewfinder
screen.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the
menu page changes to the next page.
• Press the MENU knob and check that
settings of each item of the selected page
are displayed.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that b
moves within the page.
• Press the MENU knob and check that b
placed before the item changes to z and z
placed before the setting of the item
changes to ?.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the
setting of the selected item changes.
For details, see “Selecting the display items” on
page 148.
Testing the iris and zoom functions
1
Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode
and check that the power zoom operates
correctly.
2
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and
check the zoom functions manually.
3
Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO
and point the camera at objects of
different brightness. Check that the
automatic iris adjustment operates
correctly.
4
Set the iris switch on the lens to
MANUAL and check that turning the
iris ring manually adjusts the iris
correctly.
5
Set the iris switch on the lens back to
AUTO and check the following points
when the GAIN selector is moved from
L to M to H.
• Even when the brightness of the object
does not change, the iris is automatically
adjusted in accordance with the change in
the gain setting..
• The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen
changes to correspond to the change in
setting.
Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting
185
6
Chapter 9 Maintenance
If an extender mechanism is
incorporated in your lens, put the
extender lever of the lens into the 2×
position and check the following points.
8
• The indication “EX” appears at the top left
on the viewfinder screen.
• The auto iris functions correctly.
9
Testing the VDR
Check that fast reverse playback and normal
playback are performed.
1
Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to
SAVE and check that the SAVE
indicator in the viewfinder goes on.
2
Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to
STBY and check that the SAVE
indicator in the viewfinder goes off.
3
4
5
10 Press the STOP button again, then
11 Press the NEXT button, and check that
the image of the beginning of the next
clip is displayed.
(2) Testing the automatic audio level
adjusting functions
Set the switches located below the color
LCD as follows.
2
BRIGHT button: H, M or L
DISP SEL/EXPAND button: STATUS
DISPLAY switch: COUNTER
Set the AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2)
switches to AUTO.
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches
to F (FRONT).
4
Aim the microphone connected to the
MIC IN connector at a suitable sound
source. Check that the level indications
for channels 1 to 4 correspond to the
sound level, respectively.
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET, and set the F-RUN/
SET/R-RUN to R-RUN.
Press the REC START button and
check the following points.
Press the REC START button again.
Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6, this
time using the VTR button on the lens.
Press the RESET/RETURN button and
check that the indication in the counter
display on each of the LCD monitor and
monochrome LCD is “00:00:00:00”.
186
Check that the image of the beginning of the
current or previous clip is displayed.
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
to FRONT.
Check that recording stops and that the REC
indicator in the viewfinder goes off.
7
press the PREV button.
1
• The indication in the counter display on
each of the LCD monitor and monochrome
LCD is changing.
• The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on.
• The RF and SERVO indicators on the color
LCD are off.
6
Press the STOP button, then press the F
FWD button.
Check that playback stops and fast forward
playback are performed.
Perform tests (1) to (7) consecutively.
(1) Testing the recording and playback
functions
Press the F REV button, then press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting
(3) Testing the manual audio level
adjusting functions
1
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
to FRONT.
2
Turn the MIC LEVEL control. Check
that the channel-1 and -2 audio level
meters on the LCD monitor and
monochrome LCD show more and
more segments as you turn the control
counterclockwise as seen from the front
of the camcorder.
Turn the MONITOR volume control
and check that the speaker volume
changes accordingly.
Perform the operations of steps 1 and 2
explained in “(5) Testing external
microphones”.
2
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
to FRONT.
2
Connect an earphone to the front or
rear EARPHONE jack.
3
3
Check that the speaker sound is cut off
and that you can hear the sound from
the microphone in the earphone.
Perform the operations of steps 4 and 5
explained in “(5) Testing external
microphones”.
4
Turn the MONITOR volume control
and check that the earphone volume
changes accordingly.
5
Connect the earphone to the other
EARPHONE jack. Check the earphone
as in step 3.
1
If the audio level meters on the color and
monochrome LCDs and the audio level
indicators in the viewfinder reflect the
changing sound level, the function of the
XLR connection automatic detection is
working correctly.
If it does not reflect the changing sound level,
the function of the XLR connection
automatic detection function is off. Set
REAR XLR AUTO to “ON” on the VDR
MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu.
If it does not reflect even after making this
setting, the XLR connection automatic
detection function does not work correctly.
(5) Testing external microphones
1
Connect external microphones to the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
2
Set the +48V/OFF switches as follows.
• If the connected microphone is of the
internal power supply type, set the switch
to OFF.
• If the connected microphone is of the
external power supply type, set the switch
to +48V.
3
Set the AUDIO IN switches to REAR.
4
Aim the microphones at a sound source.
5
Check that the audio level meters on the
LCD monitor and monochrome LCD
and the audio level indicators in the
viewfinder reflect the changing sound
level.
(6) Checking the XLR connection
automatic detection function
Before starting to check, remove the front
microphone connected to the MIC IN connector if
it is connected.
Chapter 9 Maintenance
1
(4) Testing the earphone and speaker
(7) Checking the user bit and timecode
functions
1
Set the user bits as required.
For the operation, see “Setting the user bits” on
page 64.
2
Set the timecode.
For the operation, see “Setting the timecode”
on page 64.
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
R-RUN.
4
Press the REC START button, and
check that recording starts and that the
timecode indication in the counter
display changes.
5
Press the REC START button again,
and check that recording stops and that
the timecode indication stops changing.
Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting
187
Chapter 9 Maintenance
6
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN, and check that the timecode
indication starts changing again and
continues to change even when you
restart recording and stop recording
again.
7
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT, and
check that the user bit data that was set
is displayed.
Maintenance
Cleaning the viewfinder
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and
mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a
commercially available lens cleaner.
Caution
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.
Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning
1
4
1
2
1 Viewfinder barrel
2 Eyecup holder
3 Protecting filter
4 Packing ring
5 Eyecup
1
3
2
4
5
3
Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder
barrel.
For the detaching procedure, see “Detaching
the eyepiece” on page 37.
188
Maintenance
2
Remove the eyecup from the eyecup
holder.
3
Remove the protecting filter, together
with the packing ring, from inside the
eyecup holder.
4
Detach the protecting filter from the
packing ring.
Fog-proof filter
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Depending on the temperature and humidity, the
protecting filter may mist because of vapor or
your breath. To ensure that the viewfinder is
always clear, replace the protecting filter with a
fog-proof filter (option, part No. 1-547-341-11).
Fitting the fog-proof filter
Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring
with the fog-proof filter.
Be sure to correctly assemble the fog-proof filter,
the packing ring, and the eyecup so that the
reassembled eyepiece is waterproof.
Note
When cleaning the fog-proof filter, wipe it very gently
with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti-fogging
coating.
Note about the battery terminal
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
The unit may not operate properly if the pins of
the battery terminal are bent or deformed by
shock or vibrations, or if they become corroded
due to prolonged outdoor use.
If you notice bending, deformation, or surface
corrosion, contact your dealer or a Sony service
representative as soon as possible to have the
battery terminal replaced.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact your dealer or a Sony service
representative for more information about
inspections.
Maintenance
189
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Operation Warnings
If a problem occurs when the camcorder is
powered or is being operated, a warning is issued
by various visible and audible indicators. These
visible and audible indicators are:
• In the status display on the LCD monitor: a
warning message (“A” in the “Layout of the
table of warning messages” below) and a
warning indication (“B”)
• The WARNING indicator on the side panel of
the camcorder (“C”), and a warning sound from
the speaker and earphones (“D”)
• In the viewfinder: a warning message (“A”),
and an indicator above or below the viewfinder
screen (“E”)
The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted
with the ALARM knob. Set the ALARM knob to
the minimum position to suppress the sound.
Layout of the table of warning messages
A
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
Warning sound REC/TALY
BATT
B
C
D
E
Problem
VDR operation
• The operation of the WARNING indicator and
the indicators in the viewfinder is represented
by graphic symbols as follows.
: Continuous
: 1 flash/s
: 4 flashes/s
• The warning sounds are represented by graphic
symbols as follows.
: Continuous beep
: 1 beep/s
: 4 beeps/s
190
Operation Warnings
E
Action to take
MEM Full!
ILL REC!
Disc Error!
HUMID!
Warning
indication
State
—
—
WARNING
indicator
Warning sound
REC/TALLY
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Recording error
Recording stops.
Turn off the power and
consult a Sony service
representative.
Warning
indication
State
—
—
WARNING
indicator
b)
Warning sound
b)
REC/TALLY
b)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Shockproof memory overflow
Recording continues but may be
substandard.
Protect the unit from shocks
and vibrations.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
—
—
b)
Warning sound
b)
b)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Input sync error
Recording continues but may be
substandard.
Turn off the power and
contact a Sony service
representative. (This
indication may be given
momentarily when a
GENLOCK signal is
connected or disconnected,
but this does not indicate a
problem.)
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
Warning
indication
State
—
—
b)
Warning sound
b)
b)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
A disc defect was detected.
Recording continues, avoiding the
defect, but may be substandard.
If defects are detected
repeatedly, exchange the disc.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
—
—
b)
Warning sound
b)
b)
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Error**-** a)
Warning messages
BATT
—
c)
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Condensation on the optical
pickup
Recording/playback continues but
stops when an error occurs on the
drive.
Stop recording/ playback, turn
off the power, then turn it on
again, and wait until the
HUMID indicator disappears.
Operation Warnings
191
Before Full h)
BATT EMPTY!
LOW BATT! h)
MAX # Files
MAX # Clips
DISC FULL! d)
Near MAX #
Chapter 9 Maintenance
192
Warning
indication
State
DISC
flash f)
WARNING
indicator
Warning sound
b)
REC/TALLY
b)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Disc almost full.
Operation continues.
Be prepared to change the
disc.
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
Warning
indication
State
—
—
Warning sound
BATT
—
b)
(only when
recording the
300th clip) d)
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Nine or fewer clips remain until
the upper limit of 300 is reached.
Operation continues.
Be prepared to change the
disc.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
DISC and E
flash g)
Warning sound
d)
d)
d)
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Disc full.
Recording stops.
Change the disc.
Warning
indication
State
—
—
WARNING
indicator
Warning sound
d)
d)
REC/TALLY
d)
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
The upper limit of 300 recorded
clips reached.
Cannot record.
Change the disc.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
—
—
Problem
Warning sound
d)
d)
VDR operation
The upper limit of files reached.
Cannot record.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
BATT
flash f)
REC/TALLY
d)
BATT
—
BATT
—
BATT
—
Action to take
Change the disc.
Warning sound
e)
REC/TALLY
BATT
e)
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Battery almost exhausted.
Operation continues.
Change the battery.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
BATT and E
flash g)
Warning sound
BATT
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Battery exhausted.
Operation stops.
Change the battery.
Operation Warnings
High TEMP!
ACC Sensor!/
Skew Sensor
State
—
—
WARNING
indicator
Warning sound
REC/TALLY
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Internal temperature high.
Operation continues.
Power the unit off and move it
to a cool place.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
—
—
Warning sound
BATT
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Warning
indication
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Internal drive sensor error
Operation continues.
Protect the unit from shocks
and vibrations, turn off the
power, and contact a Sony
service representative.
a) Asterisks (*) are replaced by digits in the display.
b) During recording
c) During playback, fast forward, fast reverse, or stop
d) During recording pause
e) During recording or pause
f) 1 flash/s
g) 4 flashes/s
h) During recording, displayed in the LCD monitor only
(when the DISP SEL/EXPAND button is set to
STATUS)
For details about the warning displays and alarm
messages on the viewfinder, see the next item.
Operation/alarm messages
An operation or alarm message is displayed in the
operation/alarm message display area (see page
32) of the viewfinder screen.
LOW
LIGHT
Depending on the setting, the
subject illumination is inadequate.
ON-BOARD
BATTERY
EMPTY
The backup battery of the internal
DCP
EEPROM
DATA NG!
DR
EEPROM
DATA NG!
DCP/DR
EEPROM
DATA NG!
If this message continues to appear
even after the unit is powered off
and on again several times, then
the factory adjustment data is
invalid. Contact a Sony service
representative.
clock is empty. a)
A message for VDR operation is displayed in the
setting change and adjustment progress message
display area of the viewfinder screen (see page
32). Take the necessary action indicated in the
following table.
ILL. Disc!
A disc that cannot be used by this
unit was inserted. Insert another
Professional Disc.
ILL. Index!
Index file or file system error.
No FS!
Exchange or format the disc.
Unknown FS!
No Support!
A recorded clip cannot be handled
by this unit. Exchange or format
the disc.
FORMAT
NG!
The disc could not be formatted
automatically. Exchange the disc.
Disc Damage
A disc that cannot be recorded was
inserted. To record, exchange the
disc.
Non AV Full
MAX # Files
Over DUR!
The disc is full. Exchange or
format the disc.
DI read err
The disc was not recognized. Try
Read err
ejecting the disc and inserting it
DRV ADJ err again. Or exchange the disc.
Run Salvage
A disc that requires salvage was
inserted. To record on the disc,
eject the disc, insert it again, and
execute salvage processing.
a) Contact a Sony service representative to exchange the
battery.
Operation Warnings
193
Salvage NG!
Salvage processing failed.
Chapter 9 Maintenance
For details, see “Handling of discs
when recording does not end
normally (salvage function)” on
page 70.
Salvage
XXXX
REC INHI.!
The loaded disc cannot be
salvaged by this unit. The
“XXXX” in the message is a code
for XDCAM devices that can
salvage the disc. Refer to the list
of device codes (see page 71) and
salvage the disc using one of the
indicated devices.
The Write Inhibit tab of the disc is
in the recording disabled position,
or salvage processing needs to be
done on the loaded disc. Set the
tab to the recording enabled
position. Or eject the disc, insert it
again, and perform salvage
processing.
1080/50i
1080/25P
1080/59.94i
The loaded disc has a different
recording format. Exchange the
disc, or change the recording
format.
Index File!
There is an unsupported index file
on the disc to which you are trying
to record. Exchange or format the
disc.
File System
Loading!
Unloading!
An operation was attempted while
a disc was loading or unloading.
Wait for the disc to finish loading
or unloading and try again.
Disc Top!
Disc End!
The operation is not possible
because the disc is at the top or
end.
Formatting!
The disc is being automatically
formatted. Wait until the format
ends.
Recording
The unit is writing to the file
system. Wait until writing
finishes.
No EM Space Essence marks cannot be inserted.
EM Full!
For details, see “Recording
essence marks” on page 76.
SB CLP mode An essence mark operation was
attempted while the SUB CLIP
indicator was lit. Press the SUB
CLIP/DISC MENU button to turn
the indicator off and try again.
No SEL List
No clip list is selected. Create a
new clip list, or load a clip list
from the disc.
No List!
There is no clip list. Create a clip
list.
No SUB Clip
There are no sub clips in the clip
list. Register a sub clip, or load
another clip list.
There is an unsupported file
system on the disc to which you
are trying to record. Exchange or
format the disc.
SUB Clip NG The In and Out point positions are
invalid. Set correct In and Out
points.
ILL. PLAY!
An A/V phase error occurred
during playback. Stop the disc.
MAX# SB
CLP
The total number of sub clips is
over the upper limit (300).
Lid Closed!
The lid of the disc compartment
does not open. Check the lid.
CL OVER
DUR
Lid Open!
The lid of the disc compartment is
not closed. Close it securely.
The total duration of sub clips in
the current clip list is over the
upper limit (24 hours).
No Clip!
There are no clips recorded on the
disc. Exchange for a recorded
disc.
No Disc!
There is no disc loaded. Insert a
disc and try the operation again.
STOP ONCE! The operation is not possible
REC mode!
while the disc is being played or
recorded. Stop the disc.
FAN Stopped The main unit or drive fan has
DR-FAN Stop stopped. Avoid use under high
temperatures, turn off the power,
and contact a Sony service
representative.
NVRAM NG! An error was detected while
accessing internal memory. Power
the unit off and contact a Sony
service representative.
Update Err!
194
Operation Warnings
A firmware update failed. Power
the unit off and contact a Sony
service representative.
The USB connector of this unit is
for maintenance purposes only.
Do not connect a USB device for
any purpose other than
maintenance.
Alarm messages during thumbnail
search, scene selection, and clip list
operations
An alarm message may appear in the LCD
monitor during thumbnail search, scene selection,
and clip list operations. In that case, take the
action indicated in the following table.
Sub Clip does An attempt is made to execute a
not Exist.
Move Sub Clips (see page 101),
Trim Sub Clip (see page 102),
Delete Sub Clips (see page 102),
or Set Start Time Code (see page
103) operation with no sub clips in
the current clip list.
Clip List does An attempt is made to execute a
not Exist.
Delete Clip List operation (see
page 104) when there are no clip
lists on the disc.
Move is
Invalid.
An attempt is made to execute a
Move Sub Clips operation (see
page 101) when there are no sub
clip in the current clip list, or when
there is only one.
An attempt is made to execute a
Delete Shot Mark (see page 93)
operation on a clip with no shot
marks recorded in.
Cannot
Expand Clip
any Further.
The clip cannot be expanded into
more blocks. This alarm appears
when the EXPAND button is
pressed when the number of
blocks is maximum, or when the
duration of an expanded thumbnail
is 1 frame.
Shot Mark
does not
Exist.
Selected
Essence Mark
Does not
Exist.
The selected essence mark does
not exist.
This alarm appears in the essence
mark selection screen when the
specified essence mark does not
exist on the disc.
Rec Start
cannot be
Deleted.
An attempt is made to delete a Rec
Start with a Delete Shot Mark
operation. Only Shot Mark1 and
Shot Mark2 essence marks can be
deleted.
Sub Clip is
Invalid. Set
Appropriate
IN/OUT
Points.
The temporal relationship between
the specified In and Out points in a
TRIM operation (see page 102) is
not correct. Reset so that the value
of the Out point timecode is larger
than the value of the In point
timecode.
Rec Start
cannot be
Moved.
An attempt was made to move a
Rec Start essence mark with a
Move shot mark operation. Only
Shot Mark1 and Shot Mark2
essence marks can be moved.
Duration of
One Clip List
must be Less
than 24
Hours.
The total duration of the current
clip list exceeds the upper limit of
24 hours as the result of an Add
Sub Clips (see page 100) or Trim
Sub Clip (see page 102) operation.
Clip is
Locked.
An attempt is made to delete a
clip, set the clip thumbnail, or
delete a shot mark when the clip is
locked.
All Clips are
Locked.
No More Sub
Clips can be
Added to the
Clip List.
The total number of the sub clips
of the current clip list exceeds the
upper limit of 300 as the result of
an Add Sub Clips (see page 100)
or Trim Sub Clip (see page 102)
operation.
An attempt is made to execute a
Lock All Clips operation when all
clips are already locked.
All Clips are
Unlocked.
An attempt is made to execute an
Unlock All Clips operation when
all clips are already unlocked.
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Unknown
USB
Chapter does An attempt was made to display a
not Exist.
nonexistent chapter.
Operation Warnings
195
Appendix
Appendix
Important Notes on
Operation
Use and storage
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the
body warped.
Before storing the camcorder for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
To prevent electromagnetic interference from
portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this unit can result
in malfunctions and interference with audio and
video signals.
It is recommended that the portable
communications devices near this unit be
powered off.
Shipping
• Remove the disc before transporting the unit.
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other
transportation service, pack it in the shipping
carton of the unit.
Note on laser beams
Laser beams may damage the CCDs.
If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be
careful not to let the laser beam be directed into
the lens of the camera.
Care of the unit
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the
lenses or optical filters using a blower.
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft,
dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in
a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not
use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners,
as these may cause discoloration or other damage
to the finish of the unit.
Condensation
Do not cover the unit while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can
cause excessive internal heat build-up.
After use
Always turn off the POWER switch.
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the unit,
contact a Sony representative.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or
storing the unit in the following places.
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
range: 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F))
196
• Remember that in summer in warm climates the
temperature inside a car with the windows
closed can easily exceed 50°C (122°F).
• In damp or dusty locations
• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain
• Locations subject to violent vibration
• Near strong magnetic fields
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing
strong electromagnetic fields.
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for
extended periods
Important Notes on Operation
If you move the camcorder from a very cold place
to a warm place, or use it in a damp location,
condensation may form on the optical pickup.
Then, if the camcorder is operated in this state,
recording and playback may not be performed
properly.
Do the following to prevent this from happening.
• When you move or operate the camcorder in an
environment where condensation may form, be
sure to load a disc in advance and close the disc
compartment lid.
• Whenever you turn on the power, check that the
HUMID indicator does not appear on the color
LCD. If it appears, wait until it disappears
before loading a disc.
For details, see “Loading and unloading a disc” on
page 69 and “Operation Warnings” on page 190.
Fitting the zoom lens
It is important to fit the lens correctly, as
otherwise damage may result. Be sure to refer to
the section “Mounting the Lens” on page 40.
Viewfinder
About the LCD panels
LCD panels are manufactured with extremely
high-precision technology that yields effective
pixel rates of 99.99% or higher. However, very
rarely, one or more pixels may be permanently
dark or permanently lit in white, red, blue, or
green.
This phenomenon is not a malfunction. Such
pixels have no effect on the recorded data, and the
unit may be used with confidence even if they are
present.
Phenomena specific to CCD image
sensors
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CCD (Charge Coupled
Device) image sensors. They do not indicate
malfunctions.
Vertical smear
When an extremely bright object, such as a strong
spotlight or flashlight, is being shot, vertical tails
may be produced on the screen, or the image may
be distorted.
1
2
Appendix
• Do not leave the unit with the eyepiece pointing
directly at the sun.
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s
rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder.
• Do not use the viewfinder close to strong
magnetic fields. This can cause picture
distortion.
(see page 133). Pixel noise is reduced to some
extent by automatic black balance adjustment
(see page 53), but the detection capabilities of
that function are limited. For the most effective
correction, execute the APR function.
If “No More White Pixel” appears after the APR
function is executed, then there are no more
detectable defects.
3
1Monitor screen
2Vertical tails shown on the image
3Bright object (e.g. strong spotlight,
strong reflected light, flashlight, the sun)
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.
White flecks
Although the CCD image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.
This is related to the principle of CCD image
sensors and is not a malfunction.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the
following cases:
• When operating at a high environmental
temperature
• When you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
The problem may be alleviated by executing the
APR (automatic pixel noise reduction) function
on the APR page of the MAINTENANCE menu
Important Notes on Operation
197
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Power voltage
12 V DC +5.0/–1.0 V
222(8 3/4)
Appendix
General
269(10 5/8)
124(5)
Specifications
Power consumption
Approx. 40W 1)
Approx. 44W 2)
Approx. 46W 3)
1) Recording, main unit only, power from battery pack,
VDR SAVE/STBY switch set to SAVE, LCD monitor
on (backlight: low).
2) Recording, options installed (HDVF-20A viewfinder,
ECM-680S microphone, lens), power from battery
pack, VDR SAVE/STBY switch set to SAVE, LCD
monitor on (backlight: low).
3) Recording, options installed (HDVF-20A viewfinder,
ECM-680S microphone, lens), DC power, VDR
SAVE/STBY switch set to STBY, LCD monitor on
(backlight: high).
Video camera section
Imager
2
/3-inch type, 1920 (H) × 1080 (V)
Imager Configuration
RGB 3 CCDs
Spectral system
F1.4 prism system (with quartz filter)
Operating humidity
10% to 90% (relative humidity)
Built-in filters
ND filter (optical)
1: Clear
2: 1/4 ND
3: 1/16 ND
4: 1/64 ND
Storage temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Lens mount
2
/3-inch 48 bayonet mount
Recording format
Video: MPEG HD 422 50 Mbps
Proxy video: MPEG-4
Audio: MPEG HD 422: 4 channels, 24
bits/48 kHz
Proxy audio: A-law 4CH 8bits/8kHz
Sensitivity
F11 (system frequency: 59.94i)
F12 (system frequency: 50i)
(89.9% reflection chart, 2000 lx)
Operating temperature
–5°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Continuous operating time
Approx. 120 min. (with BP-GL95)
Mass
Approx. 4.3 kg (9 lb 4 oz) (main body
only)
Approx. 6.0 kg (13 lb) (with HDVF-20A
viewfinder, ECM-680S microphone,
disc and BP-GL95 Battery Pack)
198
332(13 1/8)
Specifications
Minimum illumination
0.016 1x (F1.4, +42 dB, with 16-frame
accumulation)
Video S/N ratio
59 dB (With noise suppression on. Off
value is 54 dB.)
Modulation (at screen center)
45% or more
Registration
0.02% or less for entire screen area
(excluding distortion due to lens)
Geometric distortion
None identified (excluding distortion
due to lens)
Smear
Distortion (THD)
0.08% max.
Cross talk
–70 dB max.
Wow and flutter
Below measurable limit
Appendix
–135 dB
LCD panel
3.5 inches
Pixel resolution: 250,880 pixels
Optical disc drive section
General
Input/output connectors
Signal inputs
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2: XLR type, 3-pin,
female
–60 dBu/+4 dBu (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
MIC IN: XLR type, 5-pin, female
–60 dBu
Usable disc
PFD50DLA Professional Disc
(capacity: 50.0 GB)
PFD23A Professional Disc (capacity:
23.3 GB)
GENLOCK IN: BNC type
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced
Data transfer rate
Max. 72 Mbps
TEST OUT: BNC type
VBS/Y (component): 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω,
unbalanced
Recording/playback time
MPEG IMX 50 Mbps
PFD50DLA: Approx. 95 minutes
PFD23A: Approx. 43 minutes
Digital video
Sampling frequency
Y: 74.176 MHz (59.94i), 74.25 MHz
(50i/25P)
Pb/Pr: 37.088 MHz (59.94i), 37.125
MHz (50i/25P)
TC IN: BNC type
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ
Signal outputs
SDI OUT 1/2: BNC type
HD-SDI/SD-SDI: 0.8 Vp-p, unbalanced
AUDIO OUT: XLR type, 5-pin, male
0 dBm
TC OUT: BNC type
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
EARPHONE (minijack)
8 Ω, –∞ to –18 dBs variable
Others
Quantization
8 bits/sample
DC IN: XLR type, 4-pin, male
11 to 17 V DC
Compression
MPEG-2 4:2:2P@HL 50 Mbps
DC OUT: 4-pin
11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated current
0.5 A
Audio (with standard playback machine)
Frequency response
20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB
LENS: 12-pin
REMOTE: 8-pin
LIGHT: 2-pin
Dynamic range
93 dB min.
Specifications
199
(i.LINK) S400: 6-pin, complies with IEEE
1394
Appendix
(network): RJ-45 type
100BASE-TX: Complies with
IEEE802.3u
10BASE-T: Complies with IEEE802.3
USB 2.0: HOST Type-A, 4-pin (for maintenance)
Audio equipment
ECM-680S Stereo/Monaural Microphone
ECM-678/674 Monaural Microphone
CAC-12 Microphone Holder
DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
Supplied accessories
Shoulder strap (1)
Microphone cable (for converting 3-pin
connector to two 5-pin connectors) (1)
Operation manuals
English version (1)
Japanese version (1)
CD-ROM manual (1)
XDCAM Application Software CD-ROM (1)
Recommended additional
equipment
Power supply and related equipment
BP- GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery Pack
BC-M150/L500/L70 Battery Charger
AC-DN10/DN2B AC Adaptor
WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
WRT-850/860 UHF Synthesized Transmitter
DWT-B01 Digital Wireless Transmitter
DMX-P02 Portable Digital Mixer
Note
When you use the DWR-S01D Digital Wireless
Receiver in combination with this camcorder, you need
to check both of their versions.
Consult a Sony representative for information about
these versions.
Equipment for maintenance and easier
handling
LC-777 Hard Carrying Case
LC-DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case
VCT-14 Tripod Adaptor
Viewfinder and related equipment
Maintenance Manual
HDVF-20A/200/C35W Viewfinder
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
Note
Contact a Sony service representative for information
about the viewfinders able to use the BKW-401.
Equipment for remote control
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit
“Memory Stick”
“Memory Stick”
“Memory Stick PRO” (4 GB or less)
“Memory Stick Duo”
200
“Memory Stick PRO Duo”
Specifications
Notes
Appendix
• Always make a test recording, and verify that
it was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION
OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO
RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating
properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF
PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS
DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR
AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER
REASON WHATSOEVER.
Specifications
201
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories
Appendix
LCD monitor
BVM-L230, LMD series monitor
ECM-680S/678/
674 Microphone
CAC-12
Microphone Holder
XDCAM HD series recorder
PDW-HD1500, PDW-F75
HDVF-20A/200/
C35W Viewfinder
HDCAM series recorder
HDW-2000 series recorder, HDW-S280
WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver a)
PFD23A/PFD50DLA Professional disc
PDW-700
RM-B150/B750
Remote Control Unit
VCT-14 Tripod
adaptor
BP-GL95/GL65/
L60S/L80S
Battery Pack
BC-L70
Battery
Charger
BC-M150
Battery
Charger
BC-L500 Battery
Charger
Tripod
AC-DN10/DN2B
AC Adaptor
LC-DS300 SFT Soft
carrying case b)
LC-777 Hard carrying
case
a) When you use the DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver in
combination with this camcorder, you need to check both of
their versions.
Consult a Sony representative for information about these
versions.
b) The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with
lens and microphone mounted. However, remove them if they
protrude more than 25 cm from the front of the main unit.
202
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories
Using PDZ-1 Proxy
Browsing Software
For more information about PDZ-1 functions and
operations, refer to the PDZ-1 help.
System requirements
The following are required to use PDZ-1.
Computer: PC with Intel Pentium M processor,
at least 1 GHz (installed memory: at least 512
MB)
Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP
Professional SP2 or higher, Windows Vista
Ultimate/Business (32 bit), or Mac OS X
v10.4.11 or higher
Web browser: Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 or
higher
DirectX: DirectX 8.1b or higher
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio
License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
Appendix
When a computer with the PDZ-1 Proxy
Browsing Software installed is connected to this
unit, you can transfer the proxy AV data and
metadata files recorded on a disc to the computer.
On the computer side, PDZ-1 enables you to
browse the proxy AV data, add or modify
metadata (titles, comments, essence marks, etc.),
or create a clip list.
The modified metadata and the created clip list
can then be written back to the disc loaded in this
unit.
Trademarks and
Licenses
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN
A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG
LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING
THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND
LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://
WWW.MPEGLA.COM
To install PDZ-1
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM
Application Software) into the CD-ROM drive of
your computer, and run the installer in the PDZ-1
directory.
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the
CD-ROM disc.
Notes
• Make sure that the hard disk drive on which the work
folder to store the material transferred from this unit
has adequate free space.
• To transfer files between the computer and this unit
requires this unit's IP address and other networkrelated settings to be made.
MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i) manufacturing/
sales of any storage media storing MPEG-4 Visual video
information (ii) distribution/broadcasting of MPEG-4
Visual video information in any manner (such as online
video distribution service, internet broadcasting, TV
broadcasting). Other usage of this product may be
required to obtain license from MPEGLA. Please contact
MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA,
L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206, http://www.mpegla.com
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio
License
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING
Using PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software / Trademarks and Licenses
203
Appendix
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206.
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage media
storing MPEG-2 video information such as DVD movie
which are sold/distributed to general consumers. Disc
replicators or sellers of the PACKAGED MEDIA need
to obtain licenses for their own business from MPEG
LA. Please contact MPEG LA for any further
information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206
http://www.mpegla.com
About IJG (Independent JPEG
Group)
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG.
Character display software
“iType”
This product includes technology from Monotype
Imaging Inc., including iType® and certain fonts.
About a “Memory Stick”
What is “Memory Stick”?
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and
versatile IC (Integrated Circuit) recording
medium with a data capacity that exceeds a
floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is specially
designed for exchanging and sharing digital data
among “Memory Stick” compatible products.
Because it is removable, “Memory Stick” can
also be used for external data storage.
“Memory Stick” is available in two sizes:
standard size and compact “Memory Stick Duo”
size. Once attached to a “Memory Stick Duo”
adaptor, “Memory Stick Duo” turns to the same
size as standard “Memory Stick” and thus can be
used with products compliant with standard
“Memory Stick”.
Types of “Memory Stick”
“Memory Stick” is available in the following five
types to meet various requirements in functions.
“Memory Stick-R”
Stored data are not overwritten. You can write
data to “Memory Stick-R” with “Memory StickR” compatible products only. Copyright
protected data that requires MagicGate copyright
protection technology cannot be written to
“Memory Stick-R”.
“Memory Stick”
Stores any type of data except copyrightprotected data that requires the MagicGate
copyright protection technology.
“MagicGate Memory Stick”
Equipped with the MagicGate copyright
protection technology.
“Memory Stick-ROM”
Stores pre-recorded, read-only data. You cannot
record on “Memory Stick-ROM” or erase the prerecorded data.
“Memory Stick PRO”
Equipped with the MagicGate copyright
protection technology, designed for use only with
204
About a “Memory Stick”
equipment compatible with “Memory Stick
PRO”.
Available types of “Memory Stick”
Note on data read/write speed
Data read/write speed may vary depending on the
combination of the “Memory Stick” and
“Memory Stick” compliant product you use.
What is MagicGate?
MagicGate is copyright protection technology
that uses encryption technology.
Before using a “Memory Stick”
Appendix
With this camcorder, you can use a Sony
“Memory Stick”, “Memory Stick Duo”,
“Memory Stick PRO” whose capacity does not
exceed 4 GB, and “Memory Stick PRO Duo”.
• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick”
with anything, including your finger or metallic
objects.
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick”.
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location
that is:
- Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun
- Under direct sunlight
- Very humid or subject to corrosive substances
“Memory Stick” access indicator
If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing,
data is being read from or written to the “Memory
Stick”. At this time, do not shake the computer or
product or subject them to shock. Do not turn off
the power of the computer and product or remove
the “Memory Stick”. This may damage the data.
Precautions
1
2
3
1Terminal
2Write-protect tab
3Labeling position
• When you set the “Memory Stick” write-protect
tab to “LOCK”, data cannot be recorded, edited,
or erased. (“Memory Stick Duo” and “Memory
Stick PRO Duo” do not have this function.)
• Data may be damaged if:
- You remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off
the unit while it is reading or writing data.
- You use the “Memory Stick” in a location
subject to the effects of static electricity or
electric noise.
• We recommend that you make a backup copy of
important data that you record on the “Memory
Stick”.
• To prevent data loss, make backups of data
frequently. In no event will Sony be liable for
any loss of data.
• Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the
provisions of copyright law. When you use a
“Memory Stick” that has been pre-recorded, be
sure that the material has been recorded in
accordance with copyright and other applicable
laws.
• The “Memory Stick” application software of
the camcorder may be modified or changed by
Sony without prior notice.
• Note that there are certain restrictions on
recording stage performances and other
entertainment events, even if they are recorded
for personal use only.
Notes
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to
the “Memory Stick” labeling position.
• Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the
labeling position.
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.
About a “Memory Stick”
205
Appendix
206
• “Memory Stick” and
are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick Duo” and
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick PRO” and
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick PRO Duo” and
are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick-ROM” and
are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
• “MagicGate Memory Stick” is a trademark of
Sony Corporation.
• “MagicGate” and
are
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
About a “Memory Stick”
Black balance, adjusting
BRIGHT button 22
BRIGHT control 29
Built-in speaker 20
Index
53
C
Symbols
! (warning) indicator 30
+48V/OFF switches 28
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
5600K function 156
27
A
AC power 34
ACCESS indicator 20
Accessories 202
Additional equipment 200
ALARM knob 18
ALL menu 109
Area of use, setting 38
Arrow buttons 25
ASSIGN switches 17, 26
assigning functions 155
ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) 19
Audio control section 25
Audio format 23
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 28
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 switches 26
Audio input system 42
Audio level 32
adjusting playback level 18
adjusting recording level 61
AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs 25
Audio level indicators 23
AUDIO OUT connector 28
AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches 26
AUTO W/B BAL switch 17
B
BATT indicator 30
Battery attachment shoe
Battery pack 33
15
Index
Index
Numerics
Camera operator tally indicator 29
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch 19
CC 5600K function 156
Chapter
thumbnail screen 88
Chapter function 93
Clip 98
assigning user-defined name 81
assigning user-defined title 78
changing index picture 95
deleting 97
duration 86
finding 92
locking 96
properties 96
thumbnail screen 85
unlocking 97
Clip list 99
assigning user-defined name 81
clearing 104
creating and editing 99
deleting 104
loading 104
playback 99
saving 103
sorting 105
thumbnail screen 87
Clip list editing 98
Clip number/number of clips 31
Color LCD 20
status display 22
COLOR TEMP. button 18
Color temperature 31
setting manually 158
Condensation 196
CONTRAST control 29
Controlling external device 31
Cover 20
Current clip list 99
Customization
assigning functions to ASSIGN switches
155
207
D
Index
Date, setting 39
DC IN connector 15
DC OUT 12V connector 15
DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control)
DIAGNOSIS menu 110, 138
Digital hours meter 138
Diopter adjustment ring 29
Directory structure 170
Disc
capacity 68
formatting 70, 105
loading and unloading 69
operations 105
playback conditions 75
playback start position 74
properties 105
restoring lost data 70
salvage function 70
unloading manually 69
write-protecting 68
Disc Menu 90
DISP SEL/EXPAND button 21
DISPLAY switch 22
DISPLAY/ASPECT switch 29
E
G
EARPHONE jack 17, 28
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode 57
E-E (Electric-to-Electric) 17
EJECT button 20
Electric color temperature filter 31
Electronic shutter 56
Essence mark
finding scenes 94
recording 76
thumbnail screen 88
Ethernet connector 27
Expand
thumbnail screen 87
Expand function 93
Extender 31
External battery 31
Eyecup 29
GAIN selector 18
Gain value 32
setting 154
GENLOCK IN connector 26
Green tally indicator 30
GUI screen
operations 91
switching 84
GUI screen operations section 25
F
F FWD button
208
18
F REV button 20
File
ALL 110
ID 163
lens 110
reference 110
scene 110
user 110
File access mode
for Macintosh 176
for Windows 174
FILE menu 110, 134
File operations 170
file access mode 174, 176
FTP 178
recording continuous timecode 183
restrictions 170
Filter 31
FILTER selector 16
Fitting for optional microphone holder 15
Flange focal length, adjusting 41
Format 52
Frame frequency 23
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch 25
FTP 178
command list 179
Index
21
H
HOLD/CHAPTER button
21
I
i.LINK S400 connector 28
Index picture
changing 95
Indicators and status display 29
Internal clock 39
MIC IN (+48 V) connector 16
MIC LEVEL control 17
Microphone holder 30
Microphone, connecting 42
MONITOR knob 18
MONITOR switches 18
Monochrome LCD 20
status display 22
Iris setting/auto iris override 32
Iris, automatic adjustment 59
L
N
Network connector 27
NEXT button 21
Noise suppression function
Index
LCD monitor 20
selecting display items 148
status display 22
Lens cable clamp 16
LENS connector 16
Lens file, selecting 159
Lens locking lever 16
Lens mount 16
Lens mount cap 16
Lens mount securing rubber 15
Lens, mounting 40
Lid of the disc compartment 26
LIGHT connector 15
Light fitting shoe 15
LIGHT switch 14
LINE /AES/EBU / MIC selectors 28
Line input audio equipment, connecting
Live & Play function 74
122
O
46
OPERATION menu 109, 111
Operation/alarm message display area
Optional components 202
Output signal, selecting 155
OUTPUT/DCC switch 18
Ownership information 160
32
M
P
Maintenance 188
MAINTENANCE menu 110, 123
Marker display
setting 149
“Memory Stick” 204
handling 161
jumping to file-related menu page 168
loading saved data 164
saving user menu data 162
“Memory Stick” compartment 19
Menu
disc menu 90
setting menu list 111
setting menu operations 140
setting menu organization 108
thumbnail menu 89
MENU button 25
MENU knob 17
MENU ON/OFF switch 19
Message
change confirmation/adjustment progress
149
operation/alarm 193
warning 191
PAINT menu 109, 117
PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software 203
PEAKING control 29
Picture Cache function 77
Pixel noise reduction function 133
PLAY/PAUSE button 20
Playback
clip list 99
freeze-frame 74
normal 74
search result 94
Plug 29
Power saving function 157
Power source voltage/battery remaining capacity 31
Power supply 33
POWER switch 14
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch 25
PREV button 21
Protection cover of the audio control section
20
Protection cover of the GUI screen operations
section 20
Index
209
R
Index
REC indicator 30
REC START button 16
Recording
using memory cache 77
Recording format 52
Recording review 73
Red tally indicator 30
Remaining battery capacity indicator 24
Remaining clips display 32
Remaining disc capacity 32
Remaining disc capacity indicator 24
REMOTE connector 28
Remote control unit, connecting 50
RESET/RETURN button 21
Resolution 22
Retake function 78
Shoulder strap, using 48
Shutter mode 56
SHUTTER selector 16
Shutter speed 32, 57
Skip scroll 92
Specifications 198
Status confirmation screen 153
Status display 23
STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch 19
STOP button 21
Stopper 29
Sub clip 99
adding 100
changing start timecode 103
deleting 102
reordering 101
trimming 102
SUB CLIP button 25
SUB CLIP indicator 25
S
Scene
editing 98
finding 93, 94
playback 94
Scene file
loading 167
saving 165
Scene selection 98
Scrollbar 86
SDI IN (OPTION) connector 26
SDI OUT 1 connector 28
SDI OUT 2 connector 28
SET/S.SEL button 25
Setting change and adjustment progress message display area 32
SHIFT button 25
Shooting
advanced operations 76
basic procedure 72
Shortcut list 107
Shot data
recording 151
Shot ID
setting 152
Shot mark
recording 76
Shoulder pad 15
adjusting position 49
Shoulder strap fitting 15
210
Index
T
TALLY indicator 27, 30
Tally indicator 29
TALLY switch 27, 29
TC IN connector 27
TC OUT connector 27
TEST OUT connector 27
Testing 184
Thumbnail
display items 86
operations 92
searching 92
selecting 92
selecting clip information 94
selecting multiple thumbnails 92
Thumbnail image, setting 76
THUMBNAIL indicator 25
Thumbnail Menu 89
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button 25
Time counter display 23
Time data 64
Time, setting 39
Timecode 32
setting 64
synchronizing 65
TOP menu 109
Tripod mount 16
Tripod, mounting 47
U
UHF portable tuner, attaching 44
UMID data, setting 159
USB connector 27
User bits, setting 64
USER menu 109
editing 144
resetting 147
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu
User menu data
loading 164
saving 162
adjusting 54
specifying offset 158
White balance memory 32
Wireless microphone reception level
31
X
109
XLR connection automatic detection function
44
Z
Index
ZEBRA switch 29
Zoom position 31
V
VDR SAVE/STBY switch 18
VF connector 15
Video format 23, 31
Video light, connecting 48
Viewfinder
adjusting focus 37
adjusting position 35
adjusting screen 37
attaching 34
cleaning 188
detaching eyepiece 37
HDVF-20A (optional) 29
moving shoe up 35
rotation bracket 36
screen 30
selecting display items 148
setting 150
status display 30
Viewfinder cable 30
Viewfinder fitting shoe 15
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
15
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever
15
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring 15
VTR SAVE indicator 30
W
WARNING indicator 20
Warning indicator area 23
Warnings 190
WHITE BAL switch 19
White balance
Index
211
Index
212
Index
The material contained in this manual consists of
information that is the property of Sony
Corporation and is intended solely for use by the
purchasers of the equipment described in this
manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the
duplication of any portion of this manual or the
use thereof for any purpose other than the
operation or maintenance of the equipment
described in this manual without the express
written permission of Sony Corporation.
">